JP2019118610A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of stabilizing a drive state of drive means.SOLUTION: Transmission of a collision force of a granular member 320 in a contact state between a collision member 420 and a linear movement member 410 is configured so that it can be cut off, and thereby a drive state of a drive motor MT1 can be stabilized. In addition, the durability of the drive motor MT1 can be improved by suppressing unstable increase and decrease of operation resistance of the drive motor MT1. Also, a method of suppressing load transmission in the contact state is not limited at all. For example, a member capable of absorbing a load may be interposed at a contact portion, or the displacement of the collision member 420 causing the load (for example, the collision member 420 receiving an external force) may be configured to occur only in a non-contact state of the collision member 420.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 38

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  There is a gaming machine provided with displacement means configured of one movable body displaced by the driving force of the driving means (Patent Document 1).

JP, 2016-028623, A

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of stabilizing the driving state. The present invention has been made to solve the problems illustrated above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of stabilizing the drive state of the drive means.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a drive means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable, and a transmission means configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive means to the displacement means. A gaming machine comprising: a first means configured to be changeable in an abutting state abutted against the displacement means, and a non-abutted non-abutment state against the displacement means; The target to which the load applied from the outside is transmitted is configured to be switchable.

  The game machine according to claim 2 is the game machine according to claim 1, wherein the load received by the displacement means from the first means and the driving force received by the displacement means via the transmission means are on the same side. Turn.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, there is provided the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, further comprising: an arranging means arranged to be capable of colliding with the first means, the collision of the arranging means being the communication means. The displacement means is configured to occur in a non-contacting state.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the driving state of the driving means can be stabilized.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to reduce the load transmitted to the drive means.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of the first or second aspect, the transmission of the collision force of the arranging means to the driving means can be blocked.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in the XIIa-XIIa line of FIG. 7, and an operation | movement unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in the XIIIa-XIIIa line | wire of FIG. 9, and an operation | movement unit. It is sectional drawing of the game board in the XIV-XIV line of FIG. 9, and an operation | movement unit. (A) is a back perspective view of a displacement control apparatus, (b) is a front perspective view of a displacement control apparatus, (c) is a front perspective view of a displacement control apparatus. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a displacement control apparatus. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a displacement control apparatus. (A) is a rear view of the contact member, (b) is a front view of the guide member, and (c) is a front view of the operation member. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a game board and an operation unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the game board in the XXIa-XXIa line | wire of FIG. 20, and an operation | movement unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board and a launch effect unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a game board and a launch effect unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a launch effect unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a launch effect unit. (A) is a side view of the 1st light irradiation apparatus in the arrow R direction view of FIG. 25, (b) is a side view of the 2nd light irradiation apparatus in the arrow L direction view of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the game board in the XXVII-XXVII line of FIG. 2, and a launching unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a rear exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a rear exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a rear exploded perspective view of an injection device. (A) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member in the arrow XXXIVa direction view of FIG. 28, (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member in the arrow XXXIVb direction of FIG. (C) is a fragmentary sectional view of a transmission arm member and a lid member in the XXXIVc-XXXIVc line of Drawing 34 (b). (A) is a top view of the transmission arm member and the lid member in the arrow XXXIVa direction view of FIG. 28, (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member in the arrow XXXVb direction of FIG. (C) is a fragmentary sectional view of a transmission arm member and a lid member in the XXXVc-XXXVc line of Drawing 35 (b). (A) is a top view of the transmission arm member and the lid member in the arrow XXXIVa direction view of FIG. 28, (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member in the arrow XXXVIb direction of FIG. (C) is a fragmentary sectional view of a transmission arm member and a lid member in the XXXVIc-XXXVIc line of Drawing 36 (b). (A) is a top view of the front side transmission member in the arrow XXXVIIa direction view of FIG. 28, (b) is a top view of the rear side transmission member in the arrow XXXVIIb direction view of FIG. It is a top view of the injection device in the arrow XXXVIIa direction view of FIG. It is a top view of the injection device in the arrow XXXVIIa direction view of FIG. It is a top view of the injection device in the arrow XXXVIIa direction view of FIG. It is a top view of the injection device in the arrow XXXVIIa direction view of FIG. (A)-(f) is a top view of the linear_motion | direct_drive member in the arrow XXXVIIa direction view of FIG. 28, a collision member, a contact member, and a front transmission member. (A) to (e) are plan views of the linear motion member, the collision member, the contact member, and the front transmission member in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. (A) to (f) are plan views of the rear side transmission member, the transmission arm member, and the lid member in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. It is a top view of the injection device in the arrow XXXVIIa direction view of FIG. Output state of the detection sensor, arrangement of the linear movement member, arrangement of the collision member, arrangement of the projecting portion of the contact member, and arrangement of the cylindrical projection of the transmission arm member according to the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member It is a figure showing time change of. It is a front perspective view of a scaling unit. It is a front perspective view of a scaling unit. It is a rear perspective view of a scaling unit. It is a rear perspective view of a scaling unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a scaling unit. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a scaling unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a presentation member. It is a back surface disassembled perspective view of a presentation member. It is a front view of a functional board part. It is a front view of a rotating plate. It is a side view of a rotating plate. (A) is a front perspective view of an elastic displacement member and a shielding design member, (b) is a rear perspective view of an elastic displacement member and a shielding design member. (A) is a front perspective view of an elastic displacement member and a shielding design member, (b) is a rear perspective view of an elastic displacement member and a shielding design member. It is a front view of a functional board part. It is a front view of a functional board part. It is a front view of a scaling unit. It is a front view of a scaling unit. It is a front view of a scaling unit. It is a rear view of a scaling unit. It is a rear view of a scaling unit. It is a rear view of a scaling unit. It is a front view of a scaling unit. It is a rear view of a scaling unit. It is a front view of a scaling unit. It is a rear view of a scaling unit. (A) And (b) is a rear view of a presentation member. It is a rear view of a presentation member. (A) is a rear view of a presentation member, (b) is a top view of the presentation member in the arrow LXXIVb direction view of FIG. 74 (a). (A) is a rear view of a presentation member, (b) is a top view of the presentation member in the arrow LXXVb direction view of FIG. 75 (a). FIG. 76 is a cross-sectional view of a performance member taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. 75. It is a front perspective view of a displacement rotation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a displacement rotation unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a displacement rotation unit. It is a back surface disassembled perspective view of a displacement rotation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a horizontal slide member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a horizontal slide member. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the displacement rotation unit in the LXXXIII-LXXXIII line of FIG. It is a perspective view of a wiring arm member. It is a perspective view of a path formation member of a wiring guide member. (A) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit along line LXXXVIb-LXXXVIb in FIG. 86 (a). (A) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit taken along line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87 (a). (A) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit taken along line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. (A) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit along line LXXXIXb-LXXXIXb in FIG. 89 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a game board. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a center frame, a light-guide plate presentation means, and a decoration means. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a center frame, a light-guide plate presentation means, and a decoration means. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a center frame, a light-guide plate presentation means, and a decoration means. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a center frame, a light-guide plate presentation means, and a decoration means. It is sectional drawing of the game board in the XCVI-XCVI line of FIG. 2, and an operation | movement unit. It is a partial front enlarged view of the 1st decoration member in range XCVII of FIG. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the expansion / contraction unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of a rotating plate. The output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear movement member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the projecting portion of the contact member, and the circle of the transmission arm member according to the rotation of the front side transmission member and the rear side transmission member in the fourth embodiment. It is the figure which showed the time change of arrangement | positioning of a columnar protrusion. The output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear movement member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the projecting portion of the contact member, and the circle of the transmission arm member according to the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member in the fifth embodiment. It is the figure which showed the time change of arrangement | positioning of a columnar protrusion. It is sectional drawing of the game board in 6th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the XXVII-XXVII line of FIG. 2, and a launching unit. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine in a 7th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the board | substrate box in 7th Embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of a substrate box. (A) is a front view of a board | substrate box, (b) is a side view of a board | substrate box. It is a front perspective view of a box cover. It is a rear perspective view of a box cover. (A) is a partial enlarged front view of the box cover in the arrow CXa direction view of FIG. 108, (b) is a partial enlarged rear view of the box cover in the arrow CXb direction view of FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of a box base, (b) is a rear perspective view of a box base. (A) is a front perspective view of a main control device, (b) is a rear perspective view of the main control device. FIG. 113 is a partial enlarged front perspective view of a main control device in a part CXIII of FIG. 112 (a). (A) is a front view of the main control device in the arrow CCIVa direction view of FIG. 112 (a), (b) is a side view of the main control device in the arrow CCIV b direction view of FIG. 114 (a), FIG. 114 (c) is a side view of the main control device as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIV c in FIG. 114 (a). (A) is a partial enlarged front view of the substrate box in a state in which the key is operated to the off position, (b) is a partial enlarged front view of the substrate box in a state in which the key is operated to the on position. (A) is a partial expanded side view of the substrate box in the arrow CXVIa direction view of FIG. 115 (a), and (b) is a partial enlarged side view of the substrate box in the arrow CXVIb direction of FIG. is there. (A) is a partial expanded sectional view of a substrate box in cutting line CXVIIa-CXVIIa in FIG. 115 (a), (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the substrate box in cutting line CXVIIb-CXVIIb in FIG. 115 (a) FIG. (A) is a partial expanded sectional view of a substrate box in cutting line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa of Drawing 115 (a), (b) is a partial expanded section of a substrate box in cutting line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb of Drawing 115 (a) FIG. (A) is a partial expanded sectional view of a substrate box in cutting line CXIXa-CXIXa in FIG. 116 (a), (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the substrate box in cutting line CXIXb-CXIXb in FIG. 116 (a) FIG. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 121A is a partial enlarged rear view of a substrate box in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 121B is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box along the cutting line CXXIb-CXXIb of FIG. (A) is a front view of the substrate box in 9th Embodiment, (b) is a front schematic diagram of a pachinko machine. (A) is a front view of the substrate box in 10th Embodiment, (b) is a front schematic diagram of a pachinko machine.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the front side of the drawing is the front (front) side, and the rear side of the drawing is the rear (rear) side. In addition, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper side (upper side), the lower side is the lower side (lower side), the right side is the right side (right side), and the left side is the left side Each side will be described. Further, arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is the front frame The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is formed by assembling a decorative resin part, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface projecting to the front side, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the right side below the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the bonding space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface on the left side thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive a ball to the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the (shooting strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, as well as a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball and a windmill (not shown). , 62, the general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. It is attached on the back side (or front side) of 1).

  The base plate 60 is formed of a wooden plate member. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes (see, for example, FIG. 5) formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a tapping screw etc. from the front side of 13. The base plate 60 may be made of a light transmitting resin material. In this case, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and at the inner position of the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate is formed similarly to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize opening and the like are provided and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed on the lower left side of the game area (the lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 4), and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a steady change, a time-short or a normal, by means of LEDs, or indicate whether it is in fluctuation by means of an on-light condition. The stop symbol indicates whether the symbol corresponds to the probability variation big hit or the symbol corresponding to the normal big hit or not by the lighted state, or indicates the number of holding balls by the lighted state, and by the 7-segment display device, the round of the big hit Display numbers and errors. In addition, a plurality of LEDs may be configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 having a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 4R probability variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as the stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown .

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a maximum number of round jackpots with 4 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. Also, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after jackpots of 15 rounds and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) becomes a short time state. is there.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of The high probability state (during a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 by increasing the hitting probability of the second symbol described later. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the second winning opening 640 To say the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normally medium is the state of the game which is neither a definite change nor a time reduction (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is increased).

  The probability change of the second symbol not only increases during a definite change or time, but also the time when the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is changed, and a longer time than normal It is set. When the motorized part 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball reaches the second winning opening 640 compared to when the motorized part 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy condition. Therefore, the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 during a definite change or during a time cut, and it is possible to increase the number of times a jackpot lottery is performed.

  The state change between the open state and the closed state of the motorized accessory 640a is caused by the open / close operation of the open / close plate provided with the rotary shaft at the lower end and rotationally displaced in a manner tilting or standing to the gaming area side. When the motorized accessory 640a is in the open state, the ball is easily guided to the second winning opening 640 along the upper surface of the opening and closing plate, and when the motorized accessory 640a is in the closed state, the opening and closing plate is the game area and the second By closing the space between the second winning opening 640 and the second winning opening 640, the ball can not easily enter the second winning opening 640.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time of the motorized role thing 640a attached to the second winning a prize opening 640 during a definite change or during a short time, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric operation per hit A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640 a is released more than in the normal mode. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during definite changes or during a short time, and the electric symbol 640a is opened at a time and once when the electric symbol 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened. At least one of the numbers may be changed. In addition, the time during which the motorized symbol 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened during the definite variation or time is short, and the number of times the motorized symbol 640a is opened per one operation does not change, and the second symbol Only the hit probability may be changed to be increased relative to the normal.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, the variable display unit 80 is disposed at a position (rear of the window of the base plate 60) visible through the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winnings (start winnings) to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol A third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball of through gate 67 A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed on the base plate 60 so as to surround the third symbol display device 81 in a front view.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of about 9 inches to 19 inches, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). The middle and bottom three symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in which the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed, but the first A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “o” and the symbol “x” as display symbols (the second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through gate 67 It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "o"), the motorized role 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 has a predetermined time It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the definite change and during the short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more frequently than in the middle. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning combination 640 a of the second winning opening 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the time saving.

  In addition, the second winning opening 640 during the probability variation or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the probability of hitting, increasing the opening time and opening frequency of the motorized symbol 640a per hit, or the like during definite variation or time reduction. When the ball is in a state in which the ball is likely to win, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the definite change or during the short time than during the normal time, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and a single hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized role product 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the balls fired to the game board 13 is configured to pass through. When the ball passes through gate 67, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol hold lamp (not shown) Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be two, for example.

  Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side or the lower side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol holding lamp may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, there is disposed a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can be won. When the ball is won in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the lower right side in a front view of the through gate 67, a second winning opening 640 for winning a ball is disposed. When a ball is won in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the second winning opening switch being turned on. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B. The arrangement of the second winning opening 640 is not limited to this. For example, it may be in the front view below the first winning opening 64, or may be on the left side of the left and right center of the game area.

  Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is winning in the second winning opening 640 are configured the same. The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second winning opening 640 has the ball, for example, to the first winning opening 64 The number of winning balls to be paid out when the player wins a prize may be three, and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second prize winning hole 640 has won may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by a motorized role 640 a. The electric role object 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the electric role object 640a is in a closed state (shrinkage state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the motorized role piece 640a is in the open state (enlarged State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal condition, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is short as compared to the normal, and therefore, in the variable display of the second symbol The symbol of “” becomes easy to be displayed, and the number of times that the motorized role piece 640 a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, during definite period of time and short time, the time when the motorized accessory 640a is opened is also longer than usual. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win to the second winning opening 640 compared to the normal time during definite variation and during time saving.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in either the low probability state or the high probability state in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case in which the ball has won in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected when jackpot is higher is higher in the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 than in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the electric role part 640a as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win.

  Therefore, during the normal operation, the electric winning combination 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640, so the first winning opening 64 without the electric winning combination 640a. Aim the ball so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-hand"), and get a lot of chances for a big hit lottery by winning in the first winning opening 64, the big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim to become a player.

  On the other hand, the electric gate 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in the open state by passing the ball through the through gate 67 during definite variation or time, and it is easy to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is shot so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning hole 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the through gate 67 is passed to open the electric role part 640a. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning in the second winning opening 640 as well as in the state.

  It should be noted that, unlike the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, aiming at the first winning opening 64 by “right-handed” is also possible by “left-handed”. It is also possible to aim at the winning opening 640. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (permanent change, in time, during normal, during normal). It can be unnecessary to change "right-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the troublesomeness which changes how to hit a ball can be eliminated.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the "right-handed" is configured not to aim at the first winning opening 64, and the ball fired in "left-handed" does not pass through the through gate 67. It is configured. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (permanent change, in time, during normal, during normal). Can be required to change between "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming sluggish by adding game characteristics that change how the ball is hit.

  A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is disposed to the right of the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided substantially at the center. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the stop symbol of the big hit and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area, which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time The game state that the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time for a predetermined number of times during the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning combination opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more (for example, three) may be disposed, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right of the first winning combination opening 64, For example, the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, the left side or the right side of the variable display unit 80, or the upper side may be used.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a test piece stamped on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A ball flowing down the game area, which has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, is guided to the ball discharging path (not shown) through the out port 71. The out-ports 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right of the second winning port 640.

  A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device by the MPU 201 Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening and closing plate of the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large open port solenoid for opening and closing drive and a solenoid for driving the electric part 640a is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. .

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, other units 228, a frame button 22 and the like are connected. The other devices 228 include drive motors MT1, MT2, MT3, MT4, MT5 and the like.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the structures of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 will be described. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500, and FIG. 6 is an exploded back perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500. 5 and 6, the liquid crystal display (variable display unit 80) disposed in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is not shown, and the back side can be seen through the opening 511a. Further, FIG. 2 will be appropriately referred to in the description of FIGS. 5 and 6.

  The operation unit 500 includes a back case 510 formed in a box shape whose front side is opened from the bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511. The rear case 510 is formed in a frame shape having a rectangular shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 511 a at the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the display region of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in front view).

  The rear case 510 is extended as a flat plate (for example, arranged in parallel) along the rear surface of the game board 13 at the front end of the outer wall 512 and faces the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2) A support plate portion 513 to support is provided.

  The support plate portion 513 has a positioning convex portion 513 a protruding toward the front side in a shape that can be fitted to a fitting concave portion (not shown) formed on the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and the base plate 60 And a plurality of insertion holes 513b drilled so as to allow insertion of a fastening screw to be fastened thereto.

  By positioning the convex portion 513a in the fitting recess of the base plate 60, the back case 510 is positioned relative to the base plate 60, and a fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b and screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

  In addition, the shape of the positioning convex part 513a is not limited at all, Various aspects are illustrated. For example, it may be a convex portion having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape (in this embodiment, a circle or an oval in the present embodiment) of the fitting recess of the base plate 60. It may be a protrusion having a shape (smaller outer shape) that is Further, in the case where the inner shape of the fitting recess is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning protrusion 513a is also made into a rectangular shape correspondingly.

  As described above, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, as well as a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball and a windmill (not shown), as well as rails 61 and 62 General winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, through gate 67, variable winning device 65, can be fitted from the front side to window 60a (see FIG. 90) opened in base plate 60 A particulate material 320 (see FIG. 54) is emitted toward the front side of the center frame 86 configured in the shape, the ball flow down unit 150 configured to allow the balls discharged from the game area to flow down, and the third symbol display device 81. It is attached and constituted to a possible configuration of the emission effect unit 300 and the like, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the inner frame 12 in a mode in which the peripheral portion is disposed facing and fixed to the surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

  The base plate 60 is formed in a plate shape from a light transmitting resin material, and is configured to make it easy for a player to visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. Thereby, regardless of the shape or arrangement of the base plate 60, the structure disposed on the back side can be visually recognized and used for various effects.

  For example, even in the case where the ball flow lowering unit 150 is disposed on the back side of the base plate 60, since the base plate 60 is seen through to see the back side, it is possible to visually recognize the ball flowing down the ball flow lowering unit 150. . In the present embodiment, the ball flow down unit 150 is designed in consideration of the effect exerted by the visible ball, but the details will be described later.

  If there is a part that you do not want to show to the player, a seal member with low light transmittance (or light non-transmission) may be attached, for example.

  The center frame 86 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed to the base plate 60 from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

  The emission effect unit 300 receives the granular member 320 (see FIG. 54), and the dividing member 310 for dividing the range in which the granular member 320 can be scattered is disposed inside the center frame 86, thereby making the granular member 320 a center frame. It can be fired toward the inside of the 86. Therefore, for the player who visually recognizes the display of the third symbol display device 81 through the inner window portion of the center frame 86, it is possible to effectively visually recognize the granular member 320 scattering on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. it can. The details of the launch effect unit 300 will be described later.

  The operation unit 500 is disposed on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are disposed inside. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a rear case 510, an enlargement / reduction unit 600 disposed on the inner upper portion of the rear case 510, and a displacement rotation unit 800 disposed in left-right symmetry on the inner left and right portions of the rear case 510. Equipped with

  Specifically, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is disposed on the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510 at the upper position of the opening 511a and at the left and right positions of the opening 511a. First, an outline of operation control of the operation unit 500 will be described.

  7 to 11 are front views of the operation unit 500 showing an example of operation control of the operation unit 500 in time series. In FIG. 7, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the effect standby state are illustrated, and in FIG. 8, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the overhang state and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the effect standby state are illustrated. In FIG. 9, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the enlargement state and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the production standby state are illustrated.

  Further, in FIG. 10, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the effect standby state and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the effect upper end state are illustrated, and in FIG. 11, the displacement rotation unit 800 on the left side is in the effect upper end state. The unit 800 is in the lower end state of rendering.

  As illustrated in FIGS. 7 to 11, the displacement trajectory of the scaling unit 600 partially overlaps the displacement trajectory of the displacement rotation unit 800 in a front view. Therefore, for example, when the enlargement / reduction unit 600 changes state from the effect standby state when the displacement / rotation unit 800 is in the effect upper end state (see FIG. 10), a collision may occur.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the state change from the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be controlled under the condition that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the effect standby state, or the displacement rotation unit 800 It is possible that the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 overlap in a front view by controlling the state change from the effect standby state to be executable under the condition that the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state. It can be avoided. Accordingly, the arrangement freedom of the scaling unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 can be improved (the front and back positions can be overlapped).

  As shown in FIG. 7 to FIG. 9, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is configured to be capable of downward displacement in a state where the effect members 700 are collectively arranged at one location, and the front of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 after downward displacement. The component members of the effect member 700 are separated from each other in the state of being arranged in, and operation control is performed so that the area visually recognized in front view becomes large (see FIG. 9).

  Thereafter, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is controlled so that the effect members 700 are gathered again (see FIG. 8), displaced upward in a state where they are collectively disposed at one place, and returned to the effect standby state shown in FIG.

  The state changes shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 are executed when the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state. As shown in FIG. 7, FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, the displacement rotation unit 800 is configured to be displaceable from the horizontal slide member 840 not only in the vertical component but in the direction having the horizontal component.

  In the present embodiment, the lateral slide member 840 is displaced along a path curve S1 set by a mechanism described later. The path curve S1 includes a common arc portion S1a having an arc shape centering on each center point C1, and an advancing / retracting path portion S1b extending downward from the lower end of the common arc portion S1a.

  In FIG. 10, the pair of left and right lateral slide members 840 are disposed at the upper end position of the common arc portion S1a, and in FIG. 11, the left lateral slide member 840 is disposed at the upper end position of the common arc portion S1a. The lateral slide member 840 is disposed at a position above the lower end position of the common arc portion S1a.

  Therefore, when the horizontal slide member 840 on the left side is displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 11 and the horizontal slide member 840 on the right side is controlled to move upward, it looks as if the horizontal slide member 840 is the third symbol display device 81. It can be made to be recognized by the player as if it is rotationally displaced about a center point C1 located closer to the center.

  That is, the horizontal slide member 840 can be visually recognized as a part of the rotation effect body having the same size as the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the freedom of presentation using the horizontal slide member 840 is improved. be able to.

  12 (a) and 12 (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 taken along line XIIa-XIIa of FIG. 7, and FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b) are FIGS. It is sectional drawing of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 in a XIIIa-XIIIa line, FIG. 14: is sectional drawing of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 in the XIV-XIV line of FIG.

  7 and 9, the gaming board 13 is not shown, but in FIGS. 12 to 14, the gaming board 13 is shown assembled on the front side of the operation unit 500 (see FIG. 2).

  12 (a) and 13 (a) show an example of the state in which the granular member 320 stagnates downward, and in FIGS. 12 (b) and 13 (b), the granular member 320 is fired and scattered. An example of the condition is shown.

  In the effect standby state shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B, the central portion of the collective arrangement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is arranged above the dividing member 310 of the emitting effect unit 300, and the dividing member Most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be visible through 310.

  On the other hand, in the enlarged state shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, the effect member 700 is disposed close to the back of the dividing member 310 of the emission effect unit 300 and is blinded by the effect member 700 (see FIG. 9) And 3) most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is shielded unnoticeably.

  Since the displacement trajectory of the scaling unit 600 does not interfere with the partitioning member 310, the firing effect unit 300 is configured to perform an operation effect of firing the granular member 320 to the partitioning member 310 regardless of the arrangement of the scaling unit 600. It is possible to control.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (a), the granular member 320 is disposed below the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and is fired by a path inclined upward as it goes forward. , And is raised while being bounced in the range formed by the dividing member 310.

  As a result, since the granular member 320 can be made to appear to the player as if it were coming to his or her side, attention to the effect using the granular member 320 can be improved.

  Further, by configuring in this manner, it is possible to move the range in which the granular member 320 is scattered to the player side, and of the components disposed in the game area such as the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2). It is possible to avoid the low degree of freedom of arrangement.

  In other words, the position just below the dividing member 310 or the position closer to the front can be adopted as the standby position of the granular member 320 to be fired toward the dividing member 310 in the present embodiment. However, in this case, since the launch effect unit 300 is disposed in the space on the back side of the first winning opening 64, it is possible to secure an arrangement space for a guide route for flowing the ball entering the first winning opening 64. It may be difficult, and it may be necessary to move the position of the first winning opening 64 to cope with it.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the partitioning member 310 is disposed at the foremost position, and the standby position of the granular member 320 is disposed obliquely backward, so that the space on the back side of the first winning opening 64 can be secured. The guide route of the ball can be disposed without any problem, and it can be prevented in advance that the first winning opening 64 can not be freely disposed.

  When control to fire the granular member 320 is performed in the state shown in FIG. 12 (a), as shown in FIG. 12 (b), in the granular member 320 and the third symbol display device 81 scattered in the interior of the dividing member 310. It can be shown to the player in combination with the display in the display area. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the combination of the flat display and the movement of the three-dimensionally displaced granular member 320.

  When control to fire the granular member 320 is performed in the state shown in FIG. 13 (a), as shown in FIG. 13 (b), the scattering of the granular member 320 inside the dividing member 310 and the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 It can be shown to the player along with the change. In this case, for example, by combining the timing of scattering of the granular member 320 and the timing of displacement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in a discrete manner, the granular member 320 on the front side of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 changes state. Can be seen visually, and the force of the state change of the scaling unit 600 can be strengthened.

  Here, as a method of effecting together with the state change of the scaling unit 600, a method of switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 together with the state change of the scaling unit 600 is also conceivable.

  However, as in the present embodiment, in a situation where the third symbol display device 81 is disposed on the back side of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is blocked by the enlargement / reduction unit 600 Even when the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched, it is difficult to show the display and it is considered difficult to effectively produce the effect.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the position of the dividing member 310 that forms the range in which the granular member 320 performing the operation effect scatters along with the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is provided on the front side of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 Therefore, even in a situation where the enlargement / reduction unit 600 shields most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, it is not difficult to show the granular member 320 to the player.

  Furthermore, by configuring the granular member 320 with a small-sized member, it becomes possible to prevent the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from becoming less visible than when configuring the granular member 320 with a large-sized member.

  Therefore, even when most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is shielded by the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the rendering effect of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be improved.

  Further, the effect of causing the scattering of the granular member 320 to be visually recognized in combination with the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be used as it is to effect the scattering of the granular member 320 to be visually recognized in combination with the displacement rotation unit 800.

  That is, in the displacement rotation unit 800, as in the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the horizontal slide member 840 is arranged to be retracted from the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (effect standby state, see FIG. 7) Since the slide member 840 can be changed in the state where the slide member 840 is arranged on the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (effect lower end state, effect upper end state, see FIG. 10 and FIG. 11) Perform the effect of combining the scattering granular member 320 and the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the effect of combining the scattering granular member 320 and the horizontal slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800 and visualizing be able to.

  In this case, it has been described that in the enlargement / reduction unit 600, it is possible to effectively produce effects by scattering the granular members 320 in accordance with the displacement of the aspect in which the effect members 700 are separated. The air flow is generated by the rotation of the wing-like member 854 by causing the granular member 320 to fly according to the rotation of the wing-like member 854 disposed in (the wing-like member 854 is It can be made to visually recognize as if it is rotating at high speed, and the rendering effect of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be improved.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the effect of causing the scattering of the granular member 320 to be visually recognized in combination with the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the effect of causing the visual recognition in combination with the enlargement / reduction unit 600 or the displacement rotation unit 800 It can be shared with

  As shown in FIG. 14, the rear end line BL1 of the first light emitting device 330 which is a part of the emission effect unit 300 and is disposed directly above the horizontal slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800 is shown in FIG. It is disposed behind the front end line FL1 of the displacement rotation unit 800 on the cross section. Therefore, depending on the displacement trajectory of the horizontal slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800 (for example, when the horizontal slide member 840 continues to be displaced upward from the state shown in FIG. 14), the first light irradiation device 330 and the displacement rotation unit A collision with 800 may occur.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the advancing / retracting path portion S1b is set as a path that can avoid a collision between the launch effect unit 300 and the displacement rotation unit 800. That is, by setting the forward / backward path portion S1b as a path passing through a gap provided in an oblique direction between the emission device 400 of the emission effect unit 300 and the first light irradiation device 330, the rear end line BL1 and the front end line FL1 are The degree of freedom of setting can be improved, and upward displacement is possible beyond the first light irradiation device 330 that sets the rear end line BL1, and a large displacement width of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be secured. .

  As shown in FIG. 13, when the effect member 700 is displaced, the effect member 700 and the dividing member 310 are disposed close to each other in the front-rear direction. In the playable state, the space between the effect member 700 and the dividing member 310 can be secured to such an extent that the distance can be secured, but the distance between the effect member 700 and the dividing member 310 is secured until the time of transportation. It is not considered. Therefore, at the time of conveyance, it is desirable to maintain the rendering member 700 at the upper end position of the displacement range and to limit the dividing member 310 and the rendering member 700 not to be disposed close to each other.

  Referring back to FIG. The operation unit 500 includes a displacement control device 180 fastened and fixed to the back case 510. The displacement restricting device 180 is configured to be changeable by manual operation from the back of the rear case 510, and restricts the downward displacement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from the effect standby state in the restricted state.

  By adopting the displacement restricting device 180, shipping and conveyance of the pachinko machine 10 can be facilitated even when the central opening of the base plate 60 is closed as in the present embodiment.

  In detail, conventionally, a means for restraining displacement of the movable part by stuffing a cushioning material (such as a cushion member) in a range where the movable part displaces, and removing the cushioning material after arriving at the game hall As a result, the movable part may be prevented from being displaced at the time of shipment or transport. However, when the opening at the center of the base plate 60 is closed as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 12A), there is no penetration for removing the buffer material, so the game board 13 and the back case 510 If you do not disassemble the cushioning material can not be removed, the burden on the game hall may be large.

  As a countermeasure against this, the displacement forming device 180 is adopted in the present embodiment. Thus, the state of the displacement restricting device 180 is restricted between the restricted state in which the vertical displacement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is restricted without releasing the fixing of the game board 13 and the rear case 510, and the restricted state in which the restriction is released. It can be switched. Hereinafter, the details of the configuration of the displacement forming device 180 will be described first, and then the details of the state change will be described.

  Fig.15 (a) is a rear perspective view of the displacement control apparatus 180, FIG.15 (b) is a front perspective view of the displacement control apparatus 180, FIG.15 (c) is a front oblique view of the displacement control apparatus 180. FIG.

  15 (a) and 15 (b), the displacement restriction device 180 in the restriction release state is illustrated, and in FIG. 15 (c), the displacement restriction device 180 in the restriction state is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 15A to FIG. 15C, the displacement restricting device 180 switches between the restricting state and the restriction releasing state by the cylindrical portion 183d coming out of the contact member 181. In the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180, the cylindrical portion 183d projects to the inside of the rear case 510 and is configured to be engageable with the restricted hole 657 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the details will be described later.

  16 is an exploded back perspective view of the displacement restricting device 180, FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement restricting device 180, and FIG. 18 (a) is a back view of the abutting member 181. 18 (b) is a front view of the guide member 182, and FIG. 18 (c) is a front view of the operation member 183.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 to 18, the displacement regulating device 180 includes an abutting member 181 disposed in contact with the rear case 510 (see FIG. 6), and an abutting member disposed on the rear side of the abutting member 181. A guide member 182 which is fastened and fixed to 181 and guides the operation member 183 in the front-rear direction, an operation member 183 whose displacement is guided to the guide member 182, and which is disposed between the operation member 183 and the contact member 181 It mainly includes a coil spring 184 which is provided and configured to be capable of applying an urging force to the back side of the operation member 181.

  With the operation member 183 being formed from a substantially elliptical shape elongated in the left and right in a rear view, the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 accommodating the operation member 183 are also elongated from a substantially oval shape in the left and right in a rear view As it is formed, the external shape of the displacement restricting device 180 is a substantially elliptical shape which is long in the left and right in a rear view.

  The contact member 181 is mainly designed in a plate shape to increase the holding force by increasing the contact area with the rear case 510, and is for holding the guide member 182 from the plate end toward the rear side. The rear wall has a double cylindrical shape having a shape in which a wall portion is extended, and an insertion hole 181a which is drilled at the left and right end portions and into which a fastening portion which protrudes from the rear case 510 is inserted It has a cylindrical holding portion 181b protruding to the side, and an engaged portion 181c which is configured to be engageable with the operation member 183, which constitutes a well-known latch mechanism in relation to the operation member 183.

  The guide member 182 has an elliptical ring along the outer periphery of the contact member 181 and a body portion 182a extending in the front-rear direction, and a screw through which a fastening screw screwed into a fastening portion inserted through the insertion hole 181a is inserted. The insertion portion 182b, the fastening portion 182c into which the fastening screw inserted into the contact member 181 is screwed, the retaining portion 182d projecting radially inward at the rear end of the main body portion 182a, and the main body portion 182a A protrusion 182e is provided to protrude radially inward in the front and rear direction at the upper and lower inner portions.

  From this configuration, by fastening and fixing the contact member 181 and the guide member 182, the operation member 183 can be disposed between the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 and can be held so as not to come off. In the embodiment, the setting of the fastening direction limits the situation in which the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 is inserted from the front side (the side covered by the back case 510) of the contact member 182. Therefore, in the state where the displacement restricting device 180 is assembled to the rear case 510, the fastening screw can not be touched. Therefore, the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled only when the displacement control device 180 is removed from the back case 510.

  Since the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the displacement restricting device 180 to the rear case 510 is inserted into the screw insertion portion 182b from the rear side of the guide member 182, the rear side of the rear case 510 is exposed (FIG. 19) And the displacement restriction device 180 can be easily removed from the back case 510.

  The operation member 183 is an elliptical shape slightly smaller than the retaining portion 182d of the guide member 182, and is formed in a cup shape whose rear surface is formed and whose front side is opened, and a front edge portion of the body 183a. A flange portion 183b radially outwardly projecting from the bottom, a groove portion 183c recessed in the flange portion 183b, a cylindrical portion 183d cylindrically protruding from the center of the bottom of the main body portion 183a to the front side, and the cylinder Arc-shaped projecting portion 183e projecting on the front side with an arc shape having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the coil spring 184 centering on the portion 183d and a position engageable with the engaged portion 181c of the abutting member 181 And an engaging portion 183f which can be configured as a known latch mechanism in relation to the engaged portion 181c.

  An elliptical seal is attached to the back surface of the operation member 183. This seal has a concave shape formed at one of the end portions in the lateral direction (see FIG. 15A), and by disposing the concave shape upward, the vertical posture error during assembly can be easily prevented. can do.

  By making the main body portion 183a elliptical, it is possible to easily prevent the rotational displacement of the operation member 183. That is, even if the operation member 183 is about to be rotationally displaced, the rotation is restricted by coming into contact with the main body portion 182 a of the guide member 182.

  The flange portion 183 b is formed larger than the retaining portion 182 d of the guide member 182 in a rear view, which can prevent the operating member 183 from falling off the guide member 182. That is, in the state where the flange portion 183 b is held between the contact member 181 and the guide member 182, the operation member 183 is displaceable in the front-rear direction.

  The groove portion 183 c is formed at a position corresponding to the protrusion 182 e of the guide member 182, and has a role of smoothly performing the longitudinal displacement of the operation member 183. In addition, in the present embodiment, the groove portion 183c is also formed in two places on the upper side and in one place on the lower side, with the protrusion 182e being formed at two places on the upper side and one place on the lower side. As a result, it is possible to prevent erroneous assembly in which the upper and lower portions of the operation member 183 are mistaken.

  The cylindrical portion 183 d is a portion that is inserted through the winding center of the coil spring 184, and is configured to be insertable into the central opening of the cylindrical holding portion 181 b of the contact member 181. In a state where the cylindrical portion 183 d projects from the central opening of the contact member 181, the cylindrical portion 183 d engages with the controlled hole 657 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 to restrict the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 as described later.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical portion 183 d can be shared by a portion that regulates the elevation displacement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and a portion that supports the coil spring 184.

  The arc-shaped protruding portion 183 e is disposed to face the outer diameter side of the coil spring 184 so as to be opposed to the large-diameter cylindrical portion of the cylindrical holding portion 181 b of the contact member 181 in the front-rear direction. When the operation member 183 is pushed in, the arc-shaped projecting portion 183e and the cylindrical holding portion 181b come in contact with each other prior to other portions, so that the load generation area can be increased, and the area is locally increased. Load can be prevented from occurring.

  The arc-shaped protrusion 183e is not circular but formed in an arc having a broken circle, and the engaging portion 183f is disposed at the broken position. Thus, it is possible to prevent the engagement portion 183 f from separating too much from the cylindrical portion 183 d and the coil spring 184.

  The state change of the operation member 183 will be described. The operating member 183 is biased to the back side by the coil spring 184, and when the operating member 183 is pushed to the front side against this biasing force, it is configured by the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c. Each time the latch mechanism is operated and pushed in at least the minimum stroke operated by the latch mechanism, it is alternately switched between the restricted state and the restricted state described above.

  As described above, since the state is changeable by the latch mechanism, the operation member 183 is not limited to the case where the operation member 183 is intentionally operated, and the operation member 183 is the above-described minimum by applying a large external force to the pachinko machine 10 If it is displaced by the stroke amount, there is a possibility that the displacement regulating device 180 may change its state unintentionally.

  For example, in the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180, when a state change occurs in the displacement restricting device 180 unintentionally due to shock at the time of shipment or vibration at the time of transportation, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the production standby state (effect member 700 May be displaced from the state of being placed at the upper displacement end). In a state where the effect member 700 displaced from the effect standby state is disposed close to the dividing member 310 (see FIG. 13), when receiving the impact at the time of shipment or the vibration at the time of transportation, the effect member 700 is a dividing member of the emitting effect unit 300 There is a possibility of collision with 310, and there is a possibility that the effect member 700 and the dividing member 310 may be damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the engaging portion 183f is disposed at a position (position offset to the right) away from the position (center position) where the biasing force is applied to the operation member 183, and the operation member The dimension of the gap between the groove 183c of the groove 183 and the projection 182e of the guide member 182 is set large, and the attitude maintaining ability of the operation member 183 is lowered.

  Thus, the posture of the operation member 183 with respect to the guide member 182 can be inclined in advance, so that the displacement resistance of the operation member 183 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of displacement of the operation member 183 in the front-rear direction due to an unintended external force.

  The relationship between the displacement control device 180 and the operation unit 500 will be described. FIG. 19 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 open, and FIG. 20 is a rear view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500, as shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b). These are sectional drawing of the game board 13 in the XXIa-XXIa line of FIG. 20, and the operation | movement unit 500. As shown in FIG.

  Note that FIG. 21 (a) illustrates the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180, and FIG. 21 (b) illustrates the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the displacement restricting device 180 is disposed on the opening / closing proximal end side (left side) of the inner frame 12, and the operator extends the hand by opening the back pack 92 to the inner frame 12. Are configured to be Since this position is opposite to the side (open / close tip side, right side) to which the operator who opens the inner frame 12 works and enters (opening and closing tip side, right side), the operator does not intend the displacement restriction device when the inner frame 12 is opened. Touching the 180 can be avoided.

  As shown in FIGS. 21A and 21B, the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c that constitute the above-described latch mechanism are formed on the right side of the displacement regulating device 180. Since the operation member 183 is loosely supported, all of the load for pushing the operation member 183 is not used for forward and backward movement of the operation member 183, but is also used for posture change of the operation member 183.

  For example, when the right side of the operation member 183 is pushed in, even if the right side moves sufficiently back and forth, the posture of the operation member 183 may change and the left side may not be pushed sufficiently.

  Therefore, for the purpose of pushing in the displacement restricting device 180 to switch the state, it is easy for the operator to cause the displacement restricting device 180 to produce the necessary displacement by pushing the forming portion of the latch mechanism with a pinpoint. It can be said that the state switching of the regulating device 180 is easy to succeed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the engaging portion 183 f and the engaged portion 181 c that constitute the latch mechanism are formed on the right side of the displacement restricting device 180, and the operator enters from the right side to restrict displacement. By operating the device 180, the operator can reach the displacement control device 180 with minimal operation. Therefore, the operator can easily execute an operation of pushing the forming portion of the latch mechanism with a pinpoint.

  In addition, the posture change when the operation member 183 is pushed occurs in a mode in which the pressing surface (the surface formed on the base end side of the cylindrical portion 183d) is directed to the side to which the operation member 183 is pushed. Therefore, the pressing load of the operator can be easily transmitted to the operation member 183 as the pressing amount increases.

  In the restricted state shown in FIG. 21A, the cylindrical portion 183 d of the operation member 183 is inserted into the restricted hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 to restrict the displacement of the transmission gear 650. This can prevent the state of the scaling unit 600 from changing.

  Since the displacement direction of the transmission gear 650 (rotational direction about the longitudinal axis) and the displacement direction of the operation member 183 (front and back direction) are orthogonal to each other, the transmission gear 650 causes the load of the operation member 183 to move in the displacement direction. It can prevent receiving. As a result, the displacement of the transmission gear 650 can be effectively restricted without making the forming portion of the latch mechanism rigid.

  As described above, since the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be maintained by setting the displacement regulating device 180 in the regulated state, the application of the displacement regulating device 180 is not limited to the time of transportation. For example, after maintenance in the gaming machine shop, maintenance of the displacement / rotation unit 800, which will be described later, can be performed safely and easily by maintaining the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 with the displacement restriction device 180 in a restricted state.

  That is, as in the present embodiment, when the displacement trajectory of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 partially overlaps the displacement trajectory of the displacement rotation unit 800, the drive motor of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 during maintenance work of the displacement rotation unit 800. Even if the MT2 malfunctions, the state (arrangement) of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be maintained by the displacement restriction device 180, so that the collision between the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 can be prevented. Can.

  If the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulating state before the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the displacement regulating device 180 is switched to the regulating release state by pushing the operation member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180. (See FIG. 21 (b)). As a result, the transmission gear 650 can be displaced, and the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can perform the rendering operation with the state change.

  Here, before the power is turned on, the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are slightly opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and the displacement regulating device 180 is released from the regulation by looking into the open front end side (right side). It will be described that it can be confirmed.

  As shown in FIG. 21A, in the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180, the operation member 183 is disposed on the front side relative to the shape of the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510, so that , The operation member 183 is hidden in the shape portion of the bottom wall portion 511.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), since the operation member 183 is disposed on the back side more than the shape of the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510 in the restriction released state of the displacement restriction device 180, The operating member 183 is visually recognized at a position protruding from the bottom wall portion 511 in a direction view looking in from the right side.

  Therefore, even if the operator does not fully open the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 as a confirmation operation before turning on the power, the worker slightly makes the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 By visually confirming that the operation member 183 protrudes from the bottom wall portion 511 in the direction view in which it is opened and looking in from the right side, it can be confirmed that the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulation released state.

  In the present embodiment, the rear case 510 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and the operation member 183 is formed of a red and transparent resin material. Therefore, the visibility of the operation member 183 can be improved.

  Here, the case where the power is turned on while the cylindrical portion 183d is inserted through the restricted hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the restricted state of the displacement restriction device 180 (see FIG. 21A) will be described. . In this embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulated state, it is detected that the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 does not change in operation at the time of power introduction detection sensor SC7 (see FIG. 52) The third symbol display device 81 displays a position detection error display according to the determination.

  By showing the position detection error display to the store clerk of the gaming machine store, it can be noticed that the state of the displacement regulating device 180 may not be changed. Note that this error display is displayed by detecting the presence or absence of the state change of the scaling unit 600, and does not detect the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

  That is, in this embodiment, an alarm regarding the state of the displacement regulating device 180 is made using a position detection error display that is usually provided to the scaling unit 600 without preparing a program for additional error display or a display material. It can be output. Thereby, the design cost can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, in the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180, the power is turned on while the cylindrical portion 183d is inserted through the restricted hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 (see FIG. 21A). In this case, the pressing operation of the operation member 183 is disabled while the power is on, and it is required to turn off the power at one end, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the operation member 183 may be configured to be operable even while the power is on.

  Further, the configuration for disabling the pressing operation of the operation member 183 can be arbitrarily set. For example, the push-in operation may be disabled by the friction generated between the transmission gear 650 and the operation member 183, or a large diameter portion may be provided on the base end side of the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183 to displace the transmission gear 650. In the inside, the back surface of the transmission gear 650 and the large diameter portion of the cylindrical portion 183 d may be engaged with each other to limit the displacement of the operation member 183.

  As a different situation, an example in the case of pushing in the operation member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 during maintenance in the gaming machine store will be described. In the present embodiment, the pressing operation of the operation member 183 is not possible only when the controlled holes 657 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 match the cylindrical portion 183 d in the front and rear direction.

  For example, even when the operation member 183 is pushed in while the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the overhanging state (see FIG. 8) at the time of maintenance, the displacement regulating device 180 changes its state to the regulating state. In this case, the cylindrical portion 183d is disposed on the displacement locus of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. Therefore, when the driving force is generated after the maintenance is finished, the displacement of the transmission gear 650 is changed to the cylindrical portion 183d. Limited to

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to determine that the displacement of the transmission gear 650 is limited, and by performing an error display (notification of abnormality) based on this determination, the displacement regulating device 180 remains in the regulated state. Can be notified to the store clerk of the gaming machine store, the details will be described later.

  Thus, even without separately providing a device for detecting the state of the displacement regulating device 180, the device for detecting the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be used to determine the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

  The operation of the displacement restricting device 180 can be performed either before or after assembling the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 to the inner frame 12. After assembling to the inner frame 12, it is necessary not only to open the inner frame 12 but also to open the back pack 92 with respect to the inner frame 12. It is preferable to operate the device 180.

  Referring back to FIG. 5 and FIG. In the present embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described launch effect unit 300, the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and the displacement rotation unit 800 are disposed as effect devices for boosting the game. The effect devices will be described in order from the emission effect unit 300.

  FIG. 22 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the launch effect unit 300, and FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the launch effect unit 300. As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the partitioning member 310 is disposed to face the light guide plate 161 in the assembled state of the emission effect unit 300. That is, it is possible to execute an effect of causing the player to visually recognize the light guide plate 161 and the dividing member 310 in an overlapping manner.

  Since the partitioning member 310 is formed of a colorless and light transmitting resin material, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the granular member 320 scattering inside, and the player who visually recognizes the range surrounded by the center frame 86 Thus, it is possible to perform an effect of causing the light guide plate 161 and the scattering granular member 320 to overlap and be visually recognized.

  FIG. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the launch effect unit 300, and FIG. 25 is an exploded back perspective view of the launch effect unit 300. In FIGS. 24 and 25, the dividing member 310 is illustrated in an exploded manner.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the launch effect unit 300 is disposed inward of the center frame 86 (see FIGS. 22 and 23) and has a partition member 310 forming a box shape with an open lower side, and its partition A plurality of granular members 320 disposed displaceably inside the member 310, an injection device 400 disposed in such a manner as to close the lower open portion so that the granular members 320 do not fall off the dividing member 310, and a dividing member A first light irradiator 330 disposed on the right of 310 and a second light irradiator 340 disposed on the left of the dividing member 310 are provided.

  The partitioning member 310 is formed of a light transmitting resin material, and is a front plate portion 311 which is a plate-like portion disposed at the forefront, and a curved plate portion 312 integrally formed below the front plate portion 311. And a bottom plate portion in parallel relation to the front plate portion 311 is disposed opposite to the back surface side of the front plate portion 311, and has a closed wall extending to the front side to close the air gap from the left and right and the top of the bottom plate portion. The back surface section 313 and the back surface section 313 are integrally formed below and communicate with the internal space IE1 (see FIG. 12A) formed between the front plate section 311 and the back surface section 313. The back section lower portion 314 whose path can be configured between the curved plate portion 312 and the profiled through portion 315 formed to penetrate the back section lower portion 314 are provided.

  Although the size of the dividing member 310 is not limited at all, in the present embodiment, the size of the window part surrounding the light guide plate 161 inside the center frame 86 and the size of the front view of the dividing member 310 are approximately the same. It is formed to be That is, the light guide plate 161 and the front plate portion 311 are formed to have substantially the same shape.

  Thus, the component for hiding the edge of the light guide plate 161 can be used for the purpose of hiding the edge of the dividing member 310. A display is performed by making the edge of the dividing member 310 superimposed on the display by the third symbol display device 81 and visualizing it while eliminating the need for a dedicated component for hiding the edge of the dividing member 310 and reducing the number of members. Since it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the symbol is divided, the visibility of the display by the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained.

  The internal space IE1 has a role as a range in which the granular members 320 can scatter, but if this space is too wide, the granular members 320 become too scattered and the number of the granular members 320 becomes very large for a powerful effect. Need to do more. Therefore, if it is formed as a somewhat narrow space, it is possible to perform a powerful presentation by visually recognizing the few granular members 320 with high density.

  On the other hand, if the space is narrowed too much, the particulate member 320 may be clogged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-rear width of the internal space IE1 is ensured to be approximately the same as the front-rear width between the left and right center portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 and the lower rear section 314. Therefore, as compared with the case where the front and rear width is shortened, clogging of the granular member 320 in the internal space IE1 and rapid deceleration at the time of injection can be avoided.

  Furthermore, since the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312 are disposed closer to the lower back section 314 than the left and right center portions 312b, the movement path of the granular member 320 near the left and right center portions 312b is closer to the left and right portions 312b. The movement path of the granular member 320 can be narrowed.

  That is, when the granular member 320 is injected into the internal space IE1 by the injection device 400, the movement path of the granular member 320 can be concentrated in the vicinity of the left and right central portion 312b. It can be made easy to reach near the central part. As a result, the granular member 320 can be easily made visible to the player.

  In addition, after the granular member 320 reaches near the central portion of the internal space IE1, the granular member 320 collides with the front plate portion 311 and scatters the internal space IE1. As a result, the player can visually recognize the granular member 320 as if the granular member 320 explodes and scatters in all directions from the vicinity of the central portion of the internal space IE1. Can be improved.

  The curved plate portion 312 functions as a portion that receives the granular member 320 when the granular member 320 ejected into the internal space IE1 falls. From this point of view, in the present embodiment, the curved plate portion 312 is designed to be inclined downward toward the rear side, and to be inclined downward toward the left and right center.

  As a result, regardless of where in the inner space IE1 the granular member 320 is disposed, the granular member 320, which is lowered and displaced by its own weight, can be displaced downward on the back side while being brought closer to the left and right center.

  Furthermore, the degree of descent inclination of the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312 is configured so that the descent inclination toward the left and right center becomes sharper than the descent inclination toward the back side. Thus, as the downward displacement of the granular member 320, it is possible to generate displacement toward the center in the left / right direction prior to displacement toward the back surface. Therefore, the granular members 320 stagnate (clogged) in the middle of the downward displacement as the granular members 320 try to simultaneously displace to the back side at the left and right end positions where the granular members 320 tend to be densely packed. Can be avoided.

  In addition, the degree of downward inclination of the left and right center portions 312b of the curved plate portion 312 toward the back side is sharper than the degree of downward inclination of the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312 toward the left and right centers. Is configured as. Thereby, it can be made easy to avoid that the granular members 320 gather on the way down.

  On the other hand, in the back section lower portion 314, the plate portion disposed opposite to the back side of the curved plate portion 312 is substantially the same as the left and right center portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 (see FIG. 12A) The flat plate is formed in such a manner that the distance between the left and right central portions 312b is slightly increased toward the front side, that is, the angle with respect to the horizontal direction is large.

  In the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the lower back section 314 with respect to the vertical direction is equal to (slightly large angle) the inclination angle with respect to the vertical direction of the displacement direction of the collision member 420 that ejects the granular member 320.

  Therefore, the incident direction of the granular member 320 with respect to the back section lower portion 314 is the same regardless of the injection direction of the granular member 320 which can change to the left and right, and therefore the resistance given from the back section lower portion 314 to the granular member 320 is substantially uniform. can do.

  The deformed through portion 315 is formed in a shape in which the lid member 480 can be inserted, and a short portion extending vertically at the left and right ends, and a long portion curved and extending in the left and right in a manner connecting upper ends of the short portions. Equipped with The penetration direction is formed so as to incline obliquely upward as going from the rear side to the front side with respect to the plate surface of the rear section lower portion 314 (see FIG. 12A). Thus, the acute-angled portion (the lower portion of the deformed penetrating portion 315 in FIG. 12A) of the lower back section 314 that constitutes the deformed penetrating portion 315 is not disposed opposite to the ejection direction of the granular member 320.

  As a result, since the possibility of the granular member 320 colliding with the acute angle portion can be reduced at the time of injection of the granular member 320, it is possible to prevent local load from being generated in the granular member 320 and the lower rear section 314, It is possible to prevent the occurrence of cracking or chipping in the member 320 and the lower back section 314.

  The granular member 320 is made of a relatively soft (at least softer than the resin material forming the partition member 310) resin material and has a generally soccer ball shape (12 regular pentagons), as shown enlarged in FIGS. 24 and 25. And 20 regular hexagons, and is formed in a quasi-regular polyhedron), and includes non-penetrating recesses 321 recessed non-penetrating along a plurality of parallel straight lines.

  The non-penetrating concave portion 321 can reduce the weight of the granular member 320, and can bias the center of gravity of the granular member 320 from the shape central position. That is, in the linear direction in which the non-penetrating recess 321 is formed, the meat portion remains on the side on which the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed, so the center of gravity can be biased to the side on which the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed. .

  Thereby, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted. That is, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted to the posture in which the non-penetrating recess 321 faces upward (see FIG. 24).

  In this case, since the load from the injection device 400 can be received by the surface on which the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed (see FIG. 25), breakage or chipping of the granular member 320 can be easily avoided. . Furthermore, since the non-penetrating recess 321 is directed to the injection direction side when receiving a load from the injection device 400 and is ejected, the surface on which the non-penetrating recess 321 is formed is made to collide with the front plate portion 311 Can. Thereby, the load at the time of collision with the front plate portion 311 can be easily absorbed by the deformation of the granular member 320, and the possibility of damaging the front plate portion 311 can be reduced.

  The first light irradiator 330 includes a fixed plate portion 331 fastened and fixed on the back side of the back surface partition portion 313, an electric decoration board 332 fastened and fixed on the right side of the fixed board portion 331, and the electric decoration board 332. And a lid portion 333 disposed on the right side and fastened and fixed to the fixing plate portion 331 and formed so as to be able to accommodate the electric decoration board 332 between the fixing plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333.

  The light decoration part 332a, such as LED, is disposed on the left and right sides of the electric decoration substrate 332, and the light irradiation part 332a emits light having an optical axis in the left and right direction. The fixing plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 are made of a resin material with low light permeability, and the through holes 331a and 333a are formed at positions corresponding to the light emitting portion 332a. Thereby, it can be made to visually recognize as light divided into particles.

  Among the light emitted from the electric decoration substrate 332, the light emitted to the right illuminates the right path (right-handed flow path) of the game area in which the through gate 67 etc. (see FIG. 2) is disposed. One purpose. The light irradiated to the left will be described later.

  The fixing plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 are formed of a resin material with low light permeability (or light non-transmission), and the through holes 331a and 333a are formed at positions corresponding to the light irradiation portion 332a. Thereby, the light irradiated from the light irradiation part 332 a can be visually recognized as light divided into particles, and the electric decoration substrate 332 has the fixing plate part 331 and the cover part 333 in a range separated from the light irradiation part 332 a. It is possible to avoid being shielded by the

  The second light irradiator 340 includes a fixing plate portion 341 fastened and fixed on the back side of the back surface partition 313, an electric decoration substrate 342 fixed on the left side of the fixing plate portion 341, and the electric decoration substrate 342 And a lid portion 343 disposed on the left side and fastened and fixed to the fixing plate portion 341 and formed so as to be able to accommodate the electric decoration board 342 between the fixing plate portion 341 and the lid portion.

  The fixing plate portion 341 is formed of a low light transmitting (or light non-transmitting) resin material, while the lid portion 343 is formed of a colorless light transmitting resin material. Therefore, the electric decoration substrate 342 is visible when viewed from the left direction, but in the present embodiment, the left side portion of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is extended to the left. As a result, the player's field of view can be narrowed in advance, and visual recognition of the left side surface of the electric decoration board 342 in front view can be avoided.

  Thereby, light can be irradiated through the transparent lid 343 while avoiding the visual recognition of the electric decoration substrate 342.

  The light decoration part 342a, such as LED, is arrange | positioned by the electric decoration board | substrate 342 in right-and-left both surfaces. Light having an optical axis directed in the forward direction is emitted from the light emitting unit 342a disposed on the left side. The purpose of this light is to illuminate the left side of the center frame 86 while avoiding illuminating the left path of the game area.

  Here, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 (normally, it is different from the structure in which the light emitted from the light irradiation part 342a of the right electric decoration board 332 is positively directed to the game area) The game is played by left-handling, and it is considered that the game is played by right-handing during a definite change, during a short cut, and during a big hit game. This is explained below.

  The game area of the pachinko machine 10 has a high degree of freedom of the flow path of the ball on the left side of the game area, so during normal game play, adjust the ball's firing intensity so that the ball flows down in the preferred path The player performs an operation to Therefore, if the light emission intensity in the left side portion of the game area is too high, the visibility of the ball is degraded, and the adjustment of the emission intensity of the ball is hindered, which may cause the player's dissatisfaction.

  On the other hand, when firing the ball to the right side of the game area, basically, the player shoots the ball at the maximum firing intensity. The fired ball is damped by the return rubber 69, and the selection freedom of the flow path of the ball on the downstream side thereof is extremely low, and passes only the same path.

  More specifically, in the present embodiment, a single guide path DL1 (see FIG. 2) is formed with a width through which one ball passes downstream of the second winning opening 640, and the second winning opening 640 is entered. All the non-balled balls pass through the guide path DL1 and go to the variable winning device 65 and the general winning hole 63 disposed on the downstream side thereof.

  As described above, since there is little need to adjust the firing strength of the ball, even if the visibility of the ball in the right side of the game area (in particular, the place where the guide route DL1 is formed) is impaired Since the possibility of coming is low, it is possible to carry out effects with high emission intensity in this range.

  From such a circumstance, in the present embodiment, in the electric decoration board 332 disposed on the right side, the light irradiation portion 332a is disposed to direct light to the game area, while the electric decoration board 342 disposed on the left side. Then, the light emitting unit 342a is disposed so as not to direct light to the game area. Thereby, it is possible to execute an effective light emission effect while suppressing the occurrence of the player's dissatisfaction.

  Light having an optical axis directed to the right is emitted from the light emitting unit 342a disposed on the right side. Through holes 341 a are formed in the fixed plate portion 341 at positions corresponding to the light emitting portions 342 a. Thereby, the light irradiated from the light irradiation part 342a can be visually recognized as light divided into particles, and the electric decoration substrate 342 is shielded by the fixed plate part 341 in a range separated from the light irradiation part 342a, It is possible to avoid being visible. In addition, the object illuminated by the light irradiation part 342a arrange | positioned by the right side is mentioned later.

  Fig.26 (a) is a side view of the 1st light irradiation apparatus 330 in the arrow R direction view of FIG. 25, FIG.26 (b) is a side surface of the 2nd light irradiation apparatus 340 in the arrow L direction view of FIG. FIG. In FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (b), the outline of the dividing member 310 is shown by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (a), the light irradiation part 332a disposed on the left side of the first light irradiation device 330 has an LED whose optical axis passes through the dividing member 310, and a back side of the dividing member 310. An axis is provided with an LED through which it passes.

  Thus, not only the effect of irradiating the granular member 320 with light inside the dividing member 310 but also the light to other movable means (the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotating unit 800) disposed on the back side of the dividing member 310 It is possible to execute the effect of irradiating.

  As shown in FIG. 26B, the light irradiation unit 342a disposed on the right side of the second light irradiation device 340 has no LED whose optical axis passes through the dividing member 310, and the back side of the dividing member 310 It consists only of LEDs through which the optical axis passes.

  Thereby, while suppressing the light emission intensity to the inside of the dividing member 310, the irradiation intensity of the light directed to the other movable means (the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotating unit 800) disposed on the back side of the dividing member 310 is It can be improved.

  In the second irradiation device 340, by suppressing the light emission intensity to the inside of the dividing member 310, it is possible to improve the gaming comfort in the normal state. That is, in the game in the normal state, the line of sight of the player is not fixed, but is mainly directed to the left side of the game area, the display of the third symbol display device 81 or the vicinity of the first winning opening 64. It is often seen from the center to the left of the game area.

  In this case, when light is irradiated from the second irradiation device 340 to the inside of the dividing member 310, it is illuminated at a position near the front as much as the game area, and thus the backlight for the player viewing the left side of the game area As a result, there is a possibility that the player's viewability of the game area may be deteriorated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the arrangement of the light irradiation part 342a of the second irradiation device 340 is shifted to the back side and the gaming area and the light irradiation part 342a are separated, the light irradiated from the light irradiation part 342a It is possible to weaken the degree of the influence of the character on the visibility of the game area.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the light emitting unit 342a of the second irradiating device 340 causes the inside of the center frame 86 to have high intensity in the front view while reducing the degree to which the light emitted from the light emitting unit 342a emits the game area. A presentation can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect of lighting the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 (see FIG. 5) without reducing the visibility of the game area.

  FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the launch unit 300 taken along line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. That is, in FIG. 27, the game board 13 and the launch unit 300 are illustrated, and the operation unit 500 is omitted. In addition, the directions of light emitted from the first light irradiation device 330 and the second light irradiation device 340 are schematically illustrated by arrows.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the second light irradiation device 340 is disposed on the left side and the back side of the vertically-placed substrate unit 167, avoiding the vertically-placed substrate unit 167 described later that applies light to the light guide plate 161. In this way, it is possible to avoid the incidence of the light from the light irradiator 342a to the light guide plate 161 and perform the light emission effect, and thus light the light effect performed by the light emitted from the light irradiator 342a and the light guide plate 161 It can be divided into effects.

  When the light guide plate 161 is employed as in the present embodiment, the light guide plate 161 may emit light unintentionally depending on the light irradiation path, which may lower the rendering effect. In particular, light irradiated around the light guide plate 161 (for example, on the front side of the center frame 86) is likely to cause the light guide plate 161 to emit light, which may cause the necessity of suppressing the light emission intensity. It was

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the light from the light irradiator 342a is configured to travel away from the light guide plate 161, so that the setting freedom of the irradiation intensity of the light from the light irradiator 342a is improved. be able to. Thus, the degree of freedom of the light-emitting effect around the light guide plate 161 can be improved.

  Referring back to FIG. 24 and FIG. The injection device 400 is a device which is disposed below the dividing member 310 and on which the granular member 320 which flows downward from the inner space IE1 (see FIG. 12A) of the dividing member 310 is mounted.

  FIGS. 28, 29 and 30 are front exploded perspective views of the injection device 400, and FIGS. 31, 32 and 33 are rear exploded perspective views of the injection device 400. 28 and 31 schematically show the configuration of the injection device 400, and FIGS. 29 and 32 show details of a portion of the configuration of the injection device 400 disposed closer to the front side, 30 and 33 illustrate details of the configuration of a part of the injection device 400 disposed closer to the rear side. Moreover, in description of FIGS. 28-33, FIG.24 and FIG.25 is referred suitably.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 to 33, as a member to be fixed, the injection device 400 is fastened and fixed to the fixing member 350 fastened and fixed to the dividing member 310 (see FIG. 24) and the back side of the fixing member 350. A space forming member 360 configured to be able to form a space capable of accommodating another movable member between the fixed member 350 and the back side of the space forming member 360, electric wires and transmission arm members 470 fastened and fixed on the back side And an intermediate member 401 disposed between the fixing member 350 and the space forming member 360 and having a keyhole-shaped opening 402 in the central portion.

  A fastening screw used for fastening and fixing the fixing member 350 to the dividing member 310 is inserted into the dividing member 310 from the front side. Therefore, when removing the fixing member 350 from the partitioning member 310, it is necessary to loosen and remove the fastening screw with a screwdriver, but the gaming board 13 and the launch unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12A). In this case, the base plate 60 is disposed on the front side of the fixing member 350 so that the driver can not be inserted into the fastening screw.

  Therefore, in preparation for removing the fixing member 350 from the dividing member 310, the firing unit 300 can be removed from the game board 13. Thereby, in a state where the launch unit 300 is assembled to the game board 13, the fixing member 350 is mistakenly removed from the dividing member 310, and the particulate member 320 is prevented from being discharged from the fixing member 310 in advance. be able to.

  The injection device 400 is configured as a member disposed displaceably between the intermediate member 401 and the fixing member 350, and a plurality of metal rods MB1 fixed to the front side of the intermediate member 401 are inserted and linearly displaceable. A linear motion member 410, a collision member 420 disposed on the upper side of the linear motion member 410, displaceably supported along the displacement direction of the linear motion member 410, and having an arch-shaped collision surface at the top, The moving member 410 includes an abutting member 430 which is disposed below the moving member 410 and configured to be changeable between a contactable state and a non-contactable state in a displacement direction of the linear movement member 410.

  The injection device 400 is a member disposed displaceably between the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360, and is formed to be able to transmit a load to the linear moving member 410 and the contact member 430, and is rotatable to the space forming member 360. The front transmission member 440 has a gear tooth formed on its outer peripheral surface, and a drive that is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor MT1 fastened and fixed to the fixing member 350 and meshes with the gear teeth of the front transmission member 440 A gear 450 and a rear transmission member 460 disposed on the opposite side of the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440 with respect to the drive gear 450 and fastened and fixed to the rotation transmission member 440 are provided.

  The injection device 400 is rotatably supported by a rotation axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440 as a member disposed displaceably on the back side of the space forming member 360, and from the rear transmission member 460 A transmission arm member 470 configured to be displaceable by action, and a lid member 480 supported rotatably rotatably about a straight line facing in the left-right direction as a rotation axis, and displaced by a load received from the transmission arm member 470 are provided.

  The design concept of the injection device 400 having the above-described configuration will be described. In the injection device 400, the arrangement range of the constituent members is divided into three along the protruding direction of the shaft portion 362 protruding from the space forming member 360 by the fixed intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360. The driving force of the drive motor MT1 is generated in the middle range in which the drive gear 450 rotated by the driving force of the driving motor MT1 is disposed in the arrangement range divided in this way, and the driving force is in the front range and the rear side. The respective components are displaced in the front range and the rear range.

  From such a design concept, the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 are provided with openings for transmitting a driving force. That is, the middle portion 401 includes the opening 402 drilled in a keyhole shape, and the space forming member 360 includes an opening 361 drilled in a lemon shape (substantially elliptical shape).

  The transmission of the driving force is completed in the range on the front side of the middle portion 401 and the range on the rear side of the space forming member 360. Therefore, the details of the configuration will be described in the order of the front range and the rear range. The details of the configuration of the intermediate range will be described, and the operation mode will be described.

  First, the description will be given focusing on the front side range. As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, the intermediate member 401 includes the above-mentioned opening 402, a plurality of cylindrical projections 403 projecting in a cylindrical shape from the upper end to the front side, and the cylindrical projections 403 thereof. , A plurality of coil springs SP1 whose upper end portion is supported, a plurality of rod fixing portions 404 arranged at symmetrical positions so as to fix a plurality of metal rods MB1 in a fixed manner, and a cylindrical shape projecting near the lower end portion The lower end portion of the coil spring SP1 is hooked on each of the plurality of claw portions 411 formed on the lower end portion of the linear motion member 410.

  The natural length of the coil spring SP1 is formed to be shorter than the distance between the cylindrical protrusion 403 and the claw portion 411 in the state where the linear motion member 410 is disposed at the upper end position. Therefore, the linear moving member 410 is always urged by the coil spring SP1, and before transmitting the driving force from the intermediate range, the linear moving member 410 is disposed at the upper end position by the urging force. The coil spring SP1 is disposed diagonally below the linear movement member 410, but this also aims to concentrate the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 on the side where the granular member 320 tends to accumulate.

  The linear motion member 410 includes the above-mentioned claw portion 411, a plurality of insertion portions 412 formed to be able to insert the metal rod MB1, and a trapezoidal projecting portion 413 projecting in a trapezoidal shape from the upper end portion at the left and right center. On the rear side, a linear ridge portion 414 extending in the left-right direction at a substantially central position in the vertical width direction, and a lower ridge portion formed on the lower side of the ridge portion 414 as a ridge shorter than the ridge portion 414 And 415, and a displacement restricting portion 416 protruding from the lower end portion in the left and right center toward the front side.

  The trapezoidal projecting portion 413 is formed to be able to abut on the collision member 420 in a state where the linear movement member 410 is disposed at the upper end position. In other words, the linear movement member 410 is formed such that only the trapezoidal projection 413 can contact the collision member 420, and the portion excluding the trapezoidal projection 413 does not abut the collision member 420. Ru.

  The ridges 414 and the lower ridges 415 are portions that receive a load from other components during load transmission, which will be described in detail later.

  The displacement restricting portion 416 is a portion that abuts on the buffer member 352 of the fixing member 350 in the displacement direction, and the displacement restricts the displacement of the linear motion member 410 (the rising side displacement terminal is set).

  The collision member 420 includes a curved plate portion 421 forming an arch-shaped collision surface, and a flat plate extending parallel to a displacement plane of the linear motion member 410 from the rear end of the curved plate portion 421. A plate portion 422, a plurality of guide holes 423 formed in a long hole shape extending along the extension direction of the plate portion 422, and a displacement direction of the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 at the lower end of the left and right center portion of the plate portion 422 It has a buffer member 424 fixed at the oppositely disposed position and disposed so as to be able to abut on the trapezoidal projecting portion 413.

  The cylindrical protrusion 403 is inserted into the guide hole 423. That is, the cylindrical protrusion 403 is used both as a portion for supporting the upper end portion of the coil spring SP1 and a portion for guiding the displacement of the collision member 420.

  The buffer member 424 is formed as a small square piece of highly durable and flexible resin material. Although not particularly limited, for example, nylon resin, urethane resin and the like can be used. In this case, the load and impact when the buffer member 424 and the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 of the linear motion member 410 abut can be mitigated by the characteristics of the resin material, and the occurrence of breakage or chipping of the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 It can be suppressed.

  The contact member 430 is formed in a substantially triangular long plate shape, and at one end of the long plate, a support hole 431 is formed as a circular opening through which the support column portion 405 can be inserted, and the other end of the long plate A protruding portion 432 protruding in a circular shape in cross section to the back side, and a hook-shaped protruding portion 433 protruding in a wedge shape in cross section at a position between the support hole 431 and the protruding portion 432; Prepare.

  The support hole 431 is an opening through which the support column portion 405 is inserted, and the contact member 430 is thereby rotatably supported by the support column portion 405 in a rotatable manner.

  The protruding portion 432 and the hook-like protrusion 433 are portions that receive a load from another component at the time of load transmission, but the details will be described later.

  The fixing member 350 can receive the tip of the motor fixing portion 351 on which the drive motor MT1 described above is disposed and fixed, the buffer member 352 disposed so as to be able to abut the displacement regulating portion 416, and the circular projection 403 A plurality of fastening recesses 353 configured as a recess and configured to be capable of fastening and fixing a fastening screw inserted from the front side into a through hole on the inner side thereof into a female screw formed in the circular projection 403; And a guide portion 354 configured of inclined surfaces in a mode of being recessed from the front side and three directions, left and right, for guiding the displacement of the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24).

  The buffer member 352 is formed as a small square piece of highly durable and flexible resin material. Although not particularly limited, for example, nylon resin, urethane resin and the like can be used. In this case, the load and impact when the buffer member 352 and the displacement restricting portion 416 of the linear moving member 410 abut can be relieved by the characteristics of the resin material, and the occurrence of breakage and chipping of the displacement restricting portion 416 is suppressed. be able to.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the buffer members 352 and 424 are disposed at a plurality of places where the linear movement member 410 abuts at the displacement end in the biasing direction. Thereby, as described later, even if the linear motion member 410 is displaced at a high speed by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 and is suddenly stopped, the load received by the linear motion member 410 at the time of sudden stop Can be absorbed by the deformation of the buffer members 352 and 424, and the load can be distributed to a plurality of places.

  The cylindrical projection 403 and the fixing member 350 are connected via the fastening recess 353, and in order to release the connection, it is necessary to turn and remove the fastening screw inserted into the connecting recess 353. On the other hand, since the fastening screw is inserted from the front side of the fixing member 350, the driver may be attached to the fastening screw in a state where the game board 13 and the launch effect unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12). It can not be configured.

  Thereby, in a state where the game board 13 and the launch effect unit 300 are assembled, it is prevented that the fastening screw is loosened by mistake and the fastening between the fixing member 350 and the intermediate member 401 is loosened. Can.

  Next, description will be given focusing on the rear side range. As illustrated in FIGS. 30 and 33, the space forming member 360 includes the above-described opening 361, a shaft portion 362 projecting in a cylindrical shape from the substantially central position of the back plate to the front side, A pair of left and right guiding inclined surfaces 363 formed as an inclined surface on the upper surface of the plate-like part extended to the front side at the upper end position left and right end of the face plate part And a pair of left and right projecting support portions 364 provided on the front side from the rear plate portion, and cylindrically shaped at both left and right end portions, arranged on the same line, and formed in a size capable of pivotally supporting the lid member 480 A plurality of support pillars 365, a torsion spring SP2 that is wound around the support pillars 364 on the left side and generates an urging force toward the side for retracting the lid member 480, and a cylindrical shape protrudes on the back side at the upper left portion of the opening 361 Cylindrical projection 3 It includes a 6, a.

  The shaft portion 362 rotatably supports the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 as described later. In accordance with this, a wall portion having an arc-shaped inner surface centering on the shaft portion 362 is extended from the back surface plate portion of the space forming member 360 to the front side. The wall can cover the inner front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460.

  The guide inclined surface 363 is configured such that the inclination of the left and right inner side surfaces is flush with the right and left inner side of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32), and the granular member 320 flowing down is the collision member 420 side (right and left center side) It is formed to be able to be guided toward the direction.

  The protruding support portion 364 is formed such that the protruding end abuts on the back surface of the intermediate member 401 and the upper surface is flush with the intermediate member 401. The flush upper surface supports the left and right ends of the curved plate portion 421 in a state where the collision member 420 is disposed at the lower end position.

  The support column 365 has different shapes on the left and right. That is, on the right side, it is formed in a small diameter cylindrical shape protruding toward the left and right outside, and on the left side, it is formed in a cylindrical shape provided with an inner diameter capable of receiving the cylindrical portion of the left cover member 489.

  The cylindrical protrusion 366 is a portion that rotatably supports the transmission arm 470 by being inserted into the transmission arm 470. The large diameter screw is fixed to the female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 366, so that the transmission arm 470 is supported so as not to come off.

  The transmission arm member 470 is an elongated member formed in a substantially V-shaped appearance, and is supported with a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 366 and through which the cylindrical protrusion 366 is inserted. The hole 471, a cylindrical projection 472 projecting parallel to the axial direction of the support hole 47 from the one end in the longitudinal direction toward the front side, and the axis of the support hole 471 orthogonal to the axis from the other end in the longitudinal direction And a transmission protrusion 473 protruding in a cylindrical shape along a plane.

  The cylindrical protrusion 472 projects to the front side through the opening 361 of the space forming member 360 and is formed to be engageable with the rear transmission member 460. In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the cylindrical projections 472 is changed in accordance with the posture change of the rear side transmission member 460, and the posture of the transmission arm member 470 is changed, which will be described in detail later.

  A restricting member 370 is disposed on the back side of the cylindrical protrusion 472. That is, the limiting member 370 is a plate-like member that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the space forming member 360, and presses the covering plate portion 371 covering the moving path of the cylindrical protrusion 472 from the back side Or a plurality of pressing claws 372 formed in a claw shape for the purpose of bundling.

  The covering plate portion 371 is disposed close to the rear surface side of the transmission arm member 470, and regulates the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 472 to the rear surface side (the rear surface side of the transmission arm member 470 in the rotational axis direction). As a result, since it is possible to prevent the cylindrical protrusion 472 from being separated from the rear side transmission member 460, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the cylindrical projection 472 and the rear side transmission member 460 from being released. it can.

  The pressing claw portion 372 is a portion for temporarily holding the electric wiring connected to the drive motor MT1 or the detection sensor SC4 with the back side plate of the space forming member 360. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the layout fluctuation of the electrical wiring (for example, the change of the layout of the electrical wiring due to the vibration or the like), and the entry path of the other component members can be secured. The lateral slide member 840 and the wing member 854 (see FIGS. 10 and 12) of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be configured to be displaced along a path including a position close to the device 400.

  The transmission protrusion 473 is a portion which is inserted into the lid member 480 and transmits the driving force to the lid member 480.

  The lid member 480 is a member configured to be able to move forward and backward into and out of the dividing member 310 through the deformed penetrating portion 315 (see FIG. 12A) of the dividing member 310, and is a curved plate 481, a plurality of extending plate portions 485 extending in the same direction from left and right end portions of the advancing and retracting portion 481, and a plurality of coaxially received supporting pillar portions 365 at the extending end portions of the extending plate portions 485 The receiving portion 486 of the left, the transmission hole 487 which is formed in a curved long hole shape in the extension plate portion 485 on the left and the transmission projection 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is inserted, and the cylindrical shape surrounding the receiving portion 486 on the right It has an insertion hole which can be inserted through a fastening screw to be fastened to a female screw formed at the tip of the support column portion 365 in a state of being formed in a disk shape having a portion and surrounding the receiving portion 486 Right hippo caught off It includes a member 488, a cylindrical portion to be inserted into the left side of the receiving portion 486, a left cover member 489 having a long hole shape portion continuous to continuously transfer hole 487, a.

  The left cover member 489 is not formed as a drilled hole along the axial direction, but is formed with functionally formed contact surfaces 489a to 489c, which will be described in detail later.

  The cross-sectional shape of the advancing and retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is an arc shape centered on the rotation axis assumed for the receiving portion 486 so that the load from the outer diameter side (load given from the granular member 320) rotates. Although it is configured to be directed to the axis, it is not simply a shape in which the pipe is divided, but the radius of the arc and the formation length are changed corresponding to the left and right positions. This design intent will be described.

  First, the advancing and retracting unit 481 includes an overhanging portion 482 that travels to the approach side at the left and right center position. The overhanging portion 482 is formed so that the overhanging width becomes shorter toward the left and right outside, and the end face on the approach side is formed to be inclined toward the left and right outside. Thereby, when the overhanging portion 482 abuts on another component (in the present embodiment, the particulate member 320 (see FIG. 24) is assumed), the load directed to the left and right outside with respect to the component And the components can be pushed outward to the left and right.

  Second, the advancing / retracting portion 481 is configured to be able to enter the dividing member 310 through the modified penetrating portion 315 (see FIG. 25) of the dividing member 310 as described above, and the overhanging portion 482 precedes the division Since it enters into the member 310, the arc radius of the advancing / retracting portion 481 is shortened at the left and right center position where the overhanging portion 482 is formed.

  As a result, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation that may occur at the portion (center of left and right center of the overhang portion 482) which starts to enter into the irregular through portion 315, so that occurrence of the trouble that the advancing / retracting portion 481 can not enter into the irregular through portion 315 Can be reduced.

  Third, contrary to the left and right center position of the overhanging portion 482, the arc radius is increased near the outer left and right of the advancing and retracting portion 481. This is mainly to avoid contact with the particulate member 320. That is, in the present embodiment, the granular members 320 (see FIG. 12A) disposed on the upper surface of the collision member 420 stay close to the left and right outside due to the shape of the curved plate portion 421.

  The manner of retention is not completely uniform, but may be uneven. For example, an extremely large number of granular members 320 may stagnate on the right side, and if a sufficient space is not secured, the granular members 320 stagnating unevenly may collide with the advancing and retracting portion 481. .

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the arc radius of the advancing and retracting portion 481 is increased near the left and right outer side portions where the large number of granular members 320 are easily retained. As a result, the gap between the advancing and retracting portion 481 and the curved plate portion 421 can be secured sufficiently long in advance, so that the granular member 320 and the advancing and retracting portion 481 Collision can be avoided.

  Explain other design concepts. When the extending plate portion 485 is formed on a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the lid member 480, the end face on the entry side is recessed toward the retraction side. Thereby, the extending plate portion 485 can be prevented from colliding with the staying granular member 320.

  In addition, even in the case where the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end of the entry side before the granular member 320 completely flows down, the granular member 320 is formed by the concave portion of the extending plate portion 485 and the curve of the dividing member 310. The granular member 320 can be collected on the upper portion of the collision member 420 by forming the gap between the plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25) to a size that allows passage.

  The receiving portion 486 has different shapes on the left and right. That is, the left receiving portion 486a on the left side is formed in a circular cylindrical shape, and the right receiving portion 486b on the right side is formed in a semicylindrical shape (half pipe shape), which is a design considering assembly.

  Referring back to FIG. 28 and FIG. The support column portion 365 for supporting the lid member 480 extends outward in the left-right direction particularly on the right side, so when both the receiving portions 486 of the lid member 480 are formed in a circular cylindrical shape, the lid portion 480 is supported. In order to assemble the column portion 365, it is necessary to divide the advancing and retracting portion 481.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the lid member 480 is advanced and retracted through the deformed through portion 315 (see FIG. 25). The deformed through portion 315 needs to be configured to be capable of advancing and retracting the lid member 480 in the dividing member 310, while being capable of preventing discharge of the particulate member 320 from the dividing member 310. That is, the irregular shaped through portion 315 can not be increased without limitation, and the design freedom of the irregular shaped through portion 315 is limited.

  Here, if the shape of the lid member 480 is broken to such an extent that the lid member 480 can not pass through the deformed through portion 315, the forward / backward displacement can not be performed, so that the shape is required to have accuracy. On the other hand, when the advancing and retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed by coupling a plurality of members, there is a possibility that the shape may be broken due to a factor such as an assembly error.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shape of the receiving portion 486 is made different on the left and right so that the division of the advancing and retracting portion 481 becomes unnecessary. In the assembling process, first, the left receiving portion 486a is disposed on the outer side (left side) in the axial direction of the support column portion 365, and the cylindrical portion of the left cover member 489 is inserted through the support column portion 365 while passing through the left receiving portion 486a. Thus, the left receiving portion 486a can be arranged coaxially with the support column 365.

  At this time, the support column portion 365 is disposed opposite to the open side of the half cylinder of the right receiving portion 486b. The left cover member 489 is fastened and fixed to the extending plate portion 485 by inserting a fastening screw through a plurality of screw insertion holes formed in the left cover member 489 and screwing it into the extending plate portion 485 on the left side of the lid member 480. can do.

  After that, the right cover member 488 is attached from the outside in the axial direction, and the lid member 480 can be space if it is supported so as not to come off by the screw head of the fastening screw screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the right support column 365 It can be rotatably supported relative to the forming member 360.

  The design concept of the transmission projection 473 of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 will be described with reference to FIGS. In FIGS. 34 to 36, displacements of the transfer arm member 470 and the lid member 480 are illustrated in time series.

  34 (a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 in the arrow XXXIVa direction view of FIG. 28, and FIG. 34 (b) is a transmission arm member in the arrow XXXIVb direction of FIG. It is a side view of 470 and the cover member 480, FIG.34 (c) is a fragmentary sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the cover member 480 in the XXXIVc-XXXIVc line | wire of FIG.34 (b).

  FIG. 35 (a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 in the arrow XXXIVa direction view of FIG. 28, and FIG. 35 (b) is a transmission arm member in the arrow XXXVb direction of FIG. It is a side view of 470 and the cover member 480, and FIG.35 (c) is a fragmentary sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the cover member 480 in the XXXVc-XXXVc line | wire of FIG.35 (b).

  36 (a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 in the arrow XXXIVa direction view of FIG. 28, and FIG. 36 (b) is a transmission arm member in the arrow XXXVIb direction of FIG. 36 (a) It is a side view of 470 and the cover member 480, FIG.36 (c) is a fragmentary sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the cover member 480 in the XXXVIc-XXXVIc line | wire of FIG.36 (b).

  35 and 36, the process of raising and displacing the transmission projection 473 of the transmission arm member 470 from the state shown in FIG. 34 and displacing the advancing and retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 toward the entry side is illustrated. Specifically, in FIG. 36, the lid member 480 is shown disposed at the entry end of the displacement range, and in FIG. 34, the lid member 480 is at the retraction end of the displacement range. The arranged state is illustrated, and in FIG. 35, the state in which the lid member 480 is arranged at the middle position of the displacement range is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, in the present embodiment, the rotation axis of the transmission arm member 470 and the rotation axis of the lid member 480 are not parallel. More specifically, a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the transfer arm member 470 (plane illustrated in FIG. 34A) and a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the lid member 480 (FIG. 34B). Orthogonal to

  Therefore, without measures, it is usual for the contact area to change as the posture of the transmission projection 473 coming into contact with the left cover member 489 changes. For example, when the inner side surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 is formed by a surface extending in parallel with the axial direction of the lid member 480, as shown in FIG. In the inclined state, the upper side surface of the transmission protrusion 473 is considered to abut on the right side of the left cover member 489 (close to the support hole 471 of the transmission arm member 470).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36A, in the state where the longitudinal direction of the transmission protrusion 473 is along the left-right direction, it is considered that the upper surface of the transmission protrusion 473 abuts across the width direction of the left cover member 489 Be

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c), 35 (c) and 36 (c), the upper side surface of the transmission protrusion 473 corresponds to the posture change of the transmission protrusion 473. The left cover member 489 is designed in such a shape as to be able to abut on the open upper side surface of the left cover member 489 in the lateral width direction.

  That is, the left cover member 489 is compared with the first contact surface 489a that contacts the transmission protrusion 473 in a state where the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the retraction side, and the first contact surface 489a. The inclination with respect to the left and right direction is formed smaller than the second abutting surface 489 b formed to have a small inclination with respect to the lateral direction and the second abutting surface 489 b, and the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side And a third abutment surface 489c that abuts on the transmission projection 473 in a state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the inclination of the shape of the open upper side surface of the left cover member 489 with respect to the left and right direction gradually decreases toward the rotation axis of the lid member 480 with the first contact surface 489a as the maximum. It is designed.

  More specifically, since the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the opening upper side surface of the left cover member 489 changes in the axial radial direction of the lid member 480 as the transmission arm member 470 rotates, The inclination at the contact position with the open upper side surface of the left cover member 489 is designed at an inclination angle along the upper surface of the transmission projection 473 in the contact state.

  Thus, in the contact state between the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489, the contact area between the transmission projection 473 and the left cover member 489 can always be secured regardless of the posture of the transmission arm member 470. Since this can be done, it is possible to prevent the transfer projection 473 from being subjected to local load (overload) from the left cover member 489.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the transmission protrusion 473 with respect to the lateral direction (the width direction of the left cover member 489) at the timing when a large load occurs, that is, the timing when the lid member 480 starts to displace against gravity. The contact area (contact length) between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 can be maximized.

  As a result, the area for receiving the load applied to the transmission projection 473 can be increased, and the load applied per unit area can be reduced, so that the durability of the transmission projection 473 can be improved.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in the state in which the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end on the entry side, the inclination angle of the transmission protrusion 473 is along the left and right direction (width direction of the left cover member 489). In addition to the decrease in the contact area (contact length) between the portion 473 and the left cover member 489, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is maximized, and the transmission projection 473 may be overloaded. is there.

  As a countermeasure, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side, the ratio of the load on the transmission protrusion 473 in the weight of the lid member 480 is reduced. ing.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), in the state where the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side, the advancing and retracting portion 481 which occupies most of the self weight of the lid member 480 is the rotation shaft of the lid member 480. It is disposed on the opposite side (front side) of the transmission protrusion 473 in the front-rear direction with respect to O1. Therefore, most of the weight of the lid member 480 is generated in the direction of displacing the lid member 480 toward the entry side, and the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be reduced.

  In this case, although the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 applied to the lid member 480 is maximum, most of the weight of the lid member 480 is generated against the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2, so at least A portion can be offset by the weight of the lid member 480.

  Thereby, compared with the case where most of the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is transmitted to the transmission projection 473 in a state where the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side, the load applied to the transmission projection 473 Can be reduced.

  Also, as described above, in the present embodiment, the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 changes in the axial radial direction of the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. More specifically, in the process of displacing the lid member 480 from the position on the retraction side to the position on the entry side, the distance between the contact position of the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 and the rotation axis of the lid member 480 is The member 480 is configured to be the longest when disposed at the displacement end position on the retraction side.

  In addition, the first contact surface 489 a has a normal at the contact position with the transmission protrusion 473 in a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis O 1 of the lid member 480 in an arc centered on the rotation axis O 1 of the lid member 480. Since the inclination of the first contact surface 489a is designed to be along (the inclination angle becomes smaller), the load transmitted from the transmission protrusion 473 to the lid member 480 is centered on the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. It can be generated along an arc.

  Thereby, when the load is started to be transmitted from the transmission projection 473 to the lid member 480, the arm length of the moment generated in the lid member 480 is increased, thereby reducing the load required to rotate the lid member 480. can do.

  As a device of the shape of the transmission protrusion 473 itself, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), the transmission protrusion 473 includes a groove 473a formed along the longitudinal direction. That is, in the transmission protrusion 473, a groove 473a along the longitudinal direction is formed to a position beyond the center in the width direction from the front side to the back side.

  Thus, the transmission projection 473 can be compressed and deformed in the contact direction with the left cover member 489. Therefore, the load at the time of contact can be released by deformation, and the contact area can be easily increased by deformation. can do.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 (b), 35 (b) and 36 (b), the curved plate portion 312 disposed opposite to the advancing and retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in a shape along the same plane over the left and right. Be done. Therefore, the distance between the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 becomes shorter toward the center in the left-right direction from the shapes of the advancing and retracting portion 481 and the projecting portion 482.

  The radius at the left and right center position of the protruding portion 482 of the lid member 480 is designed to be less than the distance (length) from the rotation axis O1 to the curved plate portion 312. As a result, it is possible to prevent the overhanging portion 482 where the approach width is the largest from colliding with the curved plate portion 312, so a slight overrotation of the lid member 480 (a degree caused by a design error for each member) occurs. In this case, the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 can be prevented from colliding and breaking.

  Referring back to FIG. 28 and FIG. 31, the description will be given focusing on the middle range. The drive gear 450 is engaged with the front transmission member 440, and the rear transmission member 460 is fastened and fixed to the front transmission member 440. As a result, with the rotation of the drive gear 450, the front transmission member 440 and the rear side The transmission member 460 integrally rotates around the shaft portion 362 of the space forming member 360. In the following, the rotation in the counterclockwise direction in the front view (the front transmission member 440 side view) will be described as the forward rotation.

  The front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 have structures for securing relative position and rigidity with each other on the side facing each other, and are used for driving force transmission on the opposite side. Shapes are formed. The detail of the shape part utilized for this driving force transmission is demonstrated below.

  37 (a) is a plan view of the front transmission member 440 in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 37 (b) is a plan view of the rear transmission member 460 in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. . The arrow XXXVIIa direction and the arrow XXXVIIb direction are set as directions parallel to the rotation axes of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a), the front side transmission member 440 axially protrudes in the center side of the substantially disk-shaped main body plate portion 441 and the edge portion of the main body plate portion 441, and a groove is formed inside thereof. A groove forming portion 442 which is recessed, a support hole 443 which is a circular opening which is drilled to a size that allows insertion of the shaft portion 362 at the central portion of the main body plate portion 441, and a gear formed in the main body plate portion 441 A flange portion 444 covering a tooth, a detection portion 445 extended outward in the radial direction from the flange portion 444 and formed so as to be able to enter a detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 (see FIG. 32), and groove formation And a transmission protrusion 446 protruding in parallel with the rotation axis from a position eccentric to the support hole 443 on the support hole 443 side with respect to the groove formed in the portion 442.

  The groove forming portion 442 is formed with a groove having a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the protruding portion 432 so that the protruding portion 432 of the abutting member 430 (see FIG. 28) can enter. In the grooves, the front transmission member 440 rotates forward in a state where the first groove portion 442a formed along the first arc shape and the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 are disposed in the first groove portion 442a. The second groove 442b in which the projecting portion 432 is guided and an arc shape formed on the opposite side of the first groove 442a with respect to the second groove 442b and having a diameter larger than that of the first groove 442a. And a fourth groove 442d connecting the third groove 442c and the first groove 442a.

  While the second groove 442b and the fourth groove 442d have a common role of connecting the first groove 442a and the third groove 442c, the formation angle range is not common. That is, the fourth groove portion 442d has a smaller forming angle range than the second groove portion 442b, and the change in the distance between the groove and the support hole 443 with respect to the rotation angle of the front transmission member 440 is rapid. It is designed to be

  The transmission projection 446 is not formed in a simple cylindrical shape, but includes a groove 446a formed along a direction of projection in a straight line connecting the central portion and one point on the outer diameter side. Thus, the degree of deformation of the transmission protrusion 446 with respect to the load input from the radial direction can be changed according to the input angle of the load. That is, the transmission protrusion 446 can be formed so that the degree of deformation is maximized when the load is input from the direction orthogonal to the straight line serving as the reference of the groove portion 446a.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (b), the rear side transmission member 460 has a main plate portion 461 formed in a substantially disc shape with a diameter similar to that of the flange portion 444 of the front side transmission member 440, and the main plate portion 461. A groove forming portion 462 in which the groove is recessed in the axial direction, and the shaft portion 362 is bored with an inner diameter sufficiently larger than the base side outer diameter of the shaft portion 362 at the center of the main body plate 461 And a non-contact opening 463 formed to avoid contact of the

  The main body plate portion 461 is not provided with a recessed groove portion formed in the groove forming portion 462, and includes a weight portion 461a which is formed to be expanded in the radial direction in a range not functioning as a groove. The weight portion 461a is an adjustment portion formed for the purpose of correcting the amount of deviation from the rotation axis of the center of gravity of the rear transmission member 460 that is rotationally displaced.

  In this embodiment, for the purpose of calculating the center of gravity when the rear side transmission member 460 and the front side transmission member 440, which are integrally rotationally displaced, are viewed as one, and to correct the center of gravity into a rotational axis, The weight is calculated and formed integrally with the rear transmission member 460. Thus, the center of gravity of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 can be made to coincide with the rotation axis, and therefore, the posture change of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 with respect to the rotation axis can be suppressed. .

  The groove forming portion 462 is formed with a groove having a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the cylindrical projection 472 so that the cylindrical projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 (see FIG. 28) can enter. The grooves are formed in a first groove portion 462a formed along a first arc shape, and the rear transmission member 460 in a state where the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is disposed in the first groove portion 462a. The second groove 462b to which the cylindrical protrusion 472 is guided by rotating forward (rotation in the back direction clockwise direction), and the second groove 462b is formed on the opposite side of the first groove 462a to the first groove The third groove portion 462c is formed along an arc shape having a diameter larger than that of the reference arc 462a, and a fourth groove portion 462d connecting the third groove portion 462c and the first groove portion 462a.

  While the second groove 462b and the fourth groove 462d have a common role of connecting the first groove 462a and the third groove 462c, the formation angle range is not common. That is, the fourth groove portion 462d has a significantly larger forming angle range (about 180 degrees) than the second groove portion 462b, and the groove and the noncontact opening portion 463 with respect to the rotation angle of the rear transmission member 460. It is designed so that the change of the distance between is slow.

  Hereinafter, an example of the displacement mode made possible by the injection device 400 will be described. First, an outline of the displacement mode of the injection device 400 will be described.

  FIGS. 38, 39, 40 and 41 are plan views of the injection device 400 in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa of FIG. In FIG. 38, FIG. 39, FIG. 40 and FIG. 41, the illustration of the fixing member 350 is omitted, and the internal structure of the injection device 400 is visible. Further, in order to facilitate understanding, the coil spring SP1 is illustrated by an imaginary line as a schematic view to the extent that a change in length can be grasped.

  In FIGS. 38 to 41, the displacement of the injection device 400 is illustrated in time series. That is, FIG. 38 shows the state immediately after the granular member 320 has flowed down to the collision member 420 and stopped, FIG. 39 shows the effect standby state of the injection device 400, and FIG. The emission standby state waiting for the emission timing of the device 400 is illustrated, and FIG. 41 illustrates the emission state which is a state immediately after the injection device 400 executes the emission effect. Although FIG. 41 shows the granular member 320 still on the collision member 420, the granular member 320 scatters in the normal direction of the curved plate 421 immediately after this.

  In the state shown in FIG. 38, the collision member 420 is supported downward by the linear movement member 410, and the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the retraction side. A state in which the lid member 480 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 38 to the entry side displacement end will be described as the effect standby state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 39).

  In the effect standby state shown in FIG. 39, since the lid 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side, the lid 480 can partially block the line of sight of the player toward the granular member 320. As a result, the player's attention to the granular member 320 can be reduced, so that the player's eyes can be removed from the subsequent displacement of the granular member 320 and the collision member 420 disposed therebelow.

  In the firing standby state shown in FIG. 40, the collision member 420 is suspended in such a manner that the cylindrical projection 403 abuts on the upper inner surface of the guide hole 423, and the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the retraction side. . In addition, as described later, the linear motion member 410 is restricted in displacement by the contact member 430, and the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 is accumulated.

  In the firing state shown in FIG. 41, the arrangement of the lid member 480 is maintained at the displacement end position on the retraction side, the collision member 420 is splashed by the linear movement member 410 and ascends, and the cylindrical projection 403 is a guide hole. Stop at the position where it abuts on the lower inner surface 423. Thereafter, the collision member 420 is displaced downward by the weight of its own weight or the granular member 320, and returns to the arrangement shown in FIG.

  The flow of the granular member 320 splashed and scattered to the collision member 420 is guided to the center side in the left and right direction by the shape of the curved plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25) of the dividing member 310 and then guided to the collision member 420 side. (See arrows schematically shown in FIG. 38).

  In the present embodiment, when the granular member 320 is guided to the collision member 420 side, the collision member 420 is disposed relatively upward, so the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32) of the fixing member 350 and the collision member 420. The depth of the saucer shape configured by the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 is set to be shallow.

  Therefore, there is a possibility that the plurality of granular members 320 can not be received biased. In the present embodiment, the partitioning member 310 is configured to accommodate the number of granular members 320 that can not be received in a biased manner.

  Thereby, for example, even if the granular members 320 start to return to the right side of the collision members 420 in a large number, when the granular members 320 return thereafter, the granular members 320 having returned earlier make Since a slope that slopes downward toward the left side is configured on the right side, the granular member 320 that has returned afterward will flow to the left along this slope. That is, it flows to the left in a flowing manner on the granular member 320.

  This makes it possible to reduce the lateral deviation of the granular member 320 accumulated on the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420, thereby reducing the deviation of the arrangement of the granular member 320 (difference in scattering mode) in each shot effect. can do.

  In addition, when the granular member 320 is guided to the collision member 420 side, the collision member 420 is disposed at an intermediate position of the displacement section, and one point with the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 with the lower linear movement member 410. It is only in contact with the Therefore, the collision member 420 is allowed to change its posture by the gap generated between the cylindrical protrusion 403 and the guide hole 423. That is, it is permissible to change the posture in a manner of rotating around an axis parallel to the axis of one cylindrical protrusion 403.

  As described above, for example, when many granular members 320 start to return to the right side of the collision member 420, the collision member 420 changes its posture in such a manner that the right side portion is lowered compared to the left side portion. However, in this case, the top of the curved plate portion 421 is relatively displaced to the right.

  Therefore, it becomes easy to guide the granular member 320 which flows down near the left-right center position of the guide part 354 (refer FIG. 32), and returns to the collision member 420 side to the left side. For example, before the collision member 420 changes its posture, the left and right center position of the guide portion 354 and the position of the top of the curved plate portion 421 coincide in the front view, and the adjusted left and right center position of the guide portion 354 is It is considered that whether the granular member 320 flowing down falls to the left or right will be distributed almost equally to the left and right depending on the difference in the contact point between the granular member 320 and the curved plate portion 421.

  On the other hand, when the collision member 420 changes in posture, the position of the top of the curved plate 421 is shifted to the right with respect to the left and right center position of the guide portion 354 and flows down the center position of the guide portion 354. The granular member 320 is considered to be guided to the left along the inclination of the curved plate portion 421. As a result, since it is easy to cause the granular member 320 returned later to flow down to the side where there are few stagnant granular members 320, the granular members 320 can be easily distributed evenly in the left and right direction.

  In addition, the posture change of the collision member 420 is not always allowed similarly. For example, in the emission standby state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 40), the cylindrical projections 403 are respectively disposed at upper end positions of both of the pair of guide holes 423 and the collision member 420 is suspended at two symmetrical points. As compared with the production standby state of the injection device 400, the change in posture of the collision member 420 is suppressed.

  Also, for example, in the firing state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 41), the cylindrical projections 403 are respectively disposed at the lower end positions of both of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 moves upward at two symmetrical points. Because the displacement of the collision member 420 is restricted, the posture change of the collision member 420 is suppressed as compared with the effect waiting state of the injection device 400.

  In addition, when the collision member 420 receives a load from the linear motion member 410, the load is a biasing force generated by the pair of coil springs SP1 that expand and contract in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the pair of guide holes 423, The posture of the collision member 420 tends to be stable.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress the change in the posture of the collision member 420 from the waiting state to the firing state. Thereby, in the case where the stagnation state of the granular member 320 (the deviation of the number of particles from side to side) is equal, it is possible to stabilize the scattering manner of the granular member 320 which is scattered by receiving a load from the collision member 420.

  As described above, after the particulate member 320 is scattered by the injection device 400 performing the firing effect, it flows down along the internal shape of the dividing member 310 (see FIG. 25), and the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 Return to the top of the, return to the production standby state again. That is, in the present embodiment, the injection device 400 is configured to be able to repeatedly execute the state changes shown in FIGS. The relationship between the structures of the injection device 400 for enabling this change in state will be described in detail below.

  42 (a) to 42 (f) and 43 (a) to 43 (e) show the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, the contact member 430, and the front transmission member in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. FIG.

  In FIGS. 42 (a) to 42 (f) and 43 (a) to 43 (e), the outlines of the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the contact member 430 are illustrated by imaginary lines, As a portion related to the load transfer between them, the projecting portion 414 and the lower projecting portion 415 of the linear moving member 410, the buffer member 424 of the collision member 420, the projecting portion 432 of the abutting member 430 and the hook shape The outer shape of the projection 433 is illustrated as a solid line, the inside is illustrated as transparent, and the front transmission member 440 disposed on the back side is illustrated without being hidden.

  Also, in order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the cylindrical protrusion 403 is illustrated by a solid line, the inside is illustrated transparently, and the front transmission member 440 disposed on the back side Are illustrated without being hidden.

  Further, the arrangement of the detection sensor SC4 is illustrated by an imaginary line in order to facilitate understanding of the relation with the drive control.

  42 and 43, the linear movement member 410, the collision member 420 and the contact member 430 (hereinafter, also referred to as "each component in the description of Figs. 42 and 43") accompanying the forward rotation of the front side transmission member 440. The change of the arrangement of) is illustrated in time series. The following will be described in order.

  In FIG. 42A, the arrangement of each component in the effect standby state of the injection device 400 is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 42A, in the effect standby state of the injection device 400, the detected portion 445 of the front transmission member 440 starts to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the audio lamp control device 113 detects the front transmission member 440 in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in a state where the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled in positive rotation. It is possible to determine that the injection device 400 is in the effect standby state by detecting the switching from the state in which the portion 445 is not disposed to the state in which the portion 445 is to be detected.

  FIG. 42B shows the arrangement of the components in a state in which the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission member 440 abuts against the projection 414 of the linear movement member 410 and starts pushing down the linear movement member 410. From the state shown in FIG. 42 (b), the front transmission member 440 opposes the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) and starts pushing down the linear movement member 410.

  Accordingly, since the linear moving member 410 and the front transmission member 440 do not abut each other between FIG. 42 (a) and FIG. 42 (b), direct load transmission between the members is interrupted. Therefore, for example, even if the particulate member 320 (see FIG. 38) flows down and collides with the collision member 420 and the collision member 420 slightly vibrates, the vibration and load are directly transmitted to the front transmission member 440. Is configured to be able to shut off.

  In FIG. 42 (c), the arrangement of each component in a state where the collision member 420 is disposed at the lower end position of the displacement range and the abutment between the linear movement member 410 and the collision member 420 starts to be released is illustrated.

  From the state shown in FIG. 42 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 42 (c), the linear movement member 410 and the collision member 420 are integrally lowered and displaced. In this state, the collision member 420 and the linear movement member 410 are in contact with each other, and the linear movement member 410 and the front transmission member 440 are in contact with each other. And indirectly to the front transmission member 440.

  On the other hand, the load generated when the granular member 320 collides with the collision member 420 is a load in the direction of pushing down the linear movement member 410, which transmits the linear movement member 410 as a contact point with the transmission member 440. In the direction away from the projection 446. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the influence of the load and vibration transmitted to the front transmission member 440 on the positive rotational displacement of the transmission member 440.

  The influence on the positive rotational displacement is not limited at all. For example, the effect of causing the speed that is drive-controlled as rotational displacement to differ from the actual velocity, and the effect of preventing rotational displacement and causing the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) to generate heat are illustrated.

  In FIG. 42D, the projecting portion 432 of the abutting member 430 is disposed at the end position of the first groove portion 442a of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of the constituent members in a state where the abutting member 430 starts to tilt is illustrated. Be done.

  The abutting member 430 is not a member to which a biasing force is applied from other biasing means, and is a member which changes its posture in accordance with the shape of the groove forming portion 442. After (d) in FIG. 42, the number of members to which the front transmission member 440 is displaced increases to two, the linear movement member 410 and the contact member 430, but the displacement direction of the contact member 430 is the displacement direction by its own weight In the same manner, substantially, the condition of the load received by the front side transmission member 440 changes little with respect to the condition prior to FIG. 42 (d) in which only the linear movement member 410 was displaced.

  In FIG. 42 (e), the arrangement of each component in the state in which the linear movement member 410 is disposed at the lower end position of the displacement range is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 42 (e), in the state in which the linear movement member 410 is disposed at the lower end position, the linear movement member 410 and the abutment member 430 are still arranged apart.

  After the state shown in FIG. 42 (e), the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission member 440 starts to be displaced upward. Therefore, since the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the linear motion member 410 is generated in the direction of pushing the transmission protrusion 446, the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the contact member 430 The load required for the posture change can be assisted by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1. Thereby, the load on the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be reduced.

  In FIG. 42 (f), the projection 432 of the contact member 430 is disposed at the end position of the second groove 442b of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of the components in a state in which the contact member 430 is completely tilted is illustrated. Be done.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (f), although the linear movement member 410 and the contact member 430 are disposed apart from each other, the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is provided after the state shown in FIG. 42 (f). Is maintained in the third groove 442c, the attitude of the contact member 430 is maintained (attitude change is prevented).

  Therefore, with respect to the subsequent abutment of the linear motion member 410 and the abutment member 430, the abutment of the linear motion member 410 and the abutment member 430 has a speed compared to the case where they abut in a direction opposite to each other. The aspect can be softened.

  In FIG. 43 (a), a diagram in the same state as FIG. 42 (f) is illustrated for ease of understanding. In FIG. 43 (b), the linear motion member 410 is raised and displaced as the transmission projection 446 of the front side transmission member 440 is displaced upward, and the lower projection 415 of the linear movement member 410 and the abutting member Arrangement of each component in the state where contact with the wedge shaped projection 433 of 430 was started is illustrated.

  Note that from the state shown in FIG. 43 (a) to immediately before the state shown in FIG. 43 (d) corresponds to the emission standby state (see, for example, FIG. 40).

  The lower protrusion 415 and the hook-like protrusion 433 are provided at the tip end portions facing each other with a protruding portion protruding toward the mutually facing side. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a slip at the contact position between the lower protrusion 415 and the hook-like protrusion 433, and it is possible to stably contact the lower protrusion 415 and the hook-like protrusion 433. It can be connected.

  In the state shown in FIG. 43 (b), the end position of the detected portion 445 of the front side transmission member 440 is disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. Therefore, when the front side transmission member 440 rotates forward from the state shown in FIG. 43 (b), the detected portion 445 retracts from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4, and the switching of this state becomes the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4). It is output.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the audio lamp control device 113 detects the front transmission member 440 in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in a state where the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled in positive rotation. Control is performed to determine that the injection device 400 has shifted to the emission standby state by detecting the switching from the state in which the portion 445 is disposed to the state in which the detected portion 445 retracts from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. Be done.

  After the state shown in FIG. 43 (b), the displacement of the linear movement member 410 is restricted by the contact member 430. An urging force is generated in the linear movement member 410 by the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38), and a load in a direction to raise the contact member 430 is applied to the contact member 430, but the displacement of the contact member 430 The displacement of the installation portion 432 is restricted by the groove forming portion 442 being hindered.

  The abutment between the projecting portion 432 and the groove forming portion 442 is the abutment between the circularly curved surface (the outer surface of the projecting portion 432) and the circular arc surface (the inner surface of the third groove 442c). The load generated at that time points to the center of the circle.

  That is, in the state shown in FIG. 43 (b), the load applied from the projecting portion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is directed toward the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440, so the load applied from the projecting portion 432 is on the front side. The influence of the rotation of the transmission member 440 can be prevented, and the displacement of the projection 432 can be restricted regardless of the driving state of the front transmission member 440.

  Therefore, in the emission standby state shown in FIG. 43 (b), the state shown in FIG. 43 (b) can be maintained even after the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is de-energized. Thereby, for example, compared to the configuration in which the drive motor MT1 needs to be energized at all times in the emission standby state, the heat generation of the drive motor MT1 can be suppressed. It can be improved.

  This is, for example, when driving control of the injection device 400 in conjunction with the display effect in the third symbol display device 81, the restriction on the setting of the length of the display effect from the emission standby state to the emission state Is advantageous in that it does not occur from the viewpoint of heat generation of the drive motor MT1.

  In FIG. 43 (c), the arrangement of each component in a state in which the projecting portion 432 of the abutment member 430 is disposed at the end position of the third groove 442c of the front transmission member 440 and the abutment member 430 starts to stand up is illustrated. Be done.

  Since the position of the groove forming portion 442 in contact with the projecting portion 432 changes from the third groove portion 442c after the state of FIG. 43 (c), the direction of the load applied from the projecting portion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is the front transmission It will be offset from the rotation axis of the member 440.

  Therefore, in order to release the energization of the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) and maintain it in the emission standby state, the drive motor MT1 is not changed from the state shown in FIG. 43 (b) to the state shown in FIG. It is necessary to release the power supply of

  In (d) of FIG. 43, when the hook-like protrusion 433 of the contact member 430 retracts from the displacement locus of the lower protrusion 415 of the linear movement member 410, the restriction of the upward displacement of the linear movement member 410 is released. The biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) causes the linear moving member 410 to ascend and displace, and the arrangement of each component in a state where the collision member 420 is splashed upward is illustrated. The state shown in FIG. 43 (d) corresponds to the firing state (see FIG. 41).

  Since the displacement of the contact member 430 in the rising direction basically occurs along the shape of the groove forming portion 442 of the front transmission member 440, the driving force is generated from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38). . On the other hand, since the displacement of the linear movement member 410 is not in the state of being restricted by the transmission protrusion 446 of the front side transmission member 440, the coil spring SP1 transmitted to the contact member 430 via the linear movement member 410. The biasing force (see FIG. 38) also works to assist the displacement of the abutment member 430 in the rising direction.

  In the present embodiment, both the displacement direction of the contact member 430 generated by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the displacement direction of the contact member 430 generated by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 given via the linear motion member 410. Since the same configuration is made in the standing direction, the driving force and the biasing force applied to the contact member 430 can be generated in a manner to mutually assist each other.

  In FIG. 43 (e), the arrangement of each component in the state where the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is disposed at the end position of the fourth groove 442d of the front transmission member 440 and the contact member 430 finishes standing up is illustrated. Be done.

  After the state shown in FIG. 43 (e), the position of the groove forming portion 442 in contact with the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is the first groove portion 442a. As a result, the load applied from the projecting portion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is directed to the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440, so the load applied from the projecting portion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is of the front transmission member 440. The influence on the rotation can be reduced.

  For example, in the present embodiment, the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) has been applied to the contact member 430 until just before the state shown in FIG. It is expected that the load generated in the direction of raising the contact member 430 in the subsequent displacement will also increase. Therefore, without measures, there is a possibility that the rotation of the front transmission member 440 is hindered by the displacement in which the contact member 430 stands up.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as soon as the contact member 430 finishes rising, the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is disposed in the first groove portion 442 a, and from the contact member 430 via the protruding portion 432. The load applied to the front transmission member 440 is configured to be directed to the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440. Thereby, it can be made easy to avoid that rotation of the front side transmission member 440 is inhibited by the displacement which the contact member 430 stands up.

  From the state shown in FIG. 43 (e), drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is driven in the direction to rotate front transmission member 440 in the forward direction, and it is detected that detected portion 445 enters the detection groove of detection sensor SC4. By controlling the drive motor MT1 to stop, the injection device 400 can be returned to the effect standby state, and the MPU 221 (state change shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 can be controlled as a series of emission effects. The control program of FIG. 4) is designed.

  In the above description with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43, as one example of control of the injection device 400, the emission execution control for rotating the front transmission member 440 in the forward rotation direction from the effect standby state of the injection device 400 has been described. In the firing execution control, in the firing state, the collision member 420 is splashed off by the linear motion member 410 which is raised by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1, and the effect of scattering the particulate member 320 is executed.

  Since this effect scatters the granular member 320 in the player's field of vision, the player's attention can be improved with a flash, for example, a few minutes in a state where the player can not know whether a jackpot or not At the timing near the end of the long reach, if it is a big hit, it is possible to improve the player's interest by shifting to the firing state and scattering the granular member 320 to produce effects.

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (if it is not), if the effect of scattering the granular member 320 is executed, the player may be mistaken as a big hit, which is not preferable.

  Also, if the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) of the injection device 400 is not driven at all when it does not shift to the firing state (in the case of misplacement), the driving noise of the drive motor MT1 results in a large hit as a result of long running The player will be able to grasp whether it will or will be lost, which may lower the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the case of detachment, after setting the injection device 400 in the emission standby state, the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled in the direction to reversely rotate the front transmission member 440. It is configured to be able to return to the effect standby state of the injection device 400 without passing through the launch state.

  That is, for example, from the state shown in FIG. 43C, drive control of the drive motor MT1 is performed in the direction to reverse rotate (clockwise) the front transmission member 440, thereby displacing each component in the reverse direction of the above time series. It can be done.

  In this case, the linear movement member 410 is pushed down before the abutment member 430 starts to displace in the direction in which the abutment member 430 stands up (see FIG. 42E), and the abutment between the linear movement member 410 and the abutment member 430 It is possible to prevent the occurrence of rubbing when releasing the abutment between the linear moving member 410 and the abutting member 430 by releasing the (see FIG. 42F).

  Further, after FIG. 42 (e), the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) given to the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission projection 440 via the linear movement member 410 causes the rotation of the front transmission projection 440. Since it works in the assisting direction, the magnitude of the driving force required for the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be reduced.

  The upward displacement of the linear motion member 410 in this case is not instantaneous based on the elastic return of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38), but is configured as a gentle displacement associated with the displacement of the transmission protrusion 446.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent the linear motion member 410 from jumping off the collision member 420, so that the effect of scattering the particulate member 320 is not performed, and the injection device 400 is in a production standby state (see FIG. 42A). Can be returned to

  In order to set the state shown in FIG. 42 (a) after reverse rotation of front side transmission member 440, detection sensor SC4 is detected after retraction of detection target portion 445 from the detection groove of detection sensor SC4. The drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) may be drive-controlled so as to rotate the front transmission member 440 forwardly until it is detected that the detection groove 445 has again entered the detection groove.

  As a result, both the effect control for scattering the granular member 320 and the effect control for preventing the granular member 320 from scattering can be performed with the same preliminary operation associated with the drive of the drive motor MT1. Therefore, it is possible to produce the jackpot or the jackpot so that the player can easily understand, and it is possible to avoid that the player can predict the success or failure result due to the difference in the driving sound.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, the drive sound of the drive motor MT1 can be eliminated at one end by deenergizing the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) in the emission standby state (see FIG. 43C). . This makes it difficult to grasp from the drive sound whether the drive direction is the same or the reverse direction as compared to the case of performing control to switch the drive direction from the state in which the drive motor MT1 continues to be driven. .

  Therefore, the drive motor MT1 is drive-controlled prior to the success / failure notification timing in the effect, and even if the drive noise occurs, it is difficult to determine the drive direction, thereby avoiding the situation where the player grasps the success / failure result. be able to.

  As a result, the drive control of the drive motor MT1 can be started prior to the success or failure notification timing without risking the player grasping the result of the success or failure by the drive sound. It is possible to give a width to the stop timing. In other words, it is unnecessary to stop the drive motor MT1 in the state immediately before the firing state, and stopping the drive motor MT1 in the state sufficiently before the firing state does not affect subsequent effects. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the situation where the drive motor MT1 over-rotates unintentionally into the firing state against the control.

  FIGS. 44 (a) to 44 (f) are plan views of the rear side transmission member 460, the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG.

  In FIG. 44, the change in arrangement of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 (hereinafter, also referred to as “each component in the description of FIG. 44”) accompanying the forward rotation (clockwise) of the rear transmission member 460 It is illustrated in time series. The following will be described in order.

  In FIG. 44 (a), the arrangement of each component in the effect standby state (see FIG. 42 (a)) of the injection device 400 is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 44A, in the effect standby state of the injection device 400, the cylindrical projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is disposed at the end position of the third groove 462c of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid 480 Is placed at the displacement end position on the entry side.

  The lid member 480 receives an urging force from the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33) toward the retraction side, so a load in the direction of pushing down the transmission projection 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is generated via the lid member 480. By being transmitted to the rear side transmission member 460, there is a possibility that the rotation of the rear side transmission member 460 may be affected without measures.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 abuts on the third groove portion 462c of the groove forming portion 462 in the state of FIG. Since a load is applied to the rear side transmission member 460, the load caused by the contact is directed to the center of the circle because the contact is between the circular curved surface and the arc-shaped surface.

  Therefore, the load applied to the groove forming portion 462 through the cylindrical protrusion 472 is directed to the rotation axis of the rear transmission member 460, and hence the load applied to the groove forming portion 462 through the cylindrical protrusion 472 is The influence on the rotation of the side transmission member 460 can be reduced.

  In FIG. 44 (b), the cylindrical projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is disposed at the end position of the third groove 462c of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side. The arrangement of each component in the state is illustrated.

  In FIG. 44C, the cylindrical projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is disposed at the middle position of the fourth groove 462d of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is disposed at the substantially middle position of the displacement range. The arrangement of each component in FIG.

  Since the change in posture of the transfer arm member 470 basically occurs along the shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear transfer member 460, the driving force for the change in posture rotationally drives the rear transfer member 460. It originates from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38).

  On the other hand, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33) acts in the direction of pushing down the transmission projection 473 of the transmission arm member 470 via the lid member 480, and at the same time, this biasing force raises the cylindrical projection 472 Since it works in the direction of displacement, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 also works to assist the change in posture of the transfer arm member 470.

  In the present embodiment, the posture change direction of the transfer arm member 470 generated by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the posture change direction of the transfer arm member 470 generated by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 given via the lid member 480 are Since both are configured to be the same in the clockwise direction, the driving force and the biasing force applied to the transmission arm member 470 can be generated in a mutually assisting manner.

  In FIG. 44D, the cylindrical projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is disposed at the end position of the fourth groove 462d of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the retraction side. The arrangement of each component in FIG.

  In the state shown in FIG. 44 (d), the lid member 480 is maintained at the displacement end end on the retraction side by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33). Further, the transmission projection 473 of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 are disposed in non-contact with each other.

  Thus, it is possible to prevent the load from being applied to the transmission protrusion 473 even when there is no need to displace the lid member 480 to the entry side, and it is possible to reduce the degree of accumulation of fatigue on the transmission arm member 470. .

  In FIG. 44 (e), the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is disposed at an intermediate position of the first groove 462a of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still disposed at the displacement end of the retraction side. The arrangement of each component in FIG.

  After the state shown in FIG. 44 (e), the emission standby state (see FIG. 43 (b)) is configured. The cover member 480 is disposed at the displacement end on the retraction side from the emission standby state to the emission state, and is configured to be capable of avoiding a collision with the granular member 320 (see FIG. 41) to be ejected.

  In FIG. 44 (f), the cylindrical projection 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is disposed at the end position of the first groove 462a of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still disposed at the displacement end position on the retraction side. The arrangement of each component in the state is illustrated.

  From the state shown in FIG. 44 (e) to the state shown in FIG. 44 (f), the injection device 400 passes through the firing state (see FIG. 41). Then, by continuing normal rotation from the state shown in FIG. 44 (f), the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side, and returns to the effect standby state (see FIG. 44 (a)).

  Here, since the state shown in FIG. 44 (f) is the state after execution of the firing effect, there is no load transmission from the linear movement member 410 or the contact member 430 to the front transmission member 440 (for example, FIG. e) see). Therefore, of the driving force of the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38), the amount to be distributed to the front transmission member 440 can be extremely reduced.

  As a result, even if a large driving force is required because the direction of displacement of lid member 480 is a direction that opposes the biasing force of torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33), the driving force of drive motor MT1 Since most of the driving force can be used as a driving force for rotating other components abutting on the rear side transmission member 460, a sufficient driving force can be secured.

  FIG. 45 is a plan view of the injection device 400 in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 45, illustration of the fixing member 350 is abbreviate | omitted and visual recognition of the internal structure of the injection device 400 is enabled.

  In FIG. 45, the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the contact member 430 are illustrated in the same manner as the description in FIGS. Also, in order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the cylindrical protrusion 403 is illustrated by a solid line, the inside is illustrated transparently, and the front transmission member 440 disposed on the back side Are illustrated without being hidden.

  In FIG. 45, the front transmission member 440 is driven in the reverse rotation direction in a state where the linear movement member 410 is arranged at the displacement end position on the upward side (for example, effect standby state, see FIG. 42A), A state is shown in which the transmission projection 446 of the member 440 abuts on the lower protrusion 415 of the linear motion member 410 from the lower side, and the further rotational displacement is restricted.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, a limit is set for the displacement mode permitted for the front transmission member 440. That is, in the normal rotation direction drive, as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, while the displacement of the front transmission member 440 can be continuously driven without being restricted, in the reverse rotation direction drive, When the displacement angle exceeds the allowable angle, the displacement of the transmission projection 446 is restricted by the linear movement member 410, and the continuous drive is further restricted.

  When driving of the drive motor MT1 is continued in a state in which the displacement is restricted, the drive motor MT1 may generate heat and may be damaged. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the drive control in the direction of rotating the front transmission member 440 is limited. To prevent damage to the drive motor MT1, the details of which will be described later.

  46 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear movement member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the arrangement of the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 in accordance with the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460. And the time-dependent change of arrangement | positioning of the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470. FIG.

  In FIG. 46, the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement change of each configuration is not described, but a guide of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement change occurs is shown. Further, the change in the arrangement of the linear moving member 410 corresponds to the change in the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

  Further, in FIG. 46, the reference of the rotation angle of positive rotation from the effect standby state (FIG. 42 (a) and FIG. 44 (a)) is illustrated on the horizontal axis. That is, 0 degree corresponds to FIG. 42 (a), 66 degrees to FIG. 42 (b), 125 degrees to FIG. 42 (c), and 162 degrees to FIG. 42 (d), 202 degrees correspond to FIG. 42 (e), 219 degrees correspond to FIG. 42 (f) and FIG. 43 (a), 228 degrees correspond to FIG. 43 (b), and 266 degrees are FIG. 43 (c) 287 degrees correspond to FIG. 43 (d) and 295 degrees correspond to FIG. 43 (e).

  Further, in FIG. 46, 0 degree corresponds to FIG. 44 (a), 21 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (b), 96 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (c), and 173 degrees is FIG. , Corresponding to FIG. 44 (e), and corresponding to FIG. 44 (f).

  In FIG. 46, the rotation angles of positive rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are described on the horizontal axis with the effect standby state as a reference (the angle is 0 degrees), and the above-described components corresponding to the angles State change in the The change in arrangement of each configuration due to drive control in forward rotation corresponds to the change in the right direction of FIG. 46, and the change in arrangement of each configuration due to drive control in reverse rotation is directed to the left in FIG. Respond to changes.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the displacement velocity when the collision member 420 is up-displaced by rotating the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in reverse before the launch state (angle is 287 degrees) is: It reaches the launch state and becomes slower as compared with the displacement speed when the collision member 420 is displaced upward. That is, in the present embodiment, the speed of the upward displacement of the collision member 420 can be configured in a plurality of ways.

  In addition, since the collision member 420 has already been raised after exceeding the firing state, the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is restricted halfway (see FIG. 45). On the other hand, it is judged from only the output state of the detection sensor SC4 whether the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle 287 degrees) and the effect standby state (angle 360 degrees). Can not.

  For example, when the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle 287 degrees) and the effect standby state (angle 360 degrees), the pachinko machine 10 is powered on again. Also, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can not determine whether or not the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is restricted.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is suspected that the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle 287 degrees) to the effect standby state (angle 360 degrees) when the power is turned on again. In the case where the detection portion 445 is not disposed in the detection sensor SC4 (when the output of the detection sensor SC4 is off), the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are driven to rotate forward. The motor MT1 is controlled to rotate.

  By this rotation, the injection device 400 is returned to the effect standby state at one end, and thereafter, execution control of each effect is performed. Thus, the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is unintentionally restricted after the control is interrupted, such as when the power is turned on again, thereby preventing the drive motor MT1 from generating heat. Can.

  In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the granular member 320 (see FIG. 38) from the firing state (the angle is 287 degrees) to the state where the arrangement of the cylindrical projections 472 of the transfer arm member 470 starts to change (the angle is 304 degrees). The front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are rotationally driven at such a rotational speed as to be stable.

  For example, if the arrangement is stabilized in 2 seconds from the emission, the particles on the way down are controlled by driving control so that the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 rotate at 8 degrees per second (45 seconds / rotation). It can be avoided that the member 320 gets caught in the lid member 480 (see FIG. 38).

  The rotational speeds of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be rotated at quadruple speed. In this case, it is possible to start the displacement of the lid member 480 to the entry side at the timing when the granular member 320 starts to flow downward. In this case, the displacement of the lid member 480 can be completed before the granular member 320 is disposed in the advancing direction of the lid member 480.

  In this state, the granular member 320 can be deposited on the upper side of the lid member 480 by stopping the drive in the effect standby state, so that the granular members 320 are gathered to the left and right center side along the shape of the lid member 480. Can. Thereafter, by driving and controlling the front side transmission member 440 and the rear side transmission member 460 in the forward rotation direction, the granular member 320 falls from the lid member 480 as the lid member 480 is displaced to the retraction side. Get on.

  Thus, by controlling the rotational speeds of the front side transmission member 440 and the rear side transmission member 460 to be different, a plurality of types of modes can be configured until the particulate member 320 reaches the collision member 420.

  Thus, the relative position of each granular member 320 (each spherical member) to the collision member 420 can be changed for each firing execution control. Therefore, for example, by configuring the particulate member 320 with a plurality of spherical members having different shapes and colors, it is possible to make the appearance of the emitted particulate member 320 different (arrangement and displacement direction of each particulate member 320). , Can improve the rendering effect.

  Referring back to FIG. 5 and FIG. In the present embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described launch effect unit 300, the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and the displacement rotation unit 800 are disposed as effect devices for boosting the game. Next, the scaling unit 600 will be described.

  47 and 48 are front perspective views of the scaling unit 600, and FIGS. 49 and 50 are rear perspective views of the scaling unit 600. 47 and 49 show the effect standby state of the scaling unit 600, and FIGS. 48 and 50 show the overhanging state of the scaling unit 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is capable of moving up and down the center position in the left-right direction, and a rendering member 700 configured to be capable of emitting light, and hemispherical illumination fixedly disposed apart from the left and right. And an apparatus 613.

  By performing the light emission effect by the effect member 700 and the hemispherical illumination device 613, light is emitted to the player from the near side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7), and the effect to make the player visually recognize be able to.

  FIG. 51 is a front exploded perspective view of the scaling unit 600, and FIG. 52 is a rear exploded perspective view of the scaling unit 600. In FIGS. 51 and 52, the effect member 700 is illustrated in an assembled state. As shown in FIGS. 47 and 49, in the assembled state, the end of the lower arm member 630 connected to the effect member 700 is disposed on the front side of the rear plate portion 611, but in FIG. 51 and FIG. For convenience, they are disposed on the back side of the rear plate portion 611.

  As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 includes a left and right elongated main body member 601 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510 (see FIG. 5) and a front face of the main body member 601. A front cover member 610 disposed on the side and having a design surface, and a pair of upper arm members 620 pivotally supported rotatably and rotatably interlocked with a cylindrical shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601, and the upper arm member 620 and the middle And a pair of lower arm members 630 which change posture with the rotation of the upper arm member 620, a drive motor MT2 fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body member 601, a drive gear and teeth of the drive motor MT2 A transmission gear 650 rotatably coupled to the left upper arm member 620 so as to transmit the driving force of the drive motor MT2 and rotatably supported by the main body member 601; Annulus assembled to 1, provided with a torsion spring SP3 loading the biasing force of the upward to the upper arm member 620, and the presentation member 700 coupled to a distal end of the lower arm member 630, a.

  The main body member 601 is formed in a left and right long plate shape, and a pair of guide holes 602 which are a pair of left and right long holes arranged on the left and right straight lines, and a pair of cylindrically projecting from the left and right symmetrical positions A cylindrical shaft portion 603, a pair of arc-shaped holes 604 bored in an arc shape with the cylindrical shaft portion 603 as a central axis, and a cylindrical shaft portion 605 projecting in a cylindrical shape from the left side to the back side; In the circular arc shaped hole 606 which is bored in an arc shape centering on the cylindrical shaft portion 605 and in the circular shape centering on the cylindrical shaft portion 605 in a posture in which the detection groove is directed to the cylindrical shaft portion 605 side And a detection sensor 607 fastened and fixed.

  The guide hole 602 is formed to have an upper and lower width slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630. The guide hole 602 functions as an elongated hole for guiding the displacement of the lower arm member 630 when the cylindrical protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630 is inserted.

  The cylindrical shaft portion 603 has a portion protruding to the front side, which is inserted through the support hole 621 of the upper arm member 620 and rotatably supports the upper arm member 620. By screwing a large diameter screw into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 603, the upper arm member 620 is supported so as not to come off.

  In the cylindrical shaft portion 603, a portion protruding on the back surface side is inserted into the wound main body portion of the torsion spring SP3, whereby the arrangement of the torsion spring SP3 is stabilized.

  One arm portion of the torsion spring SP3 is pressed from the upper side by the extension portion 601a which protrudes in a V-shape from the back side of the main body member 601, and the other arm portion is attached to the biased portion 625 of the upper arm member 620. It is engaged. As a result, the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP3 functions in the direction of pushing down the biased portion 625, so that the upper arm member 620 is biased in the direction in which the connecting portion 623 is displaced upward.

  The arc-shaped hole 604 is a through hole for passing the biased portion 625 of the upper arm member 620 to the back side of the main body member 601. Thus, the biased portion 625 of the upper arm member 620 and the torsion spring SP3 can be configured to be engageable.

  The cylindrical shaft portion 605 is inserted into the support hole 653 of the transmission gear 650 and rotatably supports the transmission gear 650. By screwing a large diameter screw into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 605, the transmission gear 650 is supported so as not to come off.

  The arc-shaped hole 606 is a through hole for passing the cylindrical protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650 to the front side of the main body member 601. Thereby, the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 and the transmission gear 650 can be configured to be engageable. By screwing a large diameter screw into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical projection 654 of the transmission gear 650, the upper arm member 620 is supported by the transmission gear 650 so as not to come off.

  The detection sensor 607 has a detection groove to which the detection target plate portion 655 of the transmission gear 650 can enter, and the transmission gear 650 is disposed at a position where the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the production standby state or at other positions. It is configured to be able to determine if it is.

  The front cover member 610 is a thin-walled member formed of a resin material with low light transmittance and fastened and fixed to the main body member 601, and is formed of a rear plate portion 611 formed at the left and right center portions and a rear plate portion 611. A front plate portion 612 is formed on the left and right outside from the connection position with the left and right upper end portions, and is formed to project to the front side more than the rear plate portion 611, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the front plate portion 612. And a hemispherical lighting device 613.

  The rear plate portion 611 is disposed on the front side of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601, and shields the field of view so that the cylindrical shaft portion 603 is not visually recognized. The back side of the rear plate portion 611 avoids the movement locus of the gear portion 622 of the upper arm member 620, and projects to the back side with a dimension slightly longer than the longitudinal width of the gear portion 622 It has a protruding contact portion 611a that contacts.

  Thus, the fastening state of the rear plate portion 611 with respect to the main body member 601 can be stabilized, and the upper arm member 620 can be displaced in the space divided by the rear plate portion 611 and the main body member 601. it can. In other words, since it is possible to suppress the change in posture of the upper arm member 620 (for example, change in posture such as bending with respect to the rotation axis) on both sides in the axial direction, the state of the upper arm member 620 can be stabilized. .

  The front plate portion 612 is a plate-like portion which is disposed on the front side of the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630 and is configured not to allow the player to visually recognize structural parts of these members. The sliding surface 612a formed as a pair of left and right as a flat surface parallel to the front plate portion and the wiring portion formed as a concave portion opened to the back side in the plate portion protruding from the left upper end portion to the back surface And a recess 612b.

  The sliding surface 612a is assembled from the front side to the lower arm member 630 and fastened and fixed, and is configured as a flat surface on which the pressing member PC1 formed with low friction from its shape and material can slide. That is, the pressing member PC1 fixed in the middle of the lower arm member 630 in the longitudinal direction is a flat plate surface formed along a locus displaced along with the displacement of the lower arm member 630.

  The shape of the side of the pressing member PC1 facing the sliding surface 612a is a substantially semicircular shape protruding toward the sliding surface 612a, and the state when the pressing member PC1 and the sliding surface 612a are in contact is point contact Configured to be Thereby, the resistance generated between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding surface 612a can be reduced, and the lower arm member 630 can be easily displaced smoothly.

  The sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 are not always in contact with each other, and a gap is provided. On the other hand, before the amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 to the front side exceeds the allowable amount, the sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 abut against each other to limit the displacement of the lower arm member 630 to the front side. Ru.

  In the present embodiment, the allowable amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 to the front side is set by the dimensional relationship between the rear side plate portion of the dividing member 310 (see FIG. 13A) and the effect member 700. That is, the allowable amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 to the front side is set such that the effect member 700 in the arrangement assumed from the arrangement of the lower arm member 630 does not abut on the dividing member 310.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, the sliding member 612 abuts on the pressing member PC 1 to limit the displacement of the lower arm member 630 to the front side, whereby the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 Contact can be prevented.

  The sliding portion 612a disposed on the right side is formed in an arc shape along the locus of the pressing member PC1, but the sliding portion 612a disposed on the left side includes an arc shape as a locus of the pressing member PC1. Although formed as a large plane, the functions of the left and right sliding parts 612a are common. That is, it is sufficient if at least an arc shape as a locus of the pressing member PC1 is formed in a planar shape, and the shape of the other portions can be arbitrarily set. For example, as in the right side portion of the present embodiment, the sliding portion 612a is formed to be limited to an arc shape as a locus of the pressing member PC1, and protrudes to the back side in other portions (the design portion on the front side is It may be configured to project to the back side under the influence of being disposed closer to the back side), or as in the left portion of the present embodiment, even if the periphery of the sliding portion 612a is also configured to have the same planar shape. good.

  In addition to the forward displacement of the lower arm member 630 being limited by the contact between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding portion 612a, the upper arm member 620 is fastened to the torsion spring SP3 and the cylindrical projection 654. The forward displacement is restricted by the fastening screw that is fixed. That is, by limiting the displacement of the upper arm member 620 in addition to the limitation of the forward displacement of the lower arm member 630, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a large load locally.

  The wiring through recess 612 b is a recess that functions as a passage for electrical wiring that passes through the proximal end through hole 635 a of the lower arm member 630. That is, the electric wiring reached between the rear case 510 and the enlargement / reduction unit 600 passes through the wiring through recess 612 b and passes through the proximal end through hole 635 a of the lower arm member 630, and then to the distal end side of the lower arm member 630. It is guided and passed through the effect member 700.

  As described above, by setting the insertion path of the electrical wiring to the inside of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from the upper side, the long lower arm member 630 connected to the effect member 700 is largely displaced in the lateral direction with the displacement. (In the present embodiment, even in the case of displacing about a half of the left and right width of the rear case 510), it is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the electrical wiring sags and hangs downward.

  The hemispherical illumination device 613 has a hemispherical lens member and is a device for irradiating the light irradiated from the light emitting means such as an LED disposed on the back side to the front side through the hemispherical lens member. . In the present embodiment, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means is configured to be inclined downward to the center side in the left-right direction.

  This makes it easy to improve the player's attention to the light emitted from the hemispherical lighting device 613 as compared with the case where the optical axis of the light emitted from the hemispherical lighting device 613 points in the front-rear direction. it can. For example, it is made easy to make light notice by putting light into the visual field of the player who is viewing the center of the third symbol display device 81 easily, or by irradiating the rendering member 700 in the overhang state or the enlargement state. Can be

  The upper arm member 620 is formed in a long plate shape, and is formed as a circular hole having a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical shaft portion 603, so that the support hole 621 configured to be able to insert the cylindrical shaft portion 603 A gear portion 622 is formed on an arc centering on the support hole 621 and is configured to be able to mesh with each other by the pair of upper arm members 620, and a lower arm member 630 is circularly bored at the end in the longitudinal direction. As a long hole having a width slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical projection 654 of the transmission gear 650, which is formed only on the connecting portion 623 configured to be able to insert the cylindrical projection 631 of A transmission hole 624 is formed, and a biased portion 625 which protrudes from the back side of the upper arm member 620 and whose tip is formed in a hook shape.

  The transmission hole 624 has a transmission portion 624 a formed along a straight line passing through the center of the support hole 621 and a margin continuously extended from one end of the transmission portion 624 a along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650. A unit 624 b.

  The transmission portion 624a functions as a portion receiving the driving force transmitted via the transmission gear 650, and the margin portion 624b functions as a portion for blocking the transmission of the driving force, which will be described in detail later.

  The biased portion 625 is a portion to which one end of the arm of the torsion spring SP3 is engaged, and the biasing force in the direction to lift and displace the left and right outer sides of the upper arm member 620 via the biased portion 625 is increased. Arm member 620 is received.

  In addition, the forward displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be restricted by the engagement of the distal end wedge portion of the biased portion 625 and the torsion spring SP3 (see FIG. 49).

  The lower arm member 630 is a circle which is configured substantially symmetrically from the long plate member except that the left arm has a path for passing the electrical wiring, and is a circle projecting from the middle position in the long direction to the back side. A columnar projection 631, a cylindrical projection 632 projecting in a cylindrical shape on the back side from the left and right outer position with respect to the cylindrical projection 631, and a front and rear direction in the left and right inner position with respect to the cylindrical projection 631 And a plurality of arc-shaped holes 634 formed to extend along a pair of arcs centered on the support holes 633.

  The cylindrical protrusion 631 is inserted into the connection portion 623 of the upper arm member 620, and a large diameter screw is screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 631 from the rear side, Lower arm member 630 is supported against upper arm member 620 so as not to come off.

  The cylindrical protrusion 632 is inserted through the guide hole 602 of the main body member 601 through the collar member C1 formed in a cylindrical shape for resistance reduction, and the female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 632 is on the back side The lower arm member 630 is supported so as not to be detached from the main body member 601 by screwing in a screw with a large diameter from the head.

  The support holes 633 and the arc-shaped holes 634 are used for connection with the effect member 700. The thickness of the portion where the arc-shaped hole 634 is formed is configured to be thicker at the lower side portion than at the upper side portion due to the relationship with the arrangement portion 635 described later. Thereby, when the effect member 700 is disposed at the lower end position, the effect member 700 can be supported so as to be held from the left and right at a thick portion, so that it is effective to change the attitude of the effect member 700 to an inclining posture. Can be regulated.

  Further, the lower arm member 630 on the left side is a placement portion 635 formed open on the back side to form a space for passing electrical wiring in the lengthwise direction of the arm body, and the back face of the placement portion 635 And a thin lid part 636 which is disposed on the side and functions as a lid of the placement part 635.

  The placement portion 635 has a proximal end through hole 635a drilled in the front-rear direction at the end of the cylindrical protrusion 632 side.

  The base end side through hole 635a is a through hole for passing the electric wiring disposed in the placement portion 635 in the front-rear direction. That is, the electrical wiring disposed in the placement portion 635 passes through the base end side through hole 635a from the front side and is guided to the placement portion 635, and is pulled out of the placement portion 635 to the tip side of the lower arm member 630.

  The lower arm member 630 has a boundary along the longitudinal direction of the lower arm member 630, and in the production standby state, the lower side meat portion 637 disposed below the boundary is formed backward on the back side. Be done. In other words, the upper side of the tangent line is formed as a thin plate.

  The lower meat portion 637 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending in the short direction in the lower arm member 630 on the right side. In the lower arm member 630 on the left side, the lower side meat portion 637 constitutes the upper side wall portion of the placement portion 635, is configured to be able to guide the electric wiring inside, and is disposed as a lid in the guide path. The thin lid portion 636 is reinforced by fastening and fixing.

  The electrical wiring is guided to the side of the effect member 700 through the inside of the lower arm member 630 (between the placement portion 635 and the thin lid portion 636), so members (for example, Contact between the upper arm member 620) and the electrical wiring can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring from being damaged due to the electrical wiring getting entangled or rubbing on these members.

  The lower arm member 630 includes the pressing member PC1 configured from the same member and assembled from the back side, in addition to the above-described pressing member PC1 assembled from the front side. The lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to abut on the front and back of the main body plate-like portion of the main body member 601 via the pressing member PC1. The main body member 601 and the pressing member PC1 are not always in contact but have a slight gap, and contact when the lower arm member 630 is displaced to the rear side to limit the displacement thereof. It is the same as the case of the pressing member PC1 on the front side to function.

  That is, since the lower arm member 630 is configured such that the pressing members PC1 are assembled on both the front and rear sides and can be in contact with the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 via the pressing members PC1, It is possible to make it easy to limit the displacement and to easily reduce the resistance caused to the elevation displacement at the time of displacement limitation.

  The protruding end of the pressing member PC1 assembled from the rear side to the rear side is disposed closer to the rear side than the rear end of the upper arm member 620. As a result, even when the tip of the pressing member PC1 is displaced to the back side so as to abut the main body member 601, the upper arm member 620 can be prevented from contacting the main body member 601. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the upper arm member 620 can be prevented from coming into contact with the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 disposed in the front and rear.

  This configuration is particularly effective when the lower arm member 630 is unintentionally displaced in the front-rear direction. For example, in the present embodiment, the tip of the lower arm member 630 is disposed in the vicinity of the rear end surface of the effect member 700, and the center of gravity of the effect member 700 and the connecting position between the effect member 700 and the lower arm member 630 are back and forth. Since it is misaligned in the direction, it can be said that the lower arm member 630 is easily displaced in the front-rear direction. In addition, the lower arm member 630 is easily displaced in the front-rear direction due to the displacement of the lower arm member 630 or the drive displacement of the effect member 700 itself.

  The transmission gear 650 includes a semicircular main portion 651 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape, a gear portion 652 engraved in a gear shape on the radially outer side of the semicircular main portion 651, and a semicircular main portion A support hole 653 is formed as a circular hole through which the cylindrical shaft portion 605 can be inserted on a semicircular central axis of the H. 651, and a cylindrical shape protrudes from the outer diameter end of the semicircular main portion 651 toward the front side. Cylindrical projection 654, a detection plate portion 655 formed in a thin plate shape capable of entering the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 at the circumferential end of the semicircular main portion 651, and the detection plate portion A thick portion 656 is formed so as to be thickened between the portion 655 and the support hole 653, and a controlled hole 657 is formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction at the position of the thick portion 656 on the side of the support hole 653.

  The gear portion 652 is disposed in mesh with the drive gear of the drive motor MT2, and the drive force of the drive motor MT2 is directly transmitted.

  The cylindrical protrusion 654 is disposed inside the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 through the arc-shaped hole 606 of the main body member 601. Accordingly, with the rotation of the transmission gear 650, the driving force can be transmitted to the upper arm member 620 via the cylindrical protrusion 654. The cylindrical protrusion 654 is inserted into a collar member whose outer diameter is slightly shorter than the width of the transmission hole 624, and a female screw portion formed at the protruding end of the cylindrical protrusion 654 has a large diameter head screw. By being screwed in, the collar member and the upper arm member 620 are supported so as not to come off, and the forward displacement of the upper arm member 620 is restricted.

  The thickened portion 656 and the regulated hole 657 are portions configured to be engageable with the above-described displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 6). Since the regulated holes 657 are disposed on the side of the support holes 653 (a position closer to the support holes 653), the transmission gear 650 to the displacement regulating device 180 in the regulated state (see FIG. 21A) of the displacement regulating device 180. The load (moment) to be transmitted is configured to be reduced.

  Further, as a design concept of the thickness of the transmission gear 650, the thick portion 656 is set as a portion required to withstand the load generated by the engagement with the displacement restricting device 180. That is, the material cost required for the transmission gear 650 can be reduced by forming the portion where the engagement with the displacement restricting device 180 can not occur with a thin wall.

  FIG. 53 is a front exploded perspective view of the effect member 700, and FIG. 54 is a rear exploded perspective view of the effect member 700. As shown in FIG. In the description of FIGS. 53 and 54, FIGS. 51 and 52 will be referred to as appropriate.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the effect member 700 includes a plate-like main body 710 connected to the tip of the lower arm member 630, and a functional plate portion 720 fastened and fixed to the front side of the plate-like main body 710. A rotary plate 730 disposed between the functional plate portion 720 and the plate-like main body 710 and rotatably supported relative to the functional plate portion 720, and between the rotary plate 730 and the functional plate portion 720. The telescopic displacing member 740, which is arranged and interlocked with the rotation of the rotary plate 730 and configured to allow the same displacement as the magic hand, and the drive gear MG3 is fixed on the front side of the functional plate portion 720. A drive motor MT3 disposed on the back side, a light emission effect device 750 fastened and fixed on the front side of the function plate portion 720 to execute light emission effect, and a tip end portion of a plurality of telescopic displacement members 740 are fastened and fixed respectively Dude includes a plurality of shielding design member 760 to be combined so as to shield the passage of light at the front side of the light emitting effect device 750, a.

  The plate-like main body 710 has a pair of cylindrical protrusions 711 protruding in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the support hole 633 of the lower arm member 630 from the symmetrical position to the back side 711, a plurality of auxiliary projections 712 protruding in a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the width of the arc upper hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 from the circular arc position centered on 711 and a pair of cylindrical projections 711, a through hole 713 drilled in the front and rear direction, a wiring guide member 714 disposed under the through hole 713 and open only on the front side, and a pressure disposed on the back of the plate And a member PC1.

  The through hole 713 is a through hole for passing the electric wiring DK1 guided to the front end side of the lower arm member 630 through the lower arm member 630 and between the disposition portion 635 and the thin lid portion 636 to the front side. . The electrical wiring DK1 is guided by the wiring guide member 714 in the section from the tip of the lower arm member 630 to the through hole 713. Thus, even in a limited section from the lower arm member 630 to the through hole 713, the possibility that the electrical wiring DK1 abuts on another member or is visually recognized by the player can be eliminated.

  The wire guide member 714 is formed with an inclined surface which is inclined downward as it goes to the back side, in addition to the function of guiding the electric wire DK 1, the lower end portion of the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610 It also has the function of relieving the contact of

  That is, the upper surface of the wiring guide member 714 is disposed to face the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610 when the effect member 700 is displaced upward, and the effect member 700 is misaligned to the back side. Even if the wiring guide member 714 is in contact with the rear plate portion 611, the effect member 700 can be returned to the front during the upward displacement along the inclination of the upper surface of the wiring guide member 714.

  Similar to the wiring guide member 714, the pressing member PC1 is disposed slidably with the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610. That is, in the present embodiment, the pressing member PC1 disposed at the upper end portion and the wiring guide member 714 disposed at the lower portion can be brought into contact with the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610 in the process of upward displacement of the rendering member 700 By configuring in the above, it is possible to divide the generation position of the load for maintaining the posture of the effect member 700.

  FIG. 55 is a front view of the functional plate portion 720. FIG. In the description of FIG. 55, FIGS. 53 and 54 will be referred to as appropriate.

  The function plate portion 720 is formed in a substantially plate shape from a resin material, and is cylindrically protruded to the back side at the central portion, and the inside of the cylinder is penetrated and formed, and the central axis of the cylindrical portion 721 An arc-shaped hole 722 bored along the coaxial arc shape, a sensor placement portion 723 formed to arrange the detection sensor SC7 at one end of the arc-shaped hole 722, and a drive shaft of the drive motor MT3 can be inserted Motor fixing portion 724 having an opening and a drive motor MT3 can be fastened and fixed, a radial long hole 725a along a straight line passing through the central axis of the cylindrical portion 721, and the radial long hole 725a Extending radially outward on a plurality of (five in the present embodiment) guide holes 725, each of which comprises a pair of intersecting elongated holes 725b intersecting at right angles, and an extension of the radially elongated holes 725a Multiple (in this embodiment, Extended plate portion 726, and a pair of (proposedly projecting at both ends in the width direction of the extended plate portion 726 from the back side end of the flat portion disposed at the extension base end of the extended plate portion 726 In the embodiment, the extension plate portion 726 includes a pair of auxiliary protrusions 727, and a pair of columnar protrusion portions 728 protruding in a columnar shape from the vicinity of the radially outer end portion to the back surface side.

  The cylindrical portion 721 is disposed so that the rear end is in contact with the plate-like main body 710, and the inner through hole is in communication with the through hole 713 of the plate-like main body 710 and fastened and fixed to the plate-like main body 710 Be done. At this time, the fastening screw is inserted into the plate-like main body 710 from the back side of the plate-like main body 710, and the screw portion is screwed into a female screw formed at the rear end of the cylindrical portion 721.

  As a result, the functional plate portion 720 is fastened and fixed to the plate-like main body 710, and a through hole is formed in the central portion thereof. In the present embodiment, the electrical wiring DK1 is guided to the front side through the through hole. .

  The electrical wiring DK1 (see FIG. 76) guided to the front side is connected to the detection sensor SC7 fastened and fixed to the sensor placement portion 723 and the drive motor MT3 fastened and fixed to the motor fixing portion 724. As a result, the detection sensor SC7 and the drive motor MT3 can be brought into an energized state.

  The arc-shaped hole 722 is a through-hole for enabling the detection target portion 731a of the rotary plate 730 to be projected to the front side, and the detection target portion 731a enters the detection groove of the detection sensor SC7. The posture can be determined.

  The guide hole 725 is a through hole group formed with a width capable of disposing the guided protrusions 741 b, 741 c, 742 a of the extendable displacement member 740, and extends along a straight line extending in the radial direction from the central axis of the cylindrical portion 721. The long hole-like long hole shaped radial hole 725a to be formed, along the straight line orthogonal to the straight line on which the radial long hole 725a became a reference on both sides of the outer diameter side end of the radial long hole 725a And a pair of intersecting elongated holes 725b formed in

  The radially elongated holes 725 a and the intersecting elongated holes 725 b function to limit the displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740, and the extending plate portion 726 and the auxiliary projection 727 correct the posture of the telescopic displacement member 740 in the collective arrangement state Functions, but the details will be described later.

  The columnar projecting portion 728 is configured such that the front end on the back side can be in contact with the plate-like main body 710. In the abutting state, the functional plate portion 720 is a plate-shaped main body by screwing a fastening screw inserted from the rear side to the plate-shaped main body 710 into the female screw formed on the tip end side of the columnar protrusion portion 728 It is fastened and fixed to 710.

  In the assembled state, the columnar protrusion 728 is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotating plate 730 to limit the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730. That is, the columnar projecting portion 728 is used as a portion for fastening and fixing the functional plate portion 720 to the plate-like main body 710 and a portion for limiting the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730.

  56 is a front view of the rotary plate 730, and FIG. 57 is a side view of the rotary plate 730. In the description of FIGS. 56 and 57, FIGS. 53 and 54 will be referred to as appropriate.

  The rotary plate 730 is formed in a substantially disc shape from a resin material, and is cylindrically protruded to the front side at a central portion, and the inside of the cylinder is penetrated and formed, and the central axis of the cylindrical portion 731 A plurality of arc shaped holes 732 drilled along the coaxial arc shape, and a long through hole at a position outside the cylindrical portion 731 and at the inside diameter side of the arc shaped hole 732 And a plurality of (five in the present embodiment) guide holes 733, and extension claws 734 extending in the form of claws in the radially outward direction at positions corresponding to the guide holes 733.

  The cylindrical portion 731 is designed such that the inner diameter is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 721 of the functional plate portion 720, extends from the front end to the front side, and passes through the arc shaped hole 722 of the functional plate portion 720 And a gear portion 731b formed on the outer peripheral side in a gear shape capable of meshing with the drive gear MG3 of the drive motor MT3.

  The arc-shaped hole 732 is an opening in which the columnar projecting portion 728 of the functional plate portion 720 is disposed, and the arc-shaped hole 732 is formed with a length capable of securing the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730 at less than about 120 degrees.

  The guide holes 733 are each formed in the same shape, and a small diameter circular arc portion 733a formed in an arc shape centering on the central axis of the cylindrical portion 731 and the center of the cylindrical portion 731 rather than the small diameter arc portion 733a. A large diameter arc portion 733b long from the axis, and a connecting portion 733c connecting the large diameter arc portion 733b and the small diameter arc portion 733a are provided.

  The aspect of the connecting portion 733c is not limited at all, but in the present embodiment, the change in the length from the central axis of the cylindrical portion 731 per unit angle is formed to change according to the position. Ru. In particular, in the present embodiment, a change in length from the central axis of the cylindrical portion 731 per unit angle in the vicinity of the small diameter arc portion 733a or the large diameter arc portion 733b is designed to be relatively small.

  As a result, it is possible to reduce the resistance generated at the time of the load transmission to the telescopic displacement member 740, and to improve the rendering effect by making the displacement speed of the telescopic displacement member 740 uneven.

  The extending claw portion 734 is formed in a claw shape that protrudes in a clockwise direction in a front view, is configured to be engageable with the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the front side, and is formed close to the back side in the thickness direction A rear side claw portion 734a and a front side claw portion 734b formed on the front side of the rear side claw portion 734a are provided. In the present embodiment, the rear side claw portion 734a and the front side claw portion 734b are divided at a substantially middle position of the thickness dimension of the extension claw portion 734.

  The extending claw portion 734 functions as a portion engaged with the first guided protrusion 743 b and the second guided protrusion 744 b of the extension / displacement member 740. The front side claw portion 734b and the rear side claw portion 734a correspond to the second guided projection 744b and the first guided projection 743b which differ in the front and rear projecting end positions from the telescopic displacement member 740, and in order The guide is directed radially inward, the details will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, in the extension claw portion 734, the extension claw portion 734 disposed on the lower side has a longer extension length than the extension claw portion 734 disposed on the upper side. Is formed. In this embodiment, the extending length is increased in both the circumferential direction and the radial direction. Thereby, the influence of gravity can be mitigated.

  That is, even if the telescopic displacement members 740 are configured in the same shape, the displacement caused by the action of gravity differs for each telescopic displacement member 740 because the relationship between the displaceable direction and the gravity direction is different. For example, since the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the lower side hangs down due to its own weight and is displaced in a direction away from the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730, the telescopic displacement member radially outward of the extending claw portion 734 without measures. The first guided projection 743b of 740 is disposed, and there is a possibility that the guiding inward in the radial direction by the extending claw portion 734 may fail.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the extending length of the extending claw portion 734 disposed on the lower side is designed to be sufficiently long in consideration of the sagging of the telescopic displacement member 740. The radially inward guidance by the portion 734 can be stably performed.

  On the other hand, even if the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the upper side is displaced by the influence of its own weight, the displacement is a displacement in a direction approaching the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730. Is unlikely to fail. Therefore, the extension claw portion 734 disposed on the upper side is not extended longer than necessary, and is formed to be short, thereby reducing the material cost and miniaturizing the rotating plate 730. Can.

  The telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. In the description of FIGS. 58 and 59, FIGS. 53 and 54 will be referred to as appropriate.

  Fig. 58 (a) is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and Fig. 58 (b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760. Is a front perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG. 59 (b) is a rear perspective view of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760.

  In FIGS. 58 (a) and 58 (b), among the five sets of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, one set disposed at the top is illustrated in a state of being collectively arranged, In 59 (a) and FIG. 59 (b), the same set is illustrated in the case of being separated.

  Since the telescopic displacement member 740 is a member constituting a link mechanism constituted by a plurality of long members arranged in two layers in the front and back, in the following description, a plurality of telescopic displacement members 740 disposed on the front side The plane on which the long member can be displaced is also referred to as the front layer plane, and the plane on which the plurality of long members disposed on the rear side can be displaced is also referred to as the back layer plane.

  The telescopic displacement member 740 is rotatably supported at a pair of proximal end members 741 arranged in the front and rear two layers and rotatably supported at the lower end relative to each other at the upper end of the proximal end member 741. A pair of first elongated members 742, a pair of second elongated members 743 pivotally supported so as to be relatively rotatable at an upper end portion of the first elongated members 742, and an upper end portion of the second elongated members 742 And a tip adjustment member 744 having a guide elongated hole 744a linearly extended in a guideable manner.

  The proximal end side member 741, the first long member 742 and the second long member 743 configured as a pair of front and rear are designed to be the same in length and supporting position in the longitudinal direction.

  The base end side member 741 is a circle from the back surface where the cylindrical projection 741a is provided to be projected, and the front surface side from which the projection 741a is provided. A guided protrusion 741b which is provided in a columnar shape and is inserted into a member on the front side of the flat surface, and a lower end portion of a first long member 742 protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the front side from the upper end of the rear side And a guided protrusion 741c that is inserted into a through hole that is bored in the hole.

  The receiving protrusion 741 a is disposed in the guide hole 733 (see FIG. 56) of the rotary plate 730 and is configured to be displaced in the radial direction as the rotary plate 730 rotates.

  The to-be-guided protrusion 741 b and the to-be-guided protrusion 741 c are disposed in the guide hole 725 of the functional plate portion 725 and guided in the longitudinal direction. The guided protrusion 741b is disposed in the radial direction elongated hole 725a, and the guided protrusion 741c is disposed in the intersecting elongated hole 725b (see FIG. 55).

  The first elongated member 742 is rotatably supported on the longitudinal axis at a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction so as to be relatively rotatable, and is projected in a cylindrical shape from the lower end portion of the member on the rear layer side to the front side It has a guided protrusion 742a inserted into the upper end portion of the proximal end side member 741 on the side.

  The to-be-guided protrusion 742a is disposed in the intersecting long hole 725b of the functional plate portion 725, and is guided in its longitudinal direction (see FIG. 55).

  The second elongated member 743 is rotatably supported on the front-rear direction axis at a substantially intermediate position in the longitudinal direction so as to be relatively rotatable, and is projected in a cylindrical shape toward the front side from the upper end portion of the front layer plane side member From the upper end of the member on the side of the layer plane, a pair of members with a diameter about the width of the member is projected to be flush with the front end face of the member on the side of the front layer. A support protrusion 743a and a first guided protrusion 743b which is provided in a cylindrical shape so as to project from the substantially middle position of the member on the rear layer plane side toward the back side.

  The first guided projection 743b is guided by the rear side claw 734a of the extension claw 734 of the rotary plate 730, and receives a load directed radially inward by this guidance (see FIG. 56).

  The front end adjusting member 744 is a member to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed on the front side, and has a length extending in a linear direction so as to allow insertion of the support projection 743a of the second long member 743. A pair of guide elongated holes 744a bored in a hole shape, and a second guided projection 744b projecting in a cylindrical shape from the central position in the longitudinal direction toward the back side.

  The tip of the second guided projection 744b is disposed on the front side with respect to the projecting tip of the first guided projection 743b, and is guided by the front side hook 734b of the extending hook 734 of the rotary plate 730, This guide receives a load directed radially inward (see FIG. 57).

  In the second guided projection 744b, the shape of the tip of the projection is not circular, and the rotation plate 730 having the rotation center on the transmitted projection 741a side inclines as the rotary plate 730 is rotationally displaced in the counterclockwise direction in rear view The surface on the side facing the surface 734c (see FIG. 57) (the surface on the left side of FIG. 59 (b)) is provided with an inclined surface in a chamfered manner.

  By this inclined surface, even when the arrangement of the telescopic displacing member 740 is slightly deviated in the front-rear direction, the resistance at the time of contact with the extending claw portion 734 of the rotary plate 730 is prevented from becoming excessive. Can.

  As shown in FIGS. 58 (b) and 59 (b), in the case where the telescopic displacement members 740 are collectively arranged and separated, they are disposed at the tip of the second elongated member 743 of the telescopic displacement member 740. The support protrusions 743 a are disposed at both outer ends or inner ends of the guide elongated hole 744 a of the tip adjustment member 744. Thereby, the arrangement (longitudinal arrangement) of the tip end adjustment member 744 with respect to the pair of support projections 743a can be stabilized.

  The shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the tip end adjustment member 744, extended to the front side with the fastening portion as an end, and to the side covering the telescopic displacement member 740 as it extends from the extended tip to the front side It is a member in a front view substantially triangular shape having a shape portion extending in an inclined manner and extending in parallel with a plane (a front layer plane or a rear layer plane) on which the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced from the extended tip is there.

  The shielding design member 760 is configured such that a colored (red in this embodiment) reflective sheet is attached to the front and back to shield the decorative member 752 on the back side unnoticeably, and the right end is along the back of the member. In the aspect in which the plate surface is formed, an extending plate portion 761 is provided extending in a plate shape to the right.

  Similarly to the main body of the shielding design member 760, a colored (red in this embodiment) reflective sheet is attached to the front and back of the extension plate 761 and the shielding is disposed adjacent to the right in the front view (clockwise). The shield design member 760 is disposed to face the rear surface side of the left end portion of the design member 760, and the shield design member 760 abuts against the rear surface side when it is displaced, and the displacement can be suppressed.

  The arrangement of the extension plate portion 761 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front of the plate may be disposed on the back side of the back of the main body of the shielding design member 760. In this case, when the plurality of shielding design members 760 are displaced to the collective arrangement position, the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extending plate portion 761 are the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740 It is possible to avoid contact (collision) along the

  This effect becomes remarkable as the arrangement of the extended plate portion 761 is separated from the main body portion of the shielding design member 760, but at least a dimension which is permitted to the shielding design member 760 as positional deviation of the shielding design member 760 in the front and rear direction. By arranging the extended plate portion 761 separately, the extended plate portion 761 and the main body portion of the shield design member 760 abut along the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shield design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740. It is possible to avoid (collision).

  Further, the shape of the front surface of the extension plate portion 761 may be formed as an inclined surface, or may be formed as a flat surface which directs the normal in the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, as it is separated from the shielding design member 760, it is configured as an inclined surface that approaches the back side.

  Thereby, for example, the shielding design member 760 is gathered in a state where the shielding design member 760 adjacent to the top shielding design member 760 in the front view right of the top shielding design member 760 is slightly displaced to the back side. Even when displaced to the arrangement (see FIG. 63) position, the position in the front-rear direction of the shielding design member 760 adjacent to the front right along the front inclination of the extended plate portion 761 of the shielding design member 760 at the top. Deviation can be corrected. Thereby, the relative longitudinal position of the adjacent shielding design members 760 can be easily aligned.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), for the second long member 743 of the telescopic displacement member 740 supporting the shielding design member 760, a member supporting the right side portion of the shielding design member 760 is disposed in the rear layer plane. A member supporting the left side portion of the shielding design member 760 is disposed in the front layer plane, and the middle portion of the pair of second long members 743 intersects in a manner to be overlapped in the front and back, so that the left side portion In comparison, the shielding design member 760 is configured to be easily inclined to the position to be disposed forward.

  The configuration of the telescopic displacing member 740 supporting the shielding design member 760 is common to all the five sets, so each shielding design member 760 is common, and the left side is the right side (the side on which the extending plate 761 is formed) It is configured to be easily inclined to the posture to be disposed to the front side in comparison.

  By the inclination of the posture of the shielding design member 760, the extending plate portion 761 can be positioned apart from the back surface side of the shielding design member 760 disposed opposite to the extending plate portion 761 side. In this state, when the shielding design member 760 is displaced to the position of the collective arrangement, the main body of the shielding design member 760 and the extending plate portion 761 move in the displacement direction of the shielding design member 760 or the telescopic displacement member 740 (displacement plane It is possible to avoid contact (collision) along the

  In a state where five sets of shielding design members 760 are collectively arranged (see FIG. 53), the shielding design members 760 are arranged in a circle, and all the shielding design members 760 are adjacent to the left (next to the front view counterclockwise) The extended plate portion 761 of the shielding design member 760 suppresses positional deviation to the back side.

  According to this configuration, when the extended design plate member 760 abuts on the extended design plate member 760 on the right (adjacent to the front view in the clockwise direction), the positional deviation toward the front side is suppressed. Therefore, positional deviation in the front-rear direction can be suppressed with respect to each of the five sets of shielding design members 760 by arranging the five sets of shielding design members 760 to face each other in the front-rear direction.

  The interlocking between the rotary plate 730 and the telescopic displacement member 740 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. 60 and 61 are front views of the functional plate portion 720. FIG. In FIG. 60 and FIG. 61, the guide hole 733 of the rotary plate 730 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and an example of the arrangement of the external shape of the receiving protrusion 741a and the guiding protrusion 741b, 741c, 742a of the extension / displacement member 740 is illustrated. Ru.

  In FIG. 60, the telescopic displacement members 740 are collectively arranged (see FIG. 58), and in FIG. 61, the rotary plate 730 is rotated about 120 degrees counterclockwise in a front view, and the telescopic displacement members 740 are discrete. (See FIG. 59) is illustrated.

  In the present embodiment, the guided protrusions 741b, 741c, 742a are guided along the guide holes 725, and the disposition of the transmitted protrusions 741a disposed in the guide holes 733 with the rotation of the rotary plate 730 is the rotary plate. By displacing in the direction approaching the rotation shaft side of 730, the state of the telescopic displacement member 740 changes.

  In this state change, the guided protrusions 741c and 742a are still maintained on the outer diameter side of the function plate portion 720, so the shielding design member 760 stretches to the outer diameter side based on the positions of the guided protrusions 741c and 742a. It is configured to be displaceable so that it will be described later in detail.

  Referring back to FIGS. 53 and 54, description will be made. The light emitting effect device 750 includes an electric decoration substrate 751 having an opening at a central portion, and a decoration member 752 disposed on the front side of the electric decoration substrate 751 and formed of a light transmitting resin material. An opening is formed at the central portion of the electric decoration substrate 751, and the decoration member 752 is formed in a dome shape projecting to the front side, so that the arrangement area of the drive motor MT3 can be secured.

  In the electric decoration substrate 751, an opening 751a is formed at the central portion. Inside the opening 751a, the drive motor MT3 and the electrical wiring guided through the lower arm member 630 are disposed. The larger the opening 751a, the easier it is to arrange the drive motor MT3 and the electrical wiring, but since the arrangement area of the LED as the light emitting means is limited, the smaller the opening 751a from the viewpoint of the light emission effect desirable.

  Since the LED can not be disposed in the opening 751a, the front side is easily viewed dark. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration of the decorative member 752 is divided into two parts.

  That is, the decorative member 752 is a light transmitting member 752a formed of a colorless and light transmitting resin material, and the light transmitting member 752a is assembled from the front side with a mirror-like visible surface (for example, silver plating is applied) A mirror surface member 752 b).

  An opening is formed at the central portion of the light transmission member 752a, and the mirror member 752b can be disposed at the position where the drive motor MT3 is disposed in front view by closing the central portion. . Thereby, even if there is no light irradiation from the LED from the back side, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the reflected light due to the light irradiation from the other direction (for example, the light irradiation from the hemispherical lighting device 613). The front side portion of the opening 751a can be prevented from being viewed dark.

  The vertical displacement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 will be described. 62 to 64 are front views of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 showing the downward displacement of the effect member 700 in time series. 62 to 64, illustration of the front cover member 610 is omitted to facilitate understanding.

  In FIG. 62, the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is illustrated, and in FIG. 63, the intermediate state where the effect member 700 is lowered from the effect standby state is illustrated. In FIG. It is illustrated.

  In the middle of lowering shown in FIG. 63, the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 is illustrated as being half the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 from the effect standby state to the overhang state. In the present embodiment, the rotation angle of the upper arm member 620 is also half.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the cylindrical protrusion 654 is disposed at the boundary position between the transmission portion 624a of the upper arm member 620 and the margin portion 624b. That is, the state in which the cylindrical protrusion 654 immediately enters the transmission portion 624 a and is disposed at a position where the downward displacement of the effect member 700 can be started is the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600.

  This effect standby state suggests that the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is down-displaced by the effect member including the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) disposed on the pachinko machine 10, for example. The cylindrical protrusion 654 is disposed on the side of the margin portion 624b before the suggestion effect is performed.

  The margin portion 624 b is a shape portion continuously extended from one end of the transmission portion 624 a along the arc centered on the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 650 as described above, and in the state shown in FIG. It is disposed at a position overlapping with 606 in the front-rear direction.

  Therefore, the load applied to the cylindrical protrusion 654 through the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 is directed to the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650 and does not function as a load for rotating the transmission gear 650. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) is energized, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be regulated, whereby it is coupled to the lower arm member 630 coupled to the upper arm member 620. The displacement of the effect member 700 can be restricted.

  In the present embodiment, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in a production standby state in this embodiment, even if the above-mentioned effect that suggests that the effect member 700 is downwardly displaced is not the effect mode in which the effect member 700 is not ultimately displaced. It is controlled to change the state to

  In this case, immediately after the player is notified that the effect member 700 is not displaced downward, the transmission gear 650 rotates in a counterclockwise direction in a front view in order to return the cylindrical protrusion 654 to the margin portion 624b side. The drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) is driven.

  Thereby, when the effect which suggests that the effect member 700 is displaced downward is performed, it can be avoided that the effect of the subsequent effect member 700 is predicted due to the difference in the driving sound of the drive motor MT2. .

  The margin portion 624 b also has a function of reducing the accuracy required for the drive stop position when the drive motor MT2 is rotationally driven in the direction in which the effect member 700 is lifted. That is, in the driving mode for raising the effect member 700, the effect member 700 is already disposed at the displacement end position on the upper end side in the state shown in FIG. 62, and the displacement of the cylindrical projection 654 after this is the margin The displacement is sufficient to slide along 624 b.

  And, no matter where the cylindrical protrusion 654 is disposed, there is no difference in the function of restricting the displacement of the upper arm member 620 regardless of the position of the margin 624b. Therefore, since the setting accuracy of the stop position of the cylindrical protrusion 654 can be lowered, the rotation can be made to immediately stop the transmission gear 650 when the detection plate portion 655 enters the detection sensor 607 (see FIG. 52). Not limited to the speed, the rotational speed of the drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) at the time of raising and displacing the effect member 700 can be set large. Thereby, the rising speed of the effect member 700 can be set large.

  In addition, even if the rising speed is excessive, when the upper arm member 620 abuts on the cylindrical protrusion 654, the load applied to the cylindrical protrusion 654 is directed in the radial direction of the transmission gear 650. Therefore, it does not function to displace the cylindrical protrusion 654 in the rotational direction. Therefore, even if the rising speed is excessive, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be regulated at the position where it abuts on the cylindrical projection 654.

  Furthermore, although the lower arm member 630 is restricted by the upper arm member 620 from rising displacement even if the rising speed is excessive, the details will be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, the change in the lateral distance between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 (the lateral distance between the ends disposed in the guide hole 602 of the main body member 601) As compared to the state during the lowering, the direction from the state during the lowering to the overhanging state is set larger.

  As described above, by increasing the displacement speed between the end portions of the pair of lower arm members 630 in accordance with the downward displacement of the effect member 700, the lower arm member 630 supporting the effect member 700 is strongly displaced in the width direction. To the player, as if the displacement speed of the effect member 700 is rapidly increasing, and the effect of raising and lowering the effect of the effect member 700 is displayed. It can be improved.

  65 to 67 are rear views of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 showing the downward displacement of the effect member 700 in time series. In addition, in FIG. 65, in order to facilitate understanding, FIG. 65 (b) is also described as a drawing in which the main body member 601 and the front cover member 610 are not shown.

  In FIGS. 65A and 65B, the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is illustrated, and in FIG. 66, the intermediate state in which the effect member 700 is lowered from the effect standby state is illustrated, and in FIG. The overhanging state of the scaling unit 600 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 65A, in the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the detection target plate portion 655 of the transmission gear 650 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607. That is, in the present embodiment, the drive motor MT2 is stopped in a state where the detection target plate portion 655 is disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 before the execution of the effect that suggests that the effect member 700 is displaced downward. By the way, the drive motor MT2 is driven and controlled with the execution of the above-mentioned suggestion effect, and the drive motor MT2 is temporarily stopped at a position where it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, It is controlled to change the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 to the production standby state.

  Conversely, when it is determined that the detection plate portion 655 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, the drive motor MT2 is energized when the transmission gear 650 is rotationally driven to the side where the effect member 700 is displaced upward. The transmission gear 650 can be stopped at a position where it slightly enters the margin portion 624 b from the position of the cylindrical protrusion 654 in the effect standby state, as described above. The displacement of the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 can be restricted.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, the drive of the drive motor MT2 is not immediately stopped, but regardless of whether the drive speed is maintained or decelerated. The drive of the drive motor MT2 is controlled to stop after a time delay of a time sufficient for the position of the cylindrical projection 654 to be disposed at the end of the margin portion 624b.

  Thus, the stop position of the transmission gear 650 can be set to a position where the position of the cylindrical protrusion 654 is disposed at the end of the margin portion 624 b. At this position, the cylindrical portion 183 of the displacement restricting device 180 can be inserted into the restricted hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 (see FIG. 21A). Even when the stop position of the transmission gear 650 is slightly deviated, the tapered surface is formed at the end of the cylindrical portion 183 (see FIG. 15C), so the cylindrical portion 183 is easily inserted into the controlled hole 657. can do.

  The position of the regulated hole 657 when the cylindrical portion 183 can be inserted is a position slightly rotationally moved clockwise in a rear view from the state shown in FIG. 65 (a), and the subject shown in FIG. 65 (a) The position is set so as to partially overlap the regulation hole 657.

  Therefore, for example, after the operating member 183 of the displacement restricting device 180 is pushed in the state shown in FIG. 66 or 67 to change the displacement restricting device 180 into the restricted state (see FIG. 15C), the transmission gear 650 is Even if the transmission gear 650 is rotationally controlled in the direction to raise and displace the effect member 700 by drive control, the displacement of the transmission gear 650 is disturbed by the cylindrical portion 183, and the state shown in FIG.

  The MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) determines the displacement failure of the transmission gear 650 by the detected plate portion 655 not entering the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 despite the continued drive of the drive motor MT2. Can.

  Based on this determination, an abnormality can be notified by a method such as displaying an error of the displacement failure of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4). Store clerks may be aware that the displacement control device 180 may remain in a restricted state.

  Thereby, information such as an error display relating to the displacement of the scaling unit 600 can be diverted to transmit information on the state of the displacement regulating device 180 to the store clerk of the gaming machine store. Therefore, it is unnecessary to separately provide a device for detecting the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

  Here, since the stop position of the transmission gear 650 has a margin for the length of the margin portion 624 b of the transmission hole 624, it is possible to set the rotational speed of the transmission gear 650 to a large value. If the rotational speed of the transmission gear 650 at the time of raising and displacing 700 is excessive, the raising speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended by the upper arm member 620 becomes excessive, and the lower arm member 630 There is a possibility of collision.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the direction in which the effect member 700 is displaced toward the effect standby state is set in the opposite direction (upward direction) to the direction of gravity, downward acceleration is always applied to the lower arm member 630 The vertical load at the contact position when the lower arm member 630 collides with the upper arm member 620 can be reduced.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the upper side surface shape of the lower side meat portion 637 of the lower arm member 630 is formed along the lower side surface shape of the upper arm member 620. Can increase the contact area when it collides with the upper arm member 620. Thereby, it can be avoided that a large load is generated locally on the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630, and the occurrence of breakage or breakage of the upper arm member 620 or the lower arm member 630 can be prevented.

  As described above, since the lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to abut on the lower surface of the upper arm member 620 with a sufficiently large contact area, the rotational speed of the transmission gear 650 when displacing the effect member 700 is excessive. Even if the rising speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended by the upper arm member 620 becomes excessive, the lower arm member 620 whose displacement is controlled by the cylindrical projection 654 as described above The upward displacement of the member 630 can be restricted. Thus, the effect member 700 can be prevented from being displaced upward beyond the arrangement in the effect standby state.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 are downwardly displaced from the effect standby state against the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 by the driving force of the drive motor MT2. Corresponding to the

  In the state shown in FIG. 66, the auxiliary projection 712 of the effect member 700 is disposed at an intermediate position of the arc-shaped hole 634 of the lower arm member 630. In the state shown in FIG. 67, the effect member is the same as the state shown in FIG. An auxiliary protrusion 712 of 700 is disposed at the end of the arc-shaped hole 634 of the lower arm member 630.

  As a result, the extent to which the lower arm member 630 holds the effect member 700 (the extent to which the posture is stabilized) can be changed. That is, the extent to which the lower arm member 630 holds the effect member 700 can be made higher in the effect standby state or the overhang state as compared with the state in the middle of the descent.

  In other words, it is possible to easily prevent the attitude change in the direction in which the effect member 700 rotates around the cylindrical protrusion 711. For example, when the auxiliary protrusion 712 is disposed at the middle position of the arc-shaped hole 732 and the displacement in the rotational direction is not restricted (see FIG. 66), the effect member 700 rotates in the rotational direction about the right cylindrical protrusion 711 There is a possibility that the posture changes.

  In the present embodiment, the effect member 700 is supported by the pair of left and right lower arm members 630 at two points including the left cylindrical protrusion 711, but in the direction of rotation about the right cylindrical protrusion 711 The displacement direction of the left cylindrical protrusion 711 when the effect member 700 changes its posture is directed to the short direction of the lower arm member 630, that is, the direction in which the lower arm member 630 is displaced. Therefore, the change in the attitude of the effect member 700 may be visibly generated without being restricted by the lower arm member 630, which may give the player an uncomfortable feeling.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the overhang state, the displacement direction of the left cylindrical protrusion 711 in the case where the posture of the effect member 700 changes in the direction rotating about the right cylindrical protrusion 711 is lower. Lower arm member 630 is arranged along the longitudinal direction of arm member 630. Thereby, the change in posture of the effect member 700 can be effectively restricted by the lower arm member 630, and the change in posture of the effect member 700 to a distinguishable degree can be prevented.

  In addition, since the pair of auxiliary projections 712 arranged on the right side is arranged at the end position of the arc-shaped hole 732 in the overhang state, the contact between the auxiliary projection 712 and the arc-shaped hole 732 It is possible to prevent the attitude change of the effect member 700 in the clockwise direction in rear view centering on the cylindrical protrusion 711 of Note that, as described above, the posture change in the counterclockwise direction in the rear view is limited by the displacement direction of the cylindrical protrusion 711 on the left side along the longitudinal direction of the lower arm member 630 on the left side.

  Similarly, since the pair of auxiliary projections 712 arranged on the left side is arranged at the end position of the arc-shaped hole 732 in the overhang state, the left side is brought into contact with the auxiliary projection 712 and the arc-shaped hole 732 It is possible to prevent the attitude change of the effect member 700 in the counterclockwise direction in rear view centering on the cylindrical protrusion 711 of The change in posture in the clockwise direction in the rear view is limited by the displacement direction of the cylindrical protrusion 711 on the right side along the longitudinal direction of the lower arm member 630 on the right side as described above.

  Further, the auxiliary projection 712 not only changes the posture of the effect member 700 in the rotational direction (rotational direction about the axis extending in the front-rear direction) but also in the tilting direction (rotational direction about the axis extending in the left-right direction). It also functions to suppress posture change and posture change in the swing direction (rotation direction around an axis extending in the vertical direction).

  For example, the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 are not connected only by the pair of left and right cylindrical protrusions 711, but the auxiliary protrusion 712 disposed on the upper side of the cylindrical protrusion 711 or the cylindrical protrusion 711 Since the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 can be connected at the upper and lower three positions by being connected also by the auxiliary protrusions 712 disposed at the lower left and right outer sides, the posture change of the effect member 700 in the tilting direction It can be suppressed.

  In addition, the auxiliary projection 712 disposed on the upper side of the cylindrical projection 711 is disposed in the middle of the long main body of the lower arm member 630 (at the root side of the arc-shaped hole 634). The load produced by the change in orientation can be tolerated by the elongated body portion of the lower arm member 630.

  Furthermore, the pressing member PC1 is disposed on the long main body of the lower arm member 630 as described above (see FIGS. 64 and 67), and the lower portion is lowered by the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 via the pressing member PC1. The longitudinal displacement of the arm member 630 is restricted.

  As described above, when the load due to the posture change of the effect member 700 is applied to the long main body of the lower arm member 630 and the lower arm member 630 receives the load in the bending direction along the long direction, It is possible to firmly prevent the attitude change of the effect member 700 by utilizing the configuration for restricting the displacement.

  Moreover, the connection position of the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 can be increased by the auxiliary protrusion 712 arrange | positioned on the left-right outer side (downward) of the cylindrical protrusion 711 as mentioned above, and the effect member 700 is lower. It is possible to suppress an attitude change in the swing direction with respect to the arm member 630.

  In the present embodiment, the connection position of the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 is disposed on a horizontal surface passing through the upper and lower centers of the plate-like main body 710 of the effect member 700. In the present embodiment, the center of gravity of the effect member 700 is disposed on the same horizontal surface.

  This makes it possible to minimize the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the attitude of the rendering member 700 changes in a manner in which the effect member 700 tilts forward about the connecting portion with the lower arm member 630. It is possible to minimize the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the attitude of the effect member 700 changes in a manner in which the effect member 700 tilts backward around the connecting portion.

  That is, even if there is a possibility that a plurality of types of posture changes may occur in the effect member 700, it is possible to suppress the longitudinal displacement of the effect member 700 even when any of the plurality of posture changes occurs. Since it can, it can respond to any posture change.

  As a result, even when the fore-and-aft distance between the effect member 700 and the dividing member 310 (see FIG. 13A) is narrowed, the effect member 700 rubs against or collides with the dividing member 310. Since this can be avoided, damage to the effect member 700, deterioration of the design portion, and deterioration in visibility (reduction in transparency) due to damage or abrasion of the dividing member 310 can be prevented.

  In the state where the effect member 700 is disposed at the lower end position, the transmission gear 650 abuts on the shape portion of the main body member 601 in the rotational direction, and the further rotation is restricted. Therefore, even if the drive motor MT2 continues to be driven, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 from being displaced excessively only by accumulating the driving force in the transmission gear 650.

  In the present embodiment, in the overhanging state shown in FIG. 67, the driving force of a level slightly exceeding the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 is continuously applied continuously to prevent the rendering member 700 from being rebounded and displaced to the rising side. I have control.

  As a result, it is possible to stably stop the effect member 700 at the lower end position while setting the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 to a large value (for example, a size that allows the effect member 700 to be lifted).

  On the other hand, when the effect member 700 is started to be displaced upward, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3 can be used, so that generation of an excessive load on the drive motor MT2 can be avoided.

  For example, in the case of starting upward displacement, after releasing the driving force for stably arranging the effect member 700 at the lower end position, the effect member 700 starts to ascend and move due to the biasing force of the torsion spring SP3. By generating the drive force of the drive motor MT2 after waiting (by providing a waiting time until the drive start of the drive motor MT2), the drive force can be applied to the effect member 700 after the start of the displacement.

  Thereby, the load on the drive motor MT2 can be reduced as compared with the case where the effect member 700 in the stopped state is displaced upward.

  In FIGS. 65 to 67, changes in the arrangement of the electrical wiring DK1 passed through the lower arm member 630 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the inner side surface shape of the wiring guide member 714 for guiding the electrical wiring DK1 is illustrated by a hidden line. Be done.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the electrical wiring DK1 passes through the front side of the thin lid portion 636 of the lower arm member 630, passes through the inner diameter side of the arc-shaped hole 634, and is guided to the inside of the wiring guide member 714, It passes through the through hole 713 to the front side.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the tension of the electrical wiring DK1 that may occur due to relative displacement of the lower arm member 630 with respect to the rendering member 700 is offset by the extra length of the electrical wiring DK1 previously disposed inside the wiring guide member 714. I am trying to do it. Thus, the displacement of the electrical wiring DK1 can be completed near the wiring guide member 714, and thus the displacement of the electrical wiring DK1 in the front side of the through hole 713 or in the lower arm member 630 can be suppressed.

  The shape of the inner side surface of the wiring guide member 714 is formed in an arc shape having a center on the electrical wiring DK1 side. Thereby, the load which the electrical wiring DK1 receives from the wiring guide member 714 can be reduced.

  In addition, the shape in which the arc-shaped hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 is formed functions to guide the displacement of the electrical wiring DK1. For example, in the case of raising and displacing the effect member 700 from the extension state (see FIG. 67) of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the shape portion in which the arc-shaped hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 is formed is It is comprised by the arrangement | positioning which can push DK1 to the wiring guide member 714 side.

  Thereby, the electrical wiring DK1 can be stably taken in and out of the wiring guide member 714, and the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be stably generated.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the auxiliary projection 712 disposed in the arc-shaped hole 634 disposed on the front side of the thin lid 636 and largely concealed by the thin lid 636 is in an overhanging state It is disposed at a position visible only in rear view (see FIG. 67).

  The auxiliary projection 712 is a part guided by the arc-shaped hole 634 and a fastening part used to connect the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700. Therefore, in order to assemble (or disassemble) the lower arm member 630 and the rendering member 700, it is necessary to screw in (or remove) the fastening screw from the auxiliary projection 712.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the state in which the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 are assembled (or the state in which it is disassembled) can be limited to the overhanging state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. As a result, assembly efficiency and maintenance efficiency can be improved. Moreover, as a result of performing an assembly and a maintenance in the state arrange | positioned in the halfway position of the presentation member 700, it can prevent that the situation which gives damage to the presentation member 700 or another structural member generate | occur | produces.

  Next, displacement (magnification displacement) associated with a change in the state of the telescopic displacement member 740 of the effect member 700 will be described. In the present embodiment, the degree of the scaling displacement of the effect member 700 is controlled so as to be changeable depending on the arrangement of the effect member 700.

  FIG. 68 is a front view of the scaling unit 600, and FIG. 69 is a rear view of the scaling unit 600. In FIGS. 68 and 69, the front cover member 610 is omitted to facilitate understanding.

  In FIG. 68 and FIG. 69, the state during the lowering of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 68 and FIG. 69, in the middle of the downward movement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the effect member 700 is not controlled to be enlarged and displaced until the telescopic displacement member 740 is separated at the maximum diameter. It is controlled to allow the expansion displacement.

  In other words, the rotation angle of the rotary plate 730 is limited by shortening the drive time of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53). Therefore, the size of the effect member 700 in the front view can be prevented from becoming excessive, and the amount of posture change allowed for the effect member 700 from the viewpoint of avoiding contact with the dividing member 310 (see FIG. 22) Can be increased.

  At an intermediate position of the expansion displacement of the effect member 700, the decoration member 752 is partially covered by the shielding design member 760 (the outer diameter side portion is covered). As the arrangement of the decorative member 752 in the front view, the light transmitting member 752a is arranged at a position (clearance position) not covered by the effect member 700, and the mirror surface member 752b including the position covered by the effect member 700 752a is disposed at a position other than the position at which it is viewed.

  Thereby, the visibility of light irradiated from the LED or the like disposed on the electric decoration substrate 751 (see FIG. 53) through the light transmitting member 752a can be improved, and the light transmitting member 752a is transmitted to be shielded. By reflecting the light reflected on the back side of the member 760 by the mirror member 752 b, the effect of the mirror member 752 b can be improved.

  For example, as an effect aspect of the mirror surface member 752b, when the light of the LED of the electric decoration substrate 751 (see FIG. 53) is not irradiated, the ground color of the shielding design member 760 on the mirror surface member 752b (red in this embodiment) Can be reflected to make the player visually recognize.

  On the other hand, when light is emitted from the LED of the electric decoration substrate 751, the color reflected and recognized from the mirror surface member 752b is a mixture of the ground color of the shielding design member 760 and the light emitted from the LED. The color can be Therefore, the appearance of the mirror member 752 b can be changed by the light passing through the portion other than the mirror member 752 (for example, the light transmitting member 752 a).

  The control mode is not limited at all. For example, after stopping shielding design member 760 in the state shown in FIG. 68, control may be performed to return to the collective arrangement state, or from the state shown in FIG. 68, the driving direction of drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53) The shielding design member 760 may be controlled to vibrate in the radial direction by switching between forward and reverse.

  When controlling the shielding design member 760 to vibrate, the displacement of the shielding design member 760 can be further complicated. In this embodiment, the position of the support protrusion 743a disposed at the tip of the second long member 743 of the telescopic displacement member 740 is the tip adjustment member as shown in FIG. An intermediate position of the guide elongated hole 744a of 744 is set. Thereby, since the tip end adjustment member 744 can be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the guide long hole 744a, the shielding design member 760 can be displaced not only in the radial direction but also in the circumferential direction.

  In the case where the shielding design members 760 are collectively arranged or when the displacement is maximally displaced in the radial direction while achieving such a displacement, the support projection 743 a disposed at the tip of the second long member 743 Is arranged at both ends of the guide long hole 744a of the tip end adjustment member 744, the circumferential arrangement of the shielding design member 760 can be restored (see FIGS. 58 (b) and 59 (b)). ).

  Further, the halfway position permitted as the enlarged displacement of the effect member 700 is not limited to the position shown in FIG. 69, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be a position slightly deviated from the collective arrangement state, or a position slightly before the position where the maximum displacement occurs.

  Here, the extended plate is in a state of being enlarged and displaced to a position slightly deviated from the collective arrangement state (for example, a position where the extended plate portion 761 is viewed overlapping with the shielding design member 760 oppositely disposed in front view) Since the portion 761 plays the role of filling the gap between the shielding design members 760, the player can be made to visually recognize that the group arrangement state is maintained.

  In the present embodiment, the red reflective sheet is attached to the extending plate portion 761 in the same manner as the main body portion of the shielding design member 760. Therefore, the red color of the extending plate portion 761 is visually recognized in the gap between the shielding design members 760. Even in this case, it can be difficult to determine whether the red color is the color of the extending plate portion 761 or the color of the shielding design member 760.

  Unlike the present embodiment, in a state in which the effect member 700 is enlarged and displaced to a position slightly deviated from the collective arrangement state by means such as painting the extended plate portion 761 with another color (for example, gold). The extended plate portion 761 visually recognized in the gap between the shielding design members 760 may be made to stand out.

  Although the case where the light transmitting member 752a is formed of a colorless and light transmitting resin material has been described in the present embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be formed of a red resin material.

  In this case, even when the shielding design member 760 is displaced beyond the overlap with the extending plate portion 761 from the collective arrangement state, the light transmitting member 752 a visually recognized in the gap between the shielding design members 760 is shielded. As in the case of the design member 760, it is viewed in red, so that it is possible for the player to visually recognize the shielded design members 760 as if they were at least partially connected.

  On the other hand, when light is emitted from the LED of the electric decoration substrate 751 (see FIG. 53), the light transmitting member 752a visually recognized in the gap between the shielding design members 760 can be made to emit light and be made noticeable. It is possible to improve the effect of

  FIG. 70 is a front view of the scaling unit 600, and FIG. 71 is a rear view of the scaling unit 600. In FIGS. 70 and 71, the front cover member 610 is omitted to facilitate understanding.

  In FIGS. 70 and 71, the extended state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the enlarged state of the effect member 700 are illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, in a state in which the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in an extended state, the effect member 700 is controlled so as to be capable of enlargement and displacement until the telescopic displacement member 740 is separated at the maximum diameter.

  Therefore, the size of the effect member 700 in a front view is maximized, and the amount of change in posture allowed for the effect member 700 is minimized in terms of avoiding contact with the dividing member 310 (see FIG. 22). In addition, the device which suppresses the attitude | position change of the effect member 700 is as above-mentioned.

  In the enlarged state of the effect member 700, the shielding design member 760 is disposed to retract from the decorative member 752 in a front view. Therefore, when light is emitted from the LED of the electric decoration substrate 751 (see FIG. 53), the aspect reflected in the mirror surface member 752b can be changed from the case where the effect member 700 is disposed at the middle position of the enlargement displacement.

  That is, reflection of the ground color of the shielding design member 760 can be suppressed, and the ground color (silver in the present embodiment) of the mirror surface member 752 b can be easily recognized by the player. Therefore, when the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced and the shielding design member 760 is expanded and displaced, the decorative member 752 is visually recognized even in the control mode in which the light of the same color is continuously emitted from the LED of the electric decoration substrate 751 (see FIG. 53). It is possible to change in time series the color tone of light to be made visible to the player who is playing the game.

  More specifically, for example, in the case of irradiating white light from the electric decoration substrate 751, while the ground color (red) of the shielding design member 760 is visually recognized near the start of the expansion, the shielding design member is accompanied by the expansion displacement. The color of the character 760 weakens (the range narrows), and the ground color (silver) of the mirror member 752b is easily visible at the end position of the expansion displacement. As a result, it is possible to change the color of the light visually recognized by the player without changing the light emission color.

  In this embodiment, it is not a control mode in which the enlargement displacement shown in FIGS. 68 and 69 and the enlargement displacement shown in FIGS. 70 and 71 occur continuously, but with the upper and lower positions of the effect member 700 fixed. , Is controlled to execute the expansion displacement of the effect member 700.

  That is, the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 is controlled to be executable only in a state where the effect members 700 are collectively arranged. Thereby, the shielding design member 760 can be prevented from colliding with other structural members such as the hemispherical front device 613 (see FIG. 47).

  In addition, after considering the avoidance of a collision with another structural member or being configured so that a problem in displacement does not occur due to a collision with another structural member, the enlarged displacement in the middle of the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 You may control as much as possible.

  The radial contraction displacement of the shielding design member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. FIG. 72 (a), 72 (b), 73, 74 (a) and 75 (a) are back views of the effect member 700 showing the reduction displacement of the effect member 700 in time series. 74 (b) is a top view of the effect member 700 in the direction of arrow LXXIVb in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is the upper surface of the effect member 700 in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. FIG.

  72 (a), 72 (b), 73, 74 (a) and 75 (a), illustration of the plate-like main body 710 is omitted to facilitate understanding, and reference is made to FIG. It is illustrated that the rotating plate 730 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the rear. In FIGS. 74 (b) and 75 (b), further, the illustration of the rotary plate 730b is omitted.

  FIG. 72 (a) shows a state in which the shielding design member 760 of the effect member 700 is separated at the maximum diameter (see FIGS. 70 and 71), and FIG. 72 (b) shows the shielding design member 760 of the effect member 700. The state (refer FIG.68 and FIG.69) which expanded and displaced to the middle position is illustrated.

  In the state shown in FIG. 72 (a), the receiving projection 741a of the telescopic displacement member 740 is arranged at the boundary position between the small diameter arc portion 733a of the rotary plate 730 and the connecting portion 733c, and in the state shown in FIG. The receiving projection 741 a of the telescopic displacing member 740 is disposed at an intermediate position of the connecting portion 733 c of the rotary plate 730.

  FIG. 73 shows a state in which the first guided projection 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740 arranged on the lower side starts to abut on the rear side claw portion 734a of the rotary plate 730, and in FIG. 74, arranged on the lower side. The first guided projection 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740 is guided by the rear claw 734a of the rotary plate 730 and reaches a position immediately before the collective arrangement state.

  By the effect of gravity being different between the member disposed on the upper side and the member disposed on the lower side, displacement modes of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are disposed on the lower side and the member disposed on the upper side. It differs depending on the member.

  As shown in FIG. 73, in a state in which the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 disposed on the upper side are disposed close to the rotary plate 730 side by their own weight, the telescopic displacement member 740 disposed on the lower side rotates by its own weight. Since it acts in the direction away from the plate 730, it hangs down in the direction away from the rotary plate 730 to the extent that it is permitted in the gap between the guide hole 733 and the receiving protrusion 741a.

  The drooping portion is lifted by the load from the extending claw portion 734 of the rotary plate 730, and the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 reach the position of the collective arrangement state. Therefore, the timing at which the shielding design members 760 reach the collective arrangement state is not five at the same time, but at least the upper three are faster than the lower two.

  Thereby, it is possible to stably carry out the displacement of the effect member 700 to the collective arrangement state. That is, when the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first, the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 vigorously reach the collective arrangement state and the lower telescopic displacement member When it collides with 740 and the shielding design member 760, fatigue may accumulate in the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, which may cause an early failure.

  On the other hand, when the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are first disposed as in the present embodiment, and then the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged in a collective arrangement state. Since the self weight is generated in the direction opposed to the displacement of the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, the force of colliding with the upper telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 can be suppressed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the accumulation of fatigue due to the collision of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760.

  In FIG. 74, the receiving protrusion 741a of the telescopic displacing member 740 is disposed at the boundary position between the large diameter arc portion 733b of the rotary plate 730 and the connecting portion 733c. Immediately after this, the telescopic displacing members 740 are pushed by the rear-side claws 734 a and cut off, and are brought into a collective arrangement state. On the other hand, the second guided projection 744b of the tip end adjustment member 744 is disposed apart from the front side claw portion 734b.

  In FIG. 75, a collective arrangement state of the effect members 700 is illustrated. That is, the state where the rotary plate 730 is rotated counterclockwise in a rear view is illustrated until the end position where the columnar projection 728 of the functional plate portion 720 is disposed at the end of the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotary plate 730.

  FIG. 76 is a cross-sectional view of the effect member 700 taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. As shown in FIG. 76, in the collective arrangement state of the effect members 700, the surface on the central axis side of the rear side claw portion 734a abuts on the first guided protrusion 743b of the telescopic displacement member 740, and the diameter of the telescopic displacement member 740 The outward displacement is restricted.

  In addition, the surface on the central axis side of the front side claw portion 734b abuts on the second guided projection 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740, so that the radial displacement of the telescopic displacement member 740 is restricted. At this time, the second guided protrusion 744b and the first guided protrusion 743b abut against each other in the radial direction with the front-rear width in the protruding direction, whereby the arrangement of the second long member 743 and the tip adjustment member 744 and The attitude can be stabilized.

  Furthermore, the front surface of the tip end adjustment member 744 is configured to be slidable on the back surface of the extending plate portion 726. In the process of this sliding, the protruding end of the second guided projection 744b of the telescopic displacement member 740 abuts against the inclined surface 734c of the rotary plate 730 in the front-rear direction, and the inclined surface 734c is inclined in the rotational direction (Because it is inclined in a manner of projecting toward the front side as it gets closer to the group arrangement state), it is possible to apply a load on the front side to the second guided protrusion 744b by the inclined surface 734c.

  Thus, in the configuration in which the tip end adjustment member 744 is sandwiched between the extending plate portion 726 of the function plate portion 720 and the inclined surface 734c of the rotation plate 730, the tip of the rotation member 730 rotates and the presentation member 700 approaches the collective arrangement state. In a mode in which the adjusting member 744 is gradually brought into close contact with the extending plate portion 726, the tip end adjusting member 744 can be displaced toward the front side.

  Therefore, while preventing the resistance generated by the rotation of the rotary plate 730 from being excessively increased, the tip adjustment member 744 is given a load gradually pinching in the back and forth direction, and the position and posture of the tip adjustment member 744 in the back and forth direction As a result, the front-rear direction position and posture of the shielding design member 760 can be stabilized, and the shielding design member 760 can be closely arranged without gaps in the collective arrangement state.

  With reference to FIGS. 74 (b) and 75 (b), it will be described that the posture inclination of the shielding design member 760 can be corrected by the load applied to the second guided projection 744b. The configuration of the shielding design member 760 is common to all, and the configuration of the telescopic displacing member 740 for displacing the shielding design member 760 is also common.

  As described above, the shield design member 760 is formed on the side on which the extending plate portion 761 (see FIG. 59A) is formed in the width direction (in the case of the shield design member 760 disposed at the top), FIG. (B) (refer to (b)) is configured to be inclined easily so that it is disposed on the rear side as compared to the opposite side.

  This originates in the formation mode of the 2nd long member 743, and this posture inclination arises in the tip adjustment member 744 to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed similarly. Due to the inclination of the attitude of the leading end adjustment member 744, the leading end position of the second guided projection 744b is a back surface as compared to the leading end position of the first guided projection 743b (the projecting direction is along the front and rear direction). It is easy to be misaligned on the side in the clockwise direction (on the left side in the case of the shielding design member 760 disposed at the top, see FIG. 74 (b)).

  On the other hand, in the rotary plate 730, the extending claw portion 734 is disposed opposite to the second guided protrusion 744b in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear side, and is opposite to the second guided protrusion 744b in the counterclockwise direction. Rotary displacement is possible to apply a load.

  That is, for example, when the inner diameter side surface of the front side claw portion 734b and the front side surface (see FIGS. 56 and 57) of the inclined surface 734c abut on the second guided protrusion 744b, the second guided protrusion 744b Since the tip position can be returned to the counterclockwise direction in the rear view, the inclination degree of the attitude of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be relaxed (the inclination can be eliminated). Thereby, the posture inclination of the shielding design member 760 at the position of the collective arrangement of the effect members 700 can be easily eliminated.

  The load on the second guided protrusion 744b is configured to occur from the state shown in FIG. 74 to the state shown in FIG. Therefore, in the process of changing the state of the effect member 700 shown in time series from FIG. 72 to FIG. 75, until the shielding design member 760 is disposed at the small diameter side end (reduction side end) of the displacement allowable range (see FIG. 74) The posture inclination of the tip end adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is maintained, and thereafter, the posture change can be generated such that the posture inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is eliminated (corrected).

  That is, by maintaining the inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 while the shielding design members 760 approach each other, the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 is in contact with the extended plate portion 761 (collision ) Can be easily avoided, but after the approach of the shielding design members 760 is completed, the shielding design member is eliminated (corrected) by correcting the posture inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760. The plate portions disposed at the forefront of the surface 760 can be arranged flush, and the sense of unity of the shielding design member 760 in the collective arrangement state can be easily rendered.

  The state shown in FIG. 74 (b) is illustrated as a state in which the positional deviation of the shielding design member 760 is maximally generated. Further, the posture deviation on the opposite side of the posture deviation in FIG. 74 (b) is configured to be less likely to occur from the front-rear arrangement configuration of the second long members 743. Thereby, it can be made easy to avoid that the extension plate part 761 collides with the main-body part of the shielding design member 760 arrange | positioned facing.

  Further, the auxiliary projection 727 (see FIG. 54) disposed on the opposite side of the extension plate portion 726 is configured to be able to abut on the reduced side wall portion in the enlargement / reduction displacement of the tip adjustment member 744. Since the auxiliary projections 727 are formed as a pair on the left and right sides of the extending plate portion 726, by contacting the left and right ends of the tip adjustment member 744 that has reached the reduced side end of the displacement range, the tip adjustment member 744 Posture deviation can be corrected.

  Thus, not only is the attitude corrected by engagement with another shielding design member 760, but stabilization of the attitude when reaching the reduced side end of the displacement range is achieved with a single piece of the tip adjustment member 744. it can.

  Referring back to FIG. 5 and FIG. In the present embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described launch effect unit 300, the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and the displacement rotation unit 800 are disposed as effect devices for boosting the game. Next, the displacement rotation unit 800 will be described.

  The displacement rotation unit 800 has a pair of units arranged in left-right symmetry and is configured to be symmetrical to each other. Therefore, in the following, the configuration of the left-side displacement rotation unit 800 will be described. I omit it. In the following description, FIG. 5 will be referred to as appropriate.

  FIG. 77 is a front perspective view of displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 78 is a rear perspective view of displacement rotation unit 800. 77 and 78, the effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800 is illustrated.

  FIG. 79 is a front exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 80 is a rear exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. In FIGS. 79 and 80, the lateral slide member 840 is shown in the assembled state.

  79. As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the displacement rotation unit 800 includes a base plate 810 fixed to the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510 and a metal fixed to the base 810 by a member such as a screw. The rod MB2 and the metal rod MB2 are inserted, and the vertical slide member 820 configured to be slidably displaceable in the vertical direction, and the drive fixed to the back side of the vertical slide member 820 and fixed to the base plate 810 The transmission member 830 configured to transmit the driving force of the motor MT4, the metal rod MB3 fixed to the vertical slide member 820 by a member such as a screw, and the metal rod MB3 are inserted and configured to be slidable in the lateral direction. In accordance with the vertical slide member 840 and the vertical slide member 820 displaced in the vertical direction, the driving force of the drive motor MT4 is transferred horizontally via the vertical slide member 820. Transmission means 860 configured to be transmittable to the ride member 840, a wiring arm member 870 fastened and fixed rotatably fixed to the vertical slide member 820 at the metal rod MB2 side upper end position of the vertical slide member 820, and the wiring arm member 870 and a wiring guide member 880 for guiding the electrical wiring.

  The base plate portion 810 includes a pair of both end fixing portions 811 in which the metal rod MB2 is disposed, a slide guide portion 812 formed so as to be able to guide the transmission member 830 disposed on the front side, A transmission guide 813 formed in a groove shape and capable of guiding the cylindrical protrusion 862b of the transmission means 860, a drive motor MT4 fastened and fixed on the back side, and a rack member 862 guided by the transmission guide 813 And an anti-falling plate 814 disposed on the back side in order to prevent the falling of the frame.

  The vertical slide member 820 includes a flat plate portion 821, a wall portion 822 extending from the edge of the flat plate portion 821 to the back side, and a circle from a substantially central position of a region surrounded by the wall portion 822 to the back side. At the left end portion of the flat plate portion 821, a columnar protrusion 823 projecting in a columnar shape, abbreviated portions 824 a and 824 b whose formation of the wall portion is omitted so as to allow insertion of the connector portion of the electrical wiring A pair of upper and lower metal rod insertion portions 825 formed in a cylindrical shape (or a cylindrical member is disposed) through which the metal rod MB2 can be inserted, and the metal rod MB3 can be generally inserted in the upper and lower center portions of the flat plate portion 821 Of the left and right metal rod insertion portions 826 formed in the (or cylindrical members disposed) and the flat plate portion 821 in the vicinity of the end of the metal rod insertion portions 826 to prevent the metal rod MB3 from falling off Dropout prevention member 82 configured as possible And a support portion 828 formed in a pillar shape on the back side of the flat plate portion 821 and capable of supporting the two-stage pinion 861 rotatably, and a cylinder from the upper end to the left and right in the horizontal direction (left in FIG. 79) And a support protrusion 829 protruding in a shape of a circle.

  The wall portion 822 constitutes a region inside which electrical wiring disposed between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced, and is a portion for securing the durability of the electrical wiring. The omitted portions 824a and 824b formed as discontinuous portions of the wall portion 822 are formed of a first omitted portion 824a which is opened and a second omitted portion 824b which is formed as a recess which is opened on the back side.

  The upper end portion of the metal rod insertion portion 825 is extended in a plate shape on the back side at the upper side portion thereof, and the upper detection sensor SC8 and the lower detection are fastened and fixed to the base member 810 in a posture to direct the detection groove to the front side of the base member 810 A detection target plate portion 825a configured to be arrangeable in the detection groove of the sensor SC9 is provided.

  The transmission member 830 is a main body portion 831 formed in a plate shape elongated in the vertical direction, and a female screw formed at the tip portion of the cylindrical projection 823 of the vertical slide member 820 at the upper side portion of the main body portion 831. Through-hole 832 formed so as to allow insertion of a screw that can be screwed into the hole, and a plate portion in which the through-hole 832 is drilled, in the region constituted by the wall portion 822 of the vertical slide member 820 A lid-shaped portion 833 that covers from the side, and a linear gear portion 834 in which gear teeth are linearly formed in the vertical direction on the left side surface of the main body portion 831.

  The cylindrical protrusion 823 has a role as a portion into which the fastening screw inserted into the above-mentioned insertion hole 832 is screwed in and a role as a winding center of the electric wiring as described later.

  The linear gear portion 834 meshes with the drive gear MG4 of the drive motor MT4. That is, as the drive motor MT4 is rotationally driven and controlled, the transmission member 830 is vertically moved up and down. Thereby, the vertical slide member 820 is vertically displaced.

  FIG. 81 is an exploded front perspective view of the lateral slide member 840, and FIG. 82 is an exploded back perspective view of the lateral slide member 840. As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the horizontal slide member 840 is formed in a substantially circular plate shape, the main plate member 841 into which the metal rod MB3 is inserted and whose displacement is limited in the left-right direction, and the back surface of the main plate 841. A wiring guide member 844 fastened and fixed on the upper side and constituting a guide path for electrical wiring, a circular member 847 disposed on the front side of the main body plate member 841 and formed in a plate shape of a front view circular, and the circular member 847 And an electric decorative substrate 850 disposed between the main body plate member 841, an annular decorative member 853 fastened and fixed to the front side of the circular member 847, and a circular member 847 via a cylindrical collar member C8. And an intermediary member 857 fitted from the front side to the opening of the wing-like member 854 in order to match the central opening diameter of the wing-like member 854 with the opening diameter of the collar member C8. Comprises a central design member 858 columnar member can be inserted through the outer diameter to the center opening of the intermediary member 857 is projected from the rear side.

  In the main body plate member 841, the drive motor MT 5 is fastened and fixed on the back side, the drive gear MG 5 is disposed on the front side, and the rod arranging portion 842 in which the metal rod MB 3 is arranged; And a rack gear portion 843 in which gear teeth are engraved along the left-right direction.

  The wiring guide member 844 is a member for guiding the lateral displacement of the electrical wiring, and is formed in a shape that bypasses the electrical wiring. Although this can prevent the electrical wiring from rubbing with other components, the details will be described later.

  The circular member 847 is formed of a light transmitting resin material, and is configured in such a manner that a wing-like member 854 and the drive gear MG5, which are formed to be able to mesh with each other, are assembled from different directions.

  The circular member 847 has a receiving portion 848 recessed toward the back side in a cup shape large enough to receive the wing-like member 854, and cylindrically protruding from the central portion of the receiving portion 848 to the front side And a cylindrical protrusion 849.

  The receiving portion 848 has a through hole 848a formed in such a manner that a shape overlapping with a cylinder centered on the drive shaft of the drive motor MT5 is cut away, and the gear portion 855 of the winged member 854 passes through the through hole 848a. Expose to a position where it can be viewed in rear view.

  As described above, the exposed portion of the gear portion 855 can mesh with the drive gear MG5, and with the rotation of the drive motor MT5, the drive force is transmitted, and the winged member 854 is controlled to rotate. The rotational drive of the winged member 854 is possible regardless of the state of the displacement rotation unit 800. That is, the shape of the wall portion 882a of the path forming member 882 is designed so as to be possible also in the effect standby state.

  The cylindrical protrusion 849 has a linear notch 849a formed at the tip. This is a shape portion for facilitating the attitude maintenance of the central design member 858 by arranging the radial projection portion 858b of the central design member 858, which will be described in detail later.

  FIG. 83 is a partial cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 taken along line LXXXIII-LXXXIII of FIG. 7. In the description of FIG. 83, FIG. 81 and FIG. 82 will be referred to as appropriate.

  The electric decoration substrate 850 has a circular opening drilled with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847, an irregular opening 851 formed by an elongated opening extending upward, and its irregular shape The front side light emitting means 852a composed of a plurality of LEDs and the like disposed on the front side near the opening 851, and the plurality of LEDs and the like disposed on the back side at the outer diameter end of the electric decoration substrate 850 And a back side light emitting means 852b.

  The deformed opening 851 can arrange the receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847 inside the opening, and the gear portion 855 of the wing-like member 854 is arranged on the back side of the deformed opening 851 in the assembled state.

  The elongated hole portion extending upward of the deformed opening 851 is formed for the purpose of avoiding contact with the rotation shaft of the drive gear MG5. Thus, the drive gear MG5 can be brought close to the electric decoration substrate 850, and the gear portion 855 of the wing-like member 854 and the drive gear MG5 can be easily meshed.

  The front side light emitting means 852a is composed of an LED or the like whose optical axis is directed in the front-rear direction. Thereby, light can be irradiated to the front side along the arrow D8a in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the wing-like member 854.

  The back side light emitting means 852 b is composed of an LED or the like whose optical axis faces radially outward. Thus, light can be emitted toward the outer diameter side of the circular member 847 along the arrow D8b. By reflecting (refracting) this light to the front side by the concavo-convex shape formed on the plate back surface of the circular member 847, the light can be advanced to the front side at a position far from the rotation axis of the wing-like member 854. In the present embodiment, on the back of the plate of the circular member 847, a plurality of long concave and convex shapes formed along a circular arc concentric with the rotation axis of the wing-like member 854 are densely formed. On the other hand, arc-shaped (or circular) light can be viewed in front view.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, the player is not required to arrange the LED or the like whose optical axis is directed in the front-rear direction at the position far from the rotation axis of the winged member 854 on the front side of the electric decoration substrate 850. The position where light is viewed can be shifted in the radial direction. In other words, while using the electric decoration substrate 850 having a diameter smaller than the outermost diameter of the winged member 854, the outer side of the surface on which the electric decoration substrate 850 is formed, that is, the outer diameter than the outermost diameter of the winged member 854 The light can be visually recognized at (see FIG. 14).

  As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of causing light to be visually recognized outside in the radial direction of the wing-like member 854 without increasing the size of the electric decoration substrate 850. In the present embodiment, as described later, when the winged member 854 rotates at high speed, the back side of the winged member 854 becomes a shadow, and it may be difficult to effectively perform the light emission effect in this range . In order to eliminate this, it is considered effective to irradiate light from the outside in the radial direction of the rotation locus of the wing-like member 854, but for that purpose, it is necessary to increase the arrangement area of the LED or the like. In other words, since it is necessary to increase the area of the electric decoration substrate, the manufacturing cost of the substrate is increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while the size of the electric decoration substrate 850 is kept smaller than the rotation trajectory of the wing-like member 854, only the light visual recognition position is radially outward from the rotation trajectory of the wing-like member 854. It can be displaced. This makes it possible to improve the effect of the light emission effect without increasing the manufacturing cost.

  Referring back to FIGS. 81 and 82, description will be made. The decoration member 853 is a member formed of a light impermeable resin material and coaxially fastened and fixed to the front side of the circular member 847. Therefore, the light passing through the circular member 847 is divided by the decoration member 853. Therefore, it is possible to effectively perform the effect of changing the appearance of light between the inside and the outside with the decoration member 853 as a boundary.

  For example, by emitting blue light from the front side light emitting means 852a, by emitting red light from the rear side light emitting means 852b, a region that appears to emit blue light and a region that appears to emit red light Can be clearly separated by the decorative member 853.

  The wing-like member 854 is formed of a light-transmissive resin material, and is extended radially outward at equal intervals in the circumferential direction about a circular opening 854a drilled in the front-rear direction at the central portion and the circular opening 854a. The plurality of blade portions 854b, the gear portion 855 formed in a gear shape coaxial with the circular opening 854a on the back surface side, and the plurality of recessed portions 856 recessed on the back surface side between the adjacent blade portions 854b. And.

  The circular opening 854a is formed to have a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the collar member C8.

  The winged member 854 is configured to be rotatable via the drive gear MG5 which is rotationally driven by the drive motor MT5. However, no detection sensor for detecting the posture of the winged member 854 is provided, and the drive motor MT5 is not provided. The posture of the wing-like member 854 is managed by the long and short driving time of the In this configuration, the winged member 854 is configured such that the rotation axis coincides with the position of the center of gravity, thereby minimizing idle rotation after deenergization of the drive motor MT5. It is possible to reduce the deviation between the posture of the wing-like member 854 assumed by the driving time of the above and the actual posture of the wing-like member 854. The posture of the winged member 854 may be detected by configuring the drive motor MT5 with a stepping motor.

  The intermediate member 857 is formed to be fittable to the front opening of the circular opening 854a, and the inner diameter of the opening 857a is formed slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical projection 849 of the circular member 847. Thereby, the intermediary member 857 can be made rotatable around the cylindrical projection 849.

  The central design member 858 includes a central protrusion 858a projecting in a cylindrical shape from the central portion to the back side, a radial projection 858b projecting outward in the radial direction of the central protrusion 858a, and a circular main body And a design projection 858c projecting upward from the above.

  The central projection 858a is a portion inserted into the cylindrical projection 849 in a posture to cause the radial projection 858b to enter the notch 849a, and from the back side of the circular member 847 to the female screw formed at the tip The central design member 858 is fastened and fixed to the circular member 847 by screwing in the fastening screw to be inserted.

  The design ridge portion 858c can function to adjust the rotation mode of the wing-like member 854 by coming into contact with the wing-like member 854 in addition to the function as the design portion. That is, when the rear surface of the design ridge portion 858c and the front surface of the wing-like member 854 are disposed close to each other to such an extent that they rub, stabilization of the stopping posture of the wing-like member 854 is realized Can be

  Thereby, as a drive control mode of the wing-like member 854, a drive mode in which rotation is continued for a long time and a drive mode in which rotation about one rotation is intermittently generated (rathering irregular operation at the start of rotation) In the latter driving mode, the intermittent stopping posture of the wing-like member 854 can be stabilized.

  Referring back to FIGS. 79 and 80, description will be made. The transmission means 860 is engaged with the two-stage pinion 861 rotatably supported by the longitudinal slide member 820 and the small diameter pinion 861 a of the two-stage pinion 861 and supported by the longitudinal slide member 820 slidably displaceable in the left-right direction. A rack member 862 and an anti-falling member 863 for preventing the rack member 862 from coming off the vertical slide member 820.

  The two-stage pinion 861 is formed as a small diameter pinion 861a meshing with the gear teeth of the rack member 862 and a pinion having a longer pitch circle radius than the small diameter pinion 861a, and the gear teeth and teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the horizontal slide member 840 And the large diameter pinion 861b, and the small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b are integrally formed.

  The rack member 862 is formed to be long in the left and right, and has a gear portion 862a formed as a rack gear capable of meshing with the small diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861 and a longitudinal direction opposite to the forming position of the gear portion 862a. And a cylindrical protrusion 862 b protruding in a cylindrical shape from the end to the front side.

  In this embodiment, the gear teeth of the gear portion 862a of the rack member 862 and the gear teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 are constituted by gear teeth of the same shape, and the pitch circle radius of the small diameter pinion 861a The ratio to the pitch circle radius of the large diameter pinion 861 b is designed to be 9:16. Therefore, the ratio of the lateral displacement amount of the rack member 862 to the lateral displacement amount of the horizontal slide member 840 is maintained at 9:16.

  The cylindrical protrusion 862 b is formed with an outer diameter that can be disposed inside the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810. Further, the plate thickness of the rack member 862 on the side where the cylindrical projection 862b is formed prevents the rear end portion of the rack member 862 from falling off when the cylindrical projection 862b is disposed on the transmission guide portion 813 The thickness of the cylindrical projection 862 b is set such that it does not come off from the transmission guide 813 even if it approaches the back side until it abuts the plate 814.

  Thus, the rack member 862 can be prevented from dropping out of the transmission guide 813 when the dropout prevention plate 814 is in the assembled state.

  In this embodiment, since the gear teeth of the gear portion 862a and the gear teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 are formed as gear teeth of the same shape, the small diameter pinion 861a The lateral slide member 840 is displaced in the left-right direction by the displacement amount calculated by multiplying the gear ratio with the diameter pinion 861b.

  Therefore, the amount of displacement of the lateral slide member 840 can be increased as compared to the amount of displacement of the rack member 862. Thereby, the lateral displacement width of the horizontal slide member 840 can be secured large while the lateral width of the transmission guide portion 813 is kept small, but the details will be described later.

  84 is a perspective view of the wiring arm member 870, and FIG. 85 is a perspective view of the path forming member 882 of the wiring guide member 880. In the description of FIGS. 84 and 85, FIGS. 79 and 80 will be appropriately referred to.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the wiring arm member 870 is a long member formed of a resin material, and formed in a long curved shape and having one side opened, and a long main portion 871 thereof. A support hole 872 circularly bored at one end in the longitudinal direction, and a wire arrangement hole 873 disposed close to the support hole 872 and drilled in the same direction so that electrical wiring can be arranged A plurality of claws 874 extending from one wall to the other wall at the open side end of the elongated main body 871 and a resin mold for forming the claws 874 And a circular projecting portion 876 projecting from the vicinity of the other end in the longitudinal direction of the elongated main body portion 871 so as to have a circular cross section in parallel with the axial direction of the support hole 872.

  The long main body portion 871 is a portion where the electric wiring guided to the open side through the wiring arrangement hole 873 is arranged, and the middle portion thereof is provided with a narrowed portion 871a whose width is short. The electrical wiring is disposed along the longitudinal direction of the elongated main body portion 871 and is guided to the outside from the other end in the longitudinal direction (the end opposite to the side on which the support hole 872 is formed).

  The narrowed portion 871a functions as a portion for loosely sandwiching the electrical wiring disposed on the open side of the long main body portion 871 to such an extent that disconnection does not occur, thereby preventing the electrical wiring from being shifted excessively. The narrowed portion 871a can prevent the electrical wiring disposed on the open side of the long main body portion 871 from being displaced beyond the narrowed portion 871a.

  The support hole 872 is formed in such a size that the support projection 829 of the vertical slide member 820 (see FIG. 79) can be inserted, whereby the wiring arm member 870 is rotatably supported by the vertical slide portion 820.

  Wiring arrangement hole 873 is a through hole through which the electric wiring arranged in wiring arm member 870 passes to longitudinal slide member 820. In the present embodiment, since the wiring arrangement hole 873 is arranged close to the support hole 872, the positional deviation amount of the wiring arrangement hole 873 when the wiring arm member 870 rotates can be reduced. Thereby, the load applied to the electrical wiring can be reduced as the wiring arm member 870 rotates.

  The claw portion 874 prevents the electrical wiring disposed in a manner to be accommodated on the open portion side of the long main body portion 871 from falling off the long main body portion 871. In addition, since the space for extracting the resin mold required for the formation of the claw portion 874 is secured by the through hole 875 of the minimum area, the electric wiring is opposite to the open portion side of the long main body portion 871. It can be prevented from coming out from the side (the side where the through holes 875 are formed in the present embodiment).

  The circular projecting portion 876 is formed with an outer diameter and a projecting length which can be disposed in the guiding recess 886 of the wiring guiding portion 880 (see FIG. 79). In the present embodiment, the guide recess 886 of the wiring guide portion 880 is designed from the viewpoint of appropriately causing the displacement of the wiring arm member 870.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the wiring guide member 880 forms an internal path by fastening and fixing the prevention plate 881 for preventing the wire arm member 870 from falling off from the guide recess 886 and the prevention plate 881. And a path forming member 882 fastened and fixed to the base member 810.

  As shown in FIG. 85, the path forming member 882 is formed in a box shape with one side open, and the prevention plate 881 is fastened and fixed to the open portion, so that the path forming member 882 opens to the back side Constitute a path passing through the upper opening 883 and the lower opening 884.

  That is, the path forming member 882 includes a wall portion 882a protruding to one side at the edge, and the upper open portion 883 constituting the upper side open portion of the path by chipping the wall portion 882a, and the lower end of the path forming member 882 The lower opening portion 884 drilled in the wall portion 882a with a size that allows insertion of the electrical wiring connector in the portion, and from the wall portion 882a to the upper opening portion 883 in a range not overlapping with the preventing plate 881 in left and right direction An extending portion 885 which is extended, a guide recess 886 which is recessed in the form of a long groove so as not to overlap with the extending portion 885 in the left-right direction, and a lower edge than the lower edge portion of the guide recess 886 And a cylindrical projecting portion 887 in which a fastening screw inserted in the preventing plate 881 is screwed into a female screw formed on a tip end of the cylindrical plate.

  A space in which the vertical slide member 820 can be displaced in the vertical direction is formed on the back side of the path forming member 882, and the wall portion 882a of the horizontal slide member 840 displaced in the left and right direction along with the displacement In the position to be disposed (the position near the lower end of displacement), the light enters the back side of the wall portion 882a (see FIG. 86A).

  That is, the lateral slide member 840 is disposed on the back side of the wiring guide member 880 which constitutes a path along which the electrical wiring is guided at a position near the lower end of the displacement. Thereby, the electrical wiring can be prevented from coming into contact with or rubbing against the lateral slide member 840 while permitting the overlapping of the arrangement of the electrical wiring and the lateral slide member 840 in a front view.

  In the assembled state, the wiring arm member 870 is guided to the path of the wiring guide member 880 through the upper opening portion 883, and the displacement of the path of the wiring guiding member 880 in the width direction among the displacements of the wiring arm member 870 is the extending portion 885 And the prevention plate 881. Furthermore, the length in the width direction of the path of the wiring guide member 880 is designed to be shorter than the sum of the lengths in the width direction of the long main body portion 871 of the wiring arm member 870 and the circular projecting portion 876. Thereby, in the assembled state, it is possible to restrict the circular projection portion 876 of the wiring arm member 870 from falling off from the guide recess 886.

  The lower opening portion 884 functions as a wiring through hole through which the electric wiring disposed so as to be wound around the cylindrical projecting portion 887 passes to the back side.

  The guide recess 886 includes a front vertical recess 886a extending vertically upward from the lower end, a rear vertical recess 886b extending vertically downward from the upper end, and a connection recess 886c connecting the lower end of the rear vertical recess 886b and the upper end of the front vertical recess 886a. And

  The cylindrical projecting portion 887 has a role as a limiting portion for limiting the displacement of the electrical wiring, and a role as a fastening portion for fixing the prevention plate 881 to the path forming member 882.

  The displacement mode of the displacement rotation unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89. FIG. In FIG. 86 to FIG. 89, how the displacement rotation unit 800 changes its state from the effect standby state to the effect upper end state is illustrated in time series.

  86 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 86 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 taken along line LXXXVIb-LXXXVIb in FIG. 86 (a). 87 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 in the arrow L direction view of FIG. 77, and FIG. 87 (b) is a displacement rotation unit 800 along line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87 (a). 88 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 88 (b) is a displacement at line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 88 (a). 89 (a) is a side view of the displacement / rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77. FIG. 9 (b) is a cross-sectional view of a displacement rotary unit 800 in LXXXIXb-LXXXIXb line in FIG. 89 (a).

  In FIG. 86, the effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800 is illustrated, and in FIG. 87, the detection target plate portion 825a (see FIG. 80) of the vertical slide member 820 is disposed at the upper detection sensor SC8, and the horizontal slide member 840 is a displacement path. The vertical slide member 820 is disposed at an intermediate position between the middle right end state and the upper end state in the middle, and the horizontal slide member 840 is in the middle right end state and the upper end state in FIG. The left end state on the way of being disposed at the left end of the displacement path in between is illustrated, and in FIG. 89, the rendering upper end state of the displacement rotation unit 800 is illustrated.

  In FIGS. 86 (a), 87 (a), 88 (a) and 89 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the wiring guide member 880 is provided with the wall portion 882a, the guide recess 886 and the cylindrical protrusion. The outer shape of the portion 887 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840 can be visually recognized by omitting the illustration of the other shape portions. Further, by partially breaking the shape portion in the vicinity of the upper end portion of the base plate 810, the vertical slide member 820 is prevented from being hidden during the elevating displacement.

  In FIGS. 86 (b), 87 (b), 88 (b) and 89 (b), the shape lines of the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810 are shown by imaginary lines, and the lateral slide member 840 is as follows. It is illustrated by a circular imaginary line along the outer shape of the main body plate member 841 in order to illustrate only the lateral displacement width.

  Further, in FIGS. 86 to 89, the state of displacement of the electrical wiring DK2 connected to the drive motor MT5 in accordance with the change in the state of the displacement and rotation unit 800 is illustrated by imaginary lines. The electrical wiring DK2 is guided from the lower open portion 884 (see FIG. 85) of the wiring guide member 880 to the inside of the wiring guide member 880 and passes through the inside of the wiring arm member 870. It is guided to the lateral slide member 840 through the enclosed space, but the details of the displacement will be described later.

  The displacement rotation unit 800 is configured such that the vertical slide member 820 can be reciprocally displaced in the vertical direction. First, upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 and the horizontal slide member 840 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, in the effect standby state, the vertical slide member 820 is disposed at the lower end position in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86). In the effect standby state, since the detection target plate portion 825a of the vertical slide member 820 is disposed in the detection groove of the lower detection sensor SC9, the displacement rotation unit 800 is put in the effect standby state by the output of the lower detection sensor SC9. The MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine that.

  Further, in the effect standby state, the horizontal slide member 840 is disposed at the left end (right and left outer end) of the displacement path, while the lower end side of the wiring arm member 870 is disposed on the front side. That is, by disposing the wiring arm member 870 on the front side so as to withdraw from the displacement trajectory of the horizontal slide member 840, it is avoided that the lateral displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 is restricted to the left and right position of the wiring arm member 870. can do. Therefore, the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced to the full left and right sides.

  From the effect standby state, drive control of the drive motor MT4 is performed to move the vertical slide member 820 upward, and the state where the detection plate portion 825a is disposed on the upper detection sensor SC8 corresponds to the middle end state (see FIG. 87). ). Therefore, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the middle right state by the output of the upper detection sensor SC8.

  In the middle end state, the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced from the effect standby state to the upward direction and the right direction, while the wiring arm member 870 is maintained in the posture only by the upward displacement.

  That is, since the circular projecting portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is still disposed in the front vertical concave portion 886 a of the guiding concave portion 886 in the middle right end state, the support as the supporting point of the wiring arm member 870 The distance between the projection 829 and the circular projection 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is maintained from the effect standby state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 to the right along with the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 from the effect standby state to the halfway right end state is executed without the posture change of the wiring arm member 870 Ru. As a result, it is possible to avoid the collision of members due to the displacement timing deviation which tends to occur when both the lateral slide member 840 and the wiring arm member 870 are displaced.

  As shown in FIGS. 86 (b) and 87 (b), with the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820, the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced in the left-right direction. In this displacement, the displacement direction is switched along the shape of the transmission guide portion 813, but the displacement direction is displaced in the left-right direction beyond the lateral width of the transmission guide portion 813.

  This is because the displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is transmitted via the two-stage pinion 861. That is, the rack member 862 of the transmission means 860 is guided by the transmission guide portion 813, and the gear portion 862a of the rack member 862 and the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 are teeth in the two-stage pinion 861. United. Therefore, the ratio of the pitch circle radius of the two-step pinion 861 corresponds to the ratio of the displacement width of the rack member 862 to the displacement width of the lateral slide member 864.

  In this embodiment, the ratio of the pitch circle radius of the small diameter pinion 861a of the two-step pinion 861 (see FIG. 80) to the pitch circle radius of the large diameter pinion 861b is 9:16. The lateral slide member 864 is displaced in the lateral direction with a lateral width in which a constant (that is, 16/9 = about 1.78) is multiplied by the variation of

  As shown in FIG. 88 (b), in the left end state, the horizontal slide member 840 is not displaced outward in the left and right directions as in the effect standby state. In other words, the lateral slide member 840 is not displaced to a position where it overlaps the wiring arm member 870 in the front-rear direction.

  In such an arrangement, as shown in FIG. 88A, a change in the posture of the wiring arm member 870 occurs. That is, in the process from the middle right end state to the middle left end state, the circular projecting portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is in the connecting recess 886 c formed on the back side of the front vertical recess of the guiding recess 886 The distance between the support projection 829 as a support point of the wiring arm member 870 and the circular projecting portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is reduced as compared to the effect standby state.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the posture change of the wiring arm member 870 occurs after the horizontal slide member 840 does not overlap the wiring arm member 870 in the front-rear direction. Further, at the time of the downward displacement, the reverse (the horizontal slide member 840 is disposed at a position overlapping with the wiring arm member 870 in the front-rear direction) is established after the posture change of the wiring arm member 870 does not occur.

  As a result, even if a shift occurs between the displacement timing of the horizontal slide member 840 and the displacement timing of the wiring arm member 870, a collision between the horizontal slide member 840 and the wiring arm member 870 can be avoided.

  The wiring arm member 870 is disposed at the left end (outside end in the left-right direction) of the displacement / rotation unit 800, and displacement is limited only to elevation displacement and posture change in the front-rear direction. That is, regardless of the state of the displacement and rotation unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 can be continuously arranged at the left and right outer end portions hardly noticeable by the player, and therefore, the wiring arm member 870 and the wiring arm member 870 are guided. It is possible to prevent the electric wiring DK2 from entering the player's view.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b), the circular projecting portion 876 (refer to FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is in the period until reaching the rendering upper end state of the displacement rotating unit 800, A support protrusion 829 is disposed in the rear vertical recess 886b formed on the rear side of the connection recess 886c of the guide recess 886 and serves as a support point for the wiring arm member 870, and a circular protrusion 876 (wiring arm member 870) The front-to-back distance with FIG. 84) is maintained at the minimum state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the electric wiring DK2 is disposed at different front and rear positions corresponding to the upper and lower positions by using the wiring arm member 870 configured to be changeable in posture with the vertical displacement of the vertical slide member 820. By making it possible, the advantageous effect of being able to secure the arrangement space of a component is produced.

  For example, in the case where the electrical wiring DK2 is disposed at the rear position, the lateral displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 is limited. More specifically, in order to avoid contact with the electrical wiring DK2, the arrangement of the horizontal slide members 840 in the effect standby state is set to be closer to the right (right and left inward). In the present embodiment, since the injection device 400 (see FIG. 6) is disposed at the rightward (rightward and leftward) position of the horizontal slide member 840, the displacement rotation unit 800 is miniaturized to avoid contact, etc. There is a risk that it will be necessary to That is, the design freedom of the displacement rotation unit 800 is reduced.

  Further, for example, when the electric wiring DK2 is disposed at a position closer to the front, the lateral displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 can be sufficiently secured, while the game board 13 disposed on the front side of the displacement rotation unit 800 The degree of freedom in arrangement of the components on the back side of the

  In the present embodiment, since the displacement and rotation units 800 are arranged symmetrically, in order to drive the motorized combination 640 a (see FIG. 2) of the second winning opening 640 disposed particularly in the right area of the game board 13. The degree of freedom in the design of the configuration of the solenoid etc. tends to be low.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by arranging the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 by the wiring arm member 870 so as to be displaceable in the front-rear direction, it is possible to avoid the restriction of the horizontal displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 It is possible to prevent the degree of freedom in arrangement of the components on the back side of the board 13 from being reduced.

  That is, at the lower end position where the horizontal slide member 840 is to be retracted to the left and right outside, the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 is arranged forward to arrange the electrical wiring DK2 on the front side of the horizontal slide member 840. Is prevented from being restricted by the electrical wiring DK2.

  In addition, the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced to the left and right inward, and at the upper position where the second winning opening 640 (see FIG. 2) is to be arranged, the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 is arranged rearward. The DK2 is placed towards the back, leaving a space on the front side. Thereby, it is possible to improve the freedom of arrangement of members disposed on the game board 13 as a configuration of a solenoid or the like for driving the motorized winning product 640a (see FIG. 2) of the second winning opening 640.

  The state change of the electric wiring DK2 in the state change shown in FIGS. 86 to 89 will be described. Here, the state change of the electric wiring DK2 means the change of the winding state of the electric wiring DK2 in the state where the electric wiring DK2 is wound around the pillar.

  In the electric wiring DK2, the upper side portion (closer to the wiring arm member 870) of the lower winding portion DK2b extends exclusively up and down and is not preferred to be curved. In particular, at the time of downward displacement, it is necessary to slide the electric wiring DK2 to the front side of the cylindrical projecting portion 887 (see FIG. 86 (a)), so the rigidity is lower compared to the portion where the lower winding portion DK2b is wound and displaced. Is preferred.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a cable tube made of resin is wound around the upper side portion of the lower winding portion DK2b, and a behavior such that rigidity is higher than that of a portion where winding displacement occurs is performed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 89 (a), the cable tube is disposed between the wall portion 882a and the electric wiring DK2 to avoid the occurrence of rubbing between the electric wiring DK2 and the wall portion 882a. There is.

  Further, since the lower end opening direction of the wiring arm member 870 is configured to be directed vertically downward, the displacement direction of the electric wiring DK2 at the start of the downward displacement can be directed vertically downward. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of unnecessary bending deformation in the electrical wiring DK2.

  As shown in FIGS. 86 to 89, the electric wiring DK2 is arranged such that the upper winding portion DK2a is wound around the cylindrical projection 823 between the wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840, and the lower side The winding portion DK 2 b is arranged to be wound around the cylindrical projecting portion 887 below the wiring arm member 870.

  Of the electrical wiring DK2, the upper winding portion DK2a disposed so as to be wound around the cylindrical protrusion 823 is displaceable in a radially expanding and shrinking manner along a plane orthogonal to the central axis of the cylindrical protrusion 823 Configured

  Of the electrical wiring DK2, the lower winding portion DK2b disposed so as to be wound around the cylindrical projecting portion 887 is displaced in such a manner as to expand and contract in a radial direction along a plane orthogonal to the central axis of the cylindrical projecting portion 887 Configured to be possible.

  That is, the plane in which the displacement of the electric wiring DK2 occurs between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 is different from the plane in which the displacement of the electric wiring DK2 occurs below the wiring arm member 870. In the present embodiment, the planes where the respective planes are orthogonal and the displacement of the electric wiring DK2 between the wiring arm member 870 and the horizontal slide member 840 occurs are the first omission portion 824a, the second omission portion 824b, and the wiring arrangement hole. It is configured to pass 873.

  The electrical wiring DK2 is restrained from being displaced by the portion disposed inside the long main body portion 871 of the wiring arm member 870 being pinched by the narrowed portion 871a as described above. Therefore, the relative displacement of the electrical wiring DK2 with respect to the wiring arm member 870 is suppressed.

  From this, in the present embodiment, the displacement required for the electrical wiring DK2 with the state change of the displacement rotation unit 800 is configured to be independently completed in each of the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b. Therefore, in the following, they will be described separately.

  First, the displacement of the upper winding portion DK2a will be described. The upper winding portion DK2a includes a portion wound from the position where the wiring arrangement hole 873 of the wiring arm member 870 passes to the right, in a counterclockwise direction centering on the cylindrical protrusion 823, and the left side of the wiring guide member 844 It means the part up to the point guided to the tip.

  The upper winding portion DK2a is configured to be displaceable in the radial direction of the center of the cylindrical protrusion 823 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 822 as a limit, but the production standby state spreading most in the radial direction (see FIG. 86 (b)) In the above, the wall portion 822 is formed at a position (or a position where a slight gap is generated) along the arrangement of the electrical wiring DK2 arranged without load. Thus, the load applied from the wall 822 to the electrical wiring DK2 in the effect standby state can be reduced.

  When the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced to the right from the effect standby state, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 is displaced to the right, whereby the upper wound portion DK2a is pulled, and the radially inner side centering on the cylindrical protrusion 823 The displacement length of the horizontal slide member 840 is complemented by the surplus length generated by the displacement of the upper winding portion DK2a. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the application of a tensile force to the electrical wiring DK2.

  On the other hand, when the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced to the left, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 is displaced to the left, so that the upper winding portion DK2a is pushed, and the upper winding is performed radially outward centering on the cylindrical protrusion 823 The part DK2a is displaced. At this time, the upper winding portion DK2a is formed outward (the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring guide member 844) by projecting a guide piece 844a which is inclined downward toward the left from the left end of the wiring guide member 844. Can be prevented from protruding upward), and the upper winding portion DK 2 a can be appropriately pushed along the shape of the wall portion 822.

  Next, displacement of the lower winding portion DK2b will be described. The lower winding portion DK2b is wound clockwise from left at a position hanging down from the wiring arm member 870 in a left side view (view from the left and right sides) centering on the cylindrical projecting portion 887 (the cylindrical projecting portion 887 It means a portion including the portion that passes through the front side and is wound in the forward rolling direction) up to the point where it is disposed in the lower opening portion 884 (see FIG. 85).

  The lower winding portion DK2b is configured to be displaceable in the radial direction of the center of the cylindrical projecting portion 887 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 882a as a limit, but the production standby state spreading most in the radial direction (see FIG. 86A) ), The wall portion 882a is formed at a position (or a position where a slight gap is left) along the arrangement of the electrical wiring DK2 arranged without load. Thus, the load applied from the wall portion 882a to the electric wiring DK2 in the effect standby state can be reduced.

  From the effect standby state, when the wiring arm member 870 is lifted and displaced as the vertical slide member 820 is lifted and displaced, the side guided by the wiring arm member 870 is displaced upward and the lower winding portion DK2b is pulled upward. The displacement length of the wiring arm member 870 is complemented by the surplus length generated by the lower winding portion DK 2 b being displaced inward in the radial direction centering on the cylindrical projecting portion 887. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the application of a tensile force to the electrical wiring DK2.

  On the other hand, when the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, the side disposed on the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, so that the lower winding portion DK2b is pushed downward in the radial direction centering on the cylindrical projecting portion 887 The side winding portion DK2b is displaced. At this time, the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 is opened in the inclined direction toward the front side as it goes downward, so that the lower wound portion DK2b is between the cylindrical projecting portion 887 and the wall portion 882a The lower winding portion DK2b can be appropriately pushed along the shape of the wall portion 882a.

  In the present embodiment, the space in which the lower winding portion DK2b is disposed is disposed below the lower end position of the displacement range of the horizontal slide member 840. As a result, it is possible to avoid that the size of the space in which the lower winding portion DK2b is displaced in the radial direction is limited by the arrangement of the horizontal slide member 840. It can be displaced by fully utilizing the front and rear width of reference).

  Therefore, since a space capable of accommodating the lower winding portion DK 2 b can be largely secured below the wiring arm member 870, the length of the lower winding portion DK 2 b can be made sufficiently long. The amount of vertical displacement allowed can be lengthened.

  FIG. 90 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 91 is an exploded back perspective view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, the game board 13 has a center frame 86 disposed on the front side of the window 60a formed in the base plate 60 and a plurality of streams whose front side is opened from the resin member. And a ball flow down unit 150 formed in a path shape and disposed at the lower portion on the back side of the base plate 60.

  The ball flow down unit 150 is formed so as to be able to receive the ball flowing down the lower end LB1 of the gaming ball having entered the second winning opening 640 in the vicinity of the upper end of the fixed plate portion 151 fastened and fixed to the base plate 60. The first receiving flow passage 152 and a long box-like member whose front side is opened, the second receiving being fastened and fixed to the fixing plate portion 151 from the rear side in a manner connected to the downstream side of the receiving flow passage 151 A flow path member 153 and a plurality of ridges 154 projecting inward from the left and right wall inner portions of the second receiving flow path member 153 in a direction orthogonal to the flow-down direction of the ball are provided.

  The plurality of protrusions 154 are alternately arranged in the left and right direction at intervals of about the diameter of the ball for each of the left and right wall parts. Thereby, it is possible to decelerate the flow of the ball flowing down the second receiving flow channel member 153.

  The functions of the first receiving flow channel 152 and the second receiving flow channel member 153 will be described. In the first receiving flow channel 152 and the second receiving flow channel member 153, in addition to the function of guiding the gaming ball having entered the second winning opening 640 to the ball discharging path not shown, There is a function of improving the rendering effect by making the player's game ball visible later. In the following description, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

  In the second winning opening 640, a detection sensor for ball passage detection is arranged near the lower edge shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to immediately execute the payout of the winning balls and the holding display on the third symbol display device 81, and a comfortable game can be provided to the player. Since the player can notice the ball entering the second winning hole 640 by visually recognizing the ball flowing down the first receiving channel 152, even if the ball is not seen entering the second winning hole 640, For example, it can be made easier to notice that a payout has not been made due to a problem on the gaming machine store side.

  As described below, it is clear that the ball has entered the second winning opening 640 by visually recognizing the ball flowing down the intermediate flow passage LM1, so the position of the detection sensor is set to the downstream of the intermediate flow passage LM1, etc. The timing of the payout of the winning balls and the timing of the suspension display may be delayed.

  The gaming ball having entered the second winning opening 640 is an intermediate flow passage LM1 (see FIG. 1) that is visible visibly in the left and right direction inside the guiding path DL1 where the ball deviated from the second winning opening 640 flows down. 27) flow down.

  The intermediate flow passage LM1 is formed to be able to be guided vertically downward while displacing the ball in a zigzag manner to the left and right, similarly to the guide flow passage DL1. That is, since the ball flowing down the intermediate flow passage LM1 and the ball flowing down the guide flow passage DL1 appear to be the same in the flow-down mode, the ball on the right path of the third symbol display device 81 in the right-handed game Even if it is visually recognized, it can be made difficult to distinguish whether the ball is flowing down the intermediate flow passage LM1 or the guiding flow passage DL1.

  Here, the information on which flow path the ball is flowing down at the time of the right-handed game is information directly connected to the player's benefit, and it is a nail (not shown) implanted in the base plate 60. It is a part where individual differences of the pachinko machine 10 occur corresponding to the state.

  In the present embodiment, the flesh portion of the base plate 60 is left in the vicinity of the through gate 67, and the ball before passing through the through gate 67 collides with this position or enters the second winning opening 640. Since nails which balls collide with are implanted, it is easy for the balls to flow down the intermediate flow passage LM1 or to flow down the guide flow passage DL1 during the right-handed game, for each pachinko machine 10 It is different.

  The ball that did not enter the second winning opening 640 flows in the guidance route DL1 and does not enter the general winning opening 63 disposed on the downstream side during a definite change during playing the right-handed game or during a short time, It is discharged from the game area through the out port 71 and does not benefit the player (a waste ball).

  From here, whether or not the second winning opening 640 enters the ball, and whether or not the ball flows down the guide route DL1 uniquely correspond. And, as compared with the case of focusing only on the second winning opening 640, the case of focusing on the guide route DL1 has a higher degree of freedom in the location of attention since the guide route DL1 extends in the vertical direction It is clear.

  Therefore, depending on the player, the frequency of the ball flowing down the guide route DL1 is confirmed, and the ball entering frequency to the second winning opening 640, the occurrence frequency of the wasted ball in the right-handed game, etc. are calculated. In addition, it is expected that it will be considered whether or not to continue the game.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is difficult to distinguish between the ball flowing down the guide path DL1 and the ball entering the second winning opening 640 and flowing down the intermediate flow passage LM1. As a result, it can be thought that the frequency of entering the second winning opening 640 is high, and the continuation of the game can be promoted.

  On the other hand, the ball flowing down the intermediate flow passage LM1 has already entered the second winning opening 640 and is discharged from the game area, so it flows down vertically as it is, and the specified winning opening 65a in front view When it flows down to a position where it overlaps with the ball, it is difficult to distinguish it from the ball that can actually enter the specific winning hole 65a, and there is a possibility that the game will be hindered.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the ball is allowed to flow downward to the left and right in the first receiving flow passage 152 above the specific winning opening 65a to reach a position where the ball overlaps the specific winning opening 65a in front view. It is preventing (see FIG. 2). Thereby, it is possible to easily distinguish between a ball that can actually enter the specified winning opening 65a and a ball that has already entered the second winning opening 640 and can not enter the specified winning opening 65a. .

  The first receiving flow path 152 passes near the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in front view from the right side of the display region of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) in front view, Drop the ball to the left and right center position side of. That is, since the ball guided to the first receiving channel 152 enters the field of view of the player who is focusing on the display of the third symbol display device 81, he focuses on the display of the third symbol display device 81. The player who is not paying attention to the right-handed path can be made to recognize the presence or absence of entering the second winning opening 640.

  Thus, the player can be made to recognize the presence or absence of entering the second winning opening 640 without moving the field of view with the third symbol display device 81 being focused. Therefore, an important display is executed when the eyes of the third symbol display device 81 for looking at the second winning opening 640 are turned off, and the occurrence of a situation where the player misses the display can be avoided, and a comfortable game Can be provided.

  The ball flowing down the second receiving flow path member 153 flows obliquely downward to the left at the right side of the first winning opening 64 in a front view. Since the ball is decelerated by the ridges 154, the staying time of the flowing ball can be extended. This makes it easy to increase the number of game balls visually recognized in the game area in front view.

  Further, by securing a long side-to-side width of the flow-down path of the ball, the line of sight directed to the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the flow-down path of the second receiving flow channel member 153 easily intersect. As a result, the ball flowing down the inside of the second receiving flow path member 153 can be easily entered into the player's view.

  92 and 93 are exploded front perspective views of the center frame 86, the light guide plate rendering means 160, and the decoration means 170, and FIGS. 94 and 95 are views of the center frame 86, the light guide plate rendering means 160 and the decoration means 170. It is a rear perspective view.

  As shown in FIG. 92 to FIG. 95, the light guide plate rendering means 160 is fastened and fixed to the light guide plate 161 and the center frame 86 from the back side, and is configured to be able to contact the front side and the upper side of the light guide plate 161 An upper support member 162 formed of an impermeable resin material and aligning the light guide plate 161, and a light transmissive resin material formed on the center frame 86 in such a manner as to press the lower side of the light guide plate 161 from the back side. A lower support member 163 configured to be able to be fastened and fixed, and a spherical flow passage component 164 that is fastened to and fixed to the lower support member 163 and made of a light transmissive resin material and constitutes a spherical flow passage; And a plurality of left and right support members 165 configured to be able to be fastened and fixed to the center frame 86 in such a manner as to press the left and right sides of the light guide plate 161 from the back side. Of the center frame 86, which is formed in a vertically elongated shape, and is fixed to the center frame 86 in a state of being formed into a shape and extending to the front side of the center frame 86 through the upper side of the upper support member 162; And a vertically-placed substrate unit 167 disposed along the left inner wall of the center frame 86 from the front side and fastened and fixed thereto.

  The decoration means 170 is formed of a light transmitting resin material, and is formed of a first decoration member 171 disposed at the left and right center position near the upper portion of the center frame 86, and formed of a light transmitting resin material on the left side of the first decoration member 171. The second decorative member 174 disposed on the front side of the left side frame portion of the center frame 86 and the light transmitting resin material are formed on the front side of the right side frame portion of the center frame 86 on the right side of the first decorative member 171 And a third decorative member 177 disposed.

  The first decorative member 171 has a horizontally elongated rectangular central decorative member 172 configured to be able to be fastened and fixed to the central portion thereof, and a margin member 173 configured from another member as a margin portion of a title representative of the pachinko machine 10; Equipped with

  As shown in FIG. E 4, in the first decorative member 171, a horizontally long groove portion 171 a in the form of a horizontally long groove is recessed on the back side. The horizontal groove portion 171 a is formed with a groove width in which the electric decoration substrate of the horizontal placement substrate unit 166 of the light guide plate rendering means 160 can be arranged.

  The first decorative member 171 is disposed at a position slightly overlapping the lower side of the opening 86 a drilled in the front-rear direction at the top of the center frame 86. In the present embodiment, the effect member 700 in the effect standby state is configured to be visible through the opening 86a (see FIG. 2).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the front position of the third symbol display device 81 is closed by the light guide plate 161 inward of the center frame 86, while the front position of the effect member 700 in the effect standby state is open. It is open | released by the part 86a. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the light emission effect by the effect member 700 in the effect standby state without being blocked by the light guide plate 161.

  With reference to FIG. 96, the relationship between the horizontally long groove portion 171a and the horizontally placed substrate unit 166 will be described. FIG. 96 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. In FIG. 96, the vicinity of the laterally long groove portion 171a is separately illustrated as an enlarged view. Further, in the description of FIG. 96, FIG. 92 to FIG. 95 will be appropriately referred to.

  In the present embodiment, light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are disposed on the front and back on the front end side of the electric decoration substrate of the horizontal placement substrate unit 166, and light is emitted along the arrows D1a and D1b in the vertical direction. The light that has reached the reflective shape portion 171b formed in the form of a laterally long bowl on the upper and lower sides of the horizontally elongated groove portion 171a on the back surface side of the 1 decorative member 171 can be clearly viewed.

  Thereby, even in a state in which the arrangement of the light emitting means is concentrated on the horizontal placement substrate unit 166, a mode (light emitting range or light emitting shape) of the light emission effect visually recognized by the player by the forming range or forming shape of the reflective shape portion 171b. Can be viewed differently.

  In the present embodiment, the light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged in one horizontal row on the upper surface of the horizontal mounting substrate unit 166, and the light emitting means 166a such as LEDs is arranged on the lower surface in the row on the upper surface. It is arranged in two horizontal rows, upper and lower corresponding rows and rows parallel to the row and formed on the back side. Among the rows in which the LEDs as the light emitting means 166a are arranged, the row of the upper surface and the front row of the lower surface are disposed inside the horizontally long groove portion 171a, and the rear row of the lower surface is disposed outside the horizontally long groove portion 171a.

  With this configuration, light can be emitted to the reflective shape portion 171b by the LEDs arranged in the row of the upper surface and the front row of the lower surface, and another LED is arranged by the LEDs arranged in the lower row of the lower surface. It can be irradiated with light.

  In the present embodiment, the light emitting means 166 b such as LEDs arranged in the rear row of the lower surface is arranged above the light guide plate 161, and the LED light to be irradiated is made incident from the edge of the light guide plate 161. That is, the light emitting means 166 b such as LEDs arranged in the rear row of the lower surface of the horizontal placement substrate unit 166 is used to light the light guide plate 161.

  In the LED disposed on the lower surface of the horizontal placement substrate unit 166, the upper support member 162 is disposed between the front and rear two rows. Thereby, the light irradiated from the front and rear two rows of LEDs can be divided by the upper support member 162.

  The horizontal placement substrate unit 166 is disposed right above the upper edge of the light guide plate 161, that is, near the upper edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view. In other words, it is arranged at the boundary position between the display area and the game area in front view. Thereby, the light irradiated to the display area side and the light irradiated to the game area side without being irradiated to the display area side can be clearly divided.

  The central decorative member 172 is disposed at the front and back positions similar to the reflective shape portion 171 b, while the front and rear surfaces are formed to be flat. Thereby, even when light is irradiated from the horizontal placement substrate unit 166, it is possible to prevent light from being strongly reflected, and maintain visibility.

  In the present embodiment, a pattern such as a star is drawn on the front of the central decorative member 172, and the type of performance of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the type of spec. So-called another spec) is displayed by the number of stars. It is configured to be able to. By constructing the central decorative member 172 as a separate member from the first decorative member 171, the pachinko machine 10 can be replaced by replacing only the central decorative member 172 when manufacturing the pachinko machine 10 having different types of performance. It can be configured.

  The margin member 173 is configured as a separate member from the first decorative member 171, and has a shape different from the shape formed on the reflective shape portion 171b as the shape of the plate front and rear surface (in the present embodiment, a striped groove) Is formed so that the appearance of the reflected light is different from that of the reflective shape portion 171 b.

  FIG. 97 is a partially enlarged front view of the first decorative member 171 in the range XCVII of FIG. In the present embodiment, when light is irradiated in the vertical direction of the horizontal placement substrate unit 166 along the arrows D1a and D1b, the light reaching the reflective shape portion 171b travels to the front side by reflection or refraction, While light is visually recognized, the light that has reached the margin member 173 is slightly dark because it is configured such that most of the light is not transmitted but travels as it is.

  Thus, while adopting a configuration in which the light emitted from the horizontal placement substrate unit 166 is allowed to travel in the vertical direction, the shape of the margin member 173 can be visually recognized as a shadow. Can be viewed as In other words, it can be visually recognized as if the LED is placed on the back side to perform the light emission effect.

  The second decorative member 174 is provided with a shielding member 175 colored in a low permeability thin plate member (sheet-like member) in any manner, and the shielding member 175 is fixed to the back side of the second decorative member 174 . Thereby, the back side of the second decorative member 174 can be configured to be less visible.

  Thereby, the game area (in particular, the left side) formed on the front side of the base plate 60 and the formation area of the light guide plate 161 in front view (including the area overlapping with the display area of the third symbol display device 81) Can be clearly divided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decrease in the visibility of the ball flowing down the game area due to the light accompanying the effect of the light guide plate 161 or the light irradiated from the third symbol display device 81.

  In the third decorative member 177, a plurality of hexagonal decorative patterns are three-dimensionally formed on the front side, and on the back side, a plurality of hexagonal-shaped portions disposed offset in the front and rear directions are combined in three dimensions And a plurality of three-dimensional decorative members 178 which are formed in the same manner.

  Similar to the third decorative member 177, the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is formed of a light transmitting resin material, and is disposed in the space disposed between the light guide plate 161 disposed portion in the center frame 86 and the guide path DL1. Ru.

  In this way, it is possible to execute light effect that causes three-dimensional visual recognition, not light visual recognition that is planarly recognized between the light guide plate 161 arrangement portion and the guide path DL1. That is, in front view, it is possible to execute a light emission effect with a depth.

  For example, when light is irradiated to the three-dimensional decorative member 178 from the back side, which position of the three-dimensional decorative member 178 in the front-rear direction is determined by which position of the three-dimensional decorative member 178 in front view. It changes whether it becomes bright. Therefore, it is possible to execute a light effect in which the front side is made to shine and the back side is made to appear and show from the player's point of view.

  In this embodiment, the third symbol display device 81, the front side light emitting means 852a of the displacement rotation unit 800, and the like (see FIG. 81) are assumed as means for irradiating light from the back side to the three-dimensional decoration member 178. The light emission position can be changed. Therefore, the types of light effects can be easily increased as compared with the case where light is emitted toward the three-dimensional decoration member 178 from light emitting means such as LEDs fixedly arranged.

  Also, for example, when light is irradiated to the three-dimensional decorative member 178 in the left-right direction or the up-down direction, the position in the front-rear direction of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 depends on which position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 in front view. Which position of the light is changed. Therefore, it is possible to execute a light effect in which the front side is made to shine and the back side is made to appear and show from the player's point of view.

  In the present embodiment, the first light irradiation device 330 of the emission effect unit 300 is assumed as a unit for irradiating light to the three-dimensional decoration member 178 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 27). The first light irradiation device 330 functions to block at least a part of the light directed to the three-dimensional decoration member 178 among the light irradiated from the display area of the third symbol display device 81 from the arrangement.

  Thereby, the extent to which the aspect of the light visually recognized through the three-dimensional decoration member 178 depends on the display effect aspect of the third symbol display device 81 can be suppressed. For example, when the color of the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81 is blue, even if the color of the light emitted from the first light irradiation device 330 is red, the game is performed via the three-dimensional decoration member 178 It can be made easy to avoid that the color of the light visually recognized by the person becomes purple (a color obtained by mixing blue light and red light). That is, the light visually recognized through the three-dimensional decorative member 178 can be easily visually recognized independently of the display of the third symbol display device 81.

  The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the ball flowing down the ball flow down unit 150 is configured to be visible in a front view and the whole ball is flowed down in the same path. However, the ball flow down unit according to the second embodiment At 2150, the falling sphere is configured to flow down any of a plurality of paths. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 98 is a front view of the game board 2013 in the second embodiment. In FIG. 98, an example of how the granular member 320 appears immediately after the firing is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 98, the ball flow down unit 2150 is formed to be inclined downward from the lower end of the first receiving flow path 152 to the left as a difference from the ball flow down unit 150 described in the first embodiment. And a third receiving channel 2155 formed in a size that allows the sphere to flow downward.

  The third receiving flow channel 2155 is formed on the upstream side, and the inclination angle is set looser than the first reception flow channel 152, and the lower end (left end) is set on the left side of the first winning opening 64 in front view And a discharge portion 2155 b extending downward in a front view from the lower end (left side) of the inclined portion 2155 a.

  The falling velocity of the ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a is slower than the falling velocity of the ball in the first receiving channel 152 because of the shallowness of the angle of inclination. The ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155 a is configured to be visible to the player, and the arrangement of the inclined portion 2155 a is in the vicinity of the lower edge of the light guide plate 161 in a front view. Therefore, the ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be kept in the player's view for a long time.

  Thus, the ball flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be configured to enter the field of view of the player playing the game while visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 12A) through the light guide plate 161. . In other words, the power of attention to the sphere flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be improved without a sense of discomfort.

  The guidance of the ball to the inclined portion 2155a will be described. In the present embodiment, the ball entering the second winning opening 640 flows down similarly to the lower end of the first receiving channel 152, and along the second receiving channel member 153 at the lower end of the first receiving channel 152. It is switched by the switching means whether to flow down in the first direction D21 to flow down or to flow down in the second direction D22 to flow down along the third receiving channel 2155.

  In the present embodiment, the downward flow resistance of the spheres flowing through the second receiving flow channel member 153 is increased by the ridges 154 (see FIG. 90) formed in the second receiving flow channel member 153. Therefore, when the next sphere reaches the lower end of the first receiving flow path 152 while the ball is flowing down the second receiving flow path member 153, the ball is guided to the third receiving flow path 2155. .

  Such a situation is likely to occur, for example, when a plurality of balls enter continuously in a short period of time, for example, a plurality of balls enter the second winning opening 640 in succession. Therefore, the player can grasp that a plurality of balls enter the second winning opening 640 in a row by visually recognizing the state in which the balls flow down the third receiving flow channel 2155.

  The mode of the switching means is not limited at all. For example, an opening and closing plate configured to be switchable between the state of permitting the flow of the ball in the first direction D21 and the state of restricting the state by using a driving unit such as a solenoid is provided in the ball flowing unit 2150 Alternatively, an electromagnet disposed so as to generate a magnetic force at a branch point between the first direction D21 and the second direction D22 may be disposed, and the generated magnetic force may be used as a pulling force or a repelling force to flow down the ball. The route may be switched.

  According to these methods, it is possible not only to switch the flow-down path of the ball to the first direction D21 or the second direction D22, but also to make the ball stay or to reverse the ball. Unlike the ball flowing down the game area, changing the flow-down path of the ball entering the second winning opening 640 does not affect the subsequent game results, so the ball using the magnetic force as described above It is possible to perform switching of the flow-down path of

  As described above, when switching the flow-down path of the ball in a device using electricity, it is controlled by the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) whether the ball flows down in the first direction D21 or in the second direction D22. it can. Therefore, it is possible to associate the result of the lottery by entering the second winning opening 640 with the switching of whether the ball flows down in the first direction D21 or in the second direction D22.

  For example, if the switching means is controlled so that the ball flows down the third receiving channel 2155 at 60% of the case where the lottery by entering the second winning opening 640 is a big hit, the third receiving channel It is possible to improve the expectation for the jackpot of the player who visually recognizes that the ball is flowing down 2155.

  In this case, the line of sight of the player is most easily collected at the lower end position of the first receiving channel 152 which is a guide route to the third receiving channel 2155, and as a result, It is possible to improve the attention to the ball already discharged from the area.

  As described above, it is expected that the ball flows down the third receiving channel 2155 when the frequency of entering the second winning opening 640 is high, or the expected value of the jackpot of the lottery by entering the second winning opening 640. Suggests that it is high.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a detection sensor SC21 capable of detecting passage of a ball is disposed in the middle of the discharge unit 2155b, and control is performed so that the granular member 320 is fired when passage of the ball is determined. .

  As described above, it is necessary to change the state of the injection device 400 from the effect standby state (see FIG. 38) to the emission standby state (FIG. 40) in advance for the emission of the granular member 320. take time. On the other hand, it is determined whether or not the granular member 320 is to be fired at the timing when the ball enters the second winning opening 640, and it takes some time for the ball to reach the discharge part 2155b from there. The injection device 400 is controlled to change its state using this flow-down time.

  As a result, it is possible to control the firing of the granular member 320 at the same time when the passage of the sphere is determined by the detection sensor SC21. By controlling in this manner, the granular member 320 is fired after a certain time delay expected to be required for the ball to flow down the third receiving channel 2155 after entering the second winning opening 640. In this case, it is easier to match the flow of the ball and the timing of the discharge of the particulate member 320, as compared to the case of controlling it.

  For example, the oil attached to the ball may be attached to the first receiving flow path 152 to reduce the flow-down speed of the ball, and in this case, the particulate member 320 is fired after waiting for a predetermined time delay. With such control, before the ball reaches the third reception channel 2155, the granular member 320 is fired, which may reduce the rendering effect.

  On the other hand, it is controlled by the detection sensor SC21 that the passage of the ball is judged at the same time, and at the same time, the granular member 320 is controlled to be fired until the ball reaches the third receiving channel 2155 After focusing the attention power on the third receiving flow path 2155, the effect of a series of renderings is performed such that powerful presentation that spreads to about the area of the light guide plate 161 is performed by firing the granular member 320. it can.

  Note that the arrangement of the third receiving flow path 2155 where the ball flows down and the arrangement of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 12A) viewed through the light guide plate 161 are partial as viewed from the front. Therefore, the above-mentioned series of effects can be visually recognized without requiring the player to change the line of sight.

  In addition, when a ball passes detection sensor SC21, you may make it combine the control which does not emit the granular member 320. For example, if the firing of the granular member 320 is not performed, if the jackpot is reached, the probability of the above-mentioned probability variation jackpot may be controlled to be high.

  In this case, since it is possible to increase the types of effects after the balls are guided to the third receiving flow channel 2155, the player to the third receiving flow channel 2155 at the stage where the balls are guided to the third receiving flow channel 2155 It is possible to avoid the decline in the power of attention.

  In addition, when the firing of the granular member 320 is not performed, the power of attention to the display effect on the subsequent third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

  A detection sensor having the same function as that of the detection sensor SC21 may be disposed at another location. For example, it may be arranged at a place where the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a can pass. In this case, it is possible to execute an effect of firing the granular member 320 at the passage timing of the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a. In this case, the detection sensor SC21 may be disposed in a specific area where the profit given to the player is more advantageous when the game ball passes.

  A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. In the first embodiment, the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is configured to be displaced in the radial direction so as to be laterally symmetrical and discrete, but in the effect member 3700 of the third embodiment In the radial displacement, it is possible to form a section that is not symmetrical. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 99 is a front view of the scaling unit 3600 in the third embodiment. The difference from the first embodiment of the enlargement / reduction unit 3600 is only in the effect member 3700, and the configurations of the main body member 601, the front cover member 610, the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the transmission gear 650 are common. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  In FIG. 99, a state in which the shielding design member 760 of the effect member 3700 is disposed at an intermediate position (intermediate position) in the radial direction of the scaling displacement is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 99, in the present embodiment, the use of five shielding design members 760 is the same as in the first embodiment, but the two lower sides and the upper left 1 of the shielding design members 760 are used. While the sheets are radially expanded and displaced in the same length, the upper one and the upper right one are still in the collective arrangement state (not radially expanded and displaced). The configuration for realizing this displacement will be described.

  FIG. 100 is a front view of the rotary plate 3730. FIG. The rotary plate 3730 has a common configuration with respect to the rotary plate 730 described in the first embodiment, except that a part of the guide holes 733 is changed to another guide hole 3733.

  As shown in FIG. 100, the rotary plate 730 is provided with a separate guide hole 3733 as a substitute for the guide holes 733 on the upper side and the upper right side in a front view. The separate guide hole 3733 includes the above-described small diameter arc portion 733a, the large diameter arc portion 733b, and an adjustment connecting portion 3733c connecting the small diameter arc portion 733a and the large diameter arc portion 733b.

  The adjustment connection portion 3733c extends along the same arc shape from the connection portion with the large diameter arc portion 733b to the vicinity of the intermediate position, and on the opposite side of the large diameter arc portion 733b (a guide hole 733 adjacent to the clockwise direction or At a position close to the separate guide hole 3733), it is formed so as to rapidly approach the small diameter arc portion 733a side.

  That is, in the displacement mode in which the telescopic displacement members 740 are displaced from the collective arrangement state (see FIG. 63), the telescopic displacement members 740 guided by the connecting portion 733c are expanded and displaced in the radial direction from an early stage, while the adjustment connecting portion 3733c The telescopic displacing member 740, which is to be guided to, is not expanded in the radial direction while being guided in the same arc shape as the large diameter arc portion 733b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 99, the arrangement of the shielding design member 760 can be displaced. The operation caused by the displacement of the shielding design member 760 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 99, by making the arrangement of the shielding design member 760 asymmetric, it is possible to shift the position of the center of gravity of the effect member 3700 from the center in the horizontal direction or the center in the vertical direction. In particular, in the state shown in FIG. 99, since the shielding design members 760 arranged at the upper right position still remain in the collective arrangement state, the gravity center G31 of the effect member 3700 is shifted to the lower left position by that amount.

  As a result, in the effect member 3700, a load in the direction of correcting the displacement of the center of gravity G31, that is, a load in the counterclockwise direction in a front view is generated by its own weight. This load can cause the rendering member 3700 to change its posture in the rotational direction about the longitudinal axis, so that the shielding design member 760 has a radial direction around the rotation axis of the rendering member 3700 and a rotational direction. Can be displaced in the combined direction.

  Thus, the directions (ie, the directions which are not planned only from the shapes of the function plate portion 720 (see FIG. 55), the rotary plate 3730 and the telescopic displacement member 740 (see FIG. 59) which is a member for displacing the shielding design member 760) And the rotational design member 760 can be displaced.

  In the present embodiment, only the connecting portion 733c and the adjusting connecting portion 3733c are different, and in the other parts, the shapes of the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733 are the same, and the small diameter arc portion 733a and the large diameter arc The arrangement of the portion 733 b is the same in the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733.

  Therefore, after the position of the center of gravity G31 is shifted in the state shown in FIG. 99, the shielding design member 760 is placed in the collective arrangement state or is arranged at the expansion displacement termination position in the radial direction. Since they are arranged symmetrically, the center of gravity G31 returns to the left and right center position and the up and down center position of the effect member 3700 again. As a result, the position of the center of gravity G31 can be maintained while being shifted, and the occurrence of a problem can be prevented.

  An example of effect using the return of the center of gravity G31 will be described. In the first embodiment, the vertical displacement and the radial displacement of the effect member 700 are not simultaneously performed but are separately performed, but the purpose is to avoid a collision with another configuration. .

  In the present embodiment, the vertical displacement and the radial displacement of the effect member 3700 can be simultaneously controlled while adopting a device for avoiding a collision with another configuration. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 99, it is possible to expand and displace the shielding design member 760 in the radial direction while displacing the effect member 3700 downward.

  In this case, in addition to the downward displacement of the effect member 3700 and the enlarged displacement of the shielding design member 760 in the radial direction, a return of the center of gravity G31 of the effect member 3700 occurs, so FIG. A posture change of reverse rotation can be caused with the rotation direction (counterclockwise in front view) assumed from the state.

  As described above, since rotational displacement in the forward and reverse directions can be added to the expansion displacement in the radial direction of the effect member 3700, a simple configuration specialized for enlarging and reducing the displacement of the shielding design member 760 in the radial direction. As a result, displacement in the rotational direction can be added as a complex movement. Thereby, the rendering effect by the rendering member 3700 can be improved.

  The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the linear motion member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are simultaneously displaced by driving the drive motor M1 in the forward rotation direction from the effect standby state, but in the fourth embodiment, The shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear side transmission member 460 is changed, and the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480 is completed prior to the displacement of the linear movement member 410. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 101 illustrates the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear movement member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the protrusion of the contact member 430, which are associated with the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure showing time change of arrangement of setting part 432, and arrangement of cylindrical projection 472 of transmission arm member 470.

  In FIG. 101, the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement change of each configuration is not described, but an indication of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement change occurs is shown. Further, the change in the arrangement of the linear moving member 410 corresponds to the change in the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

  As shown in FIG. 101, in the fourth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 is completed prior to the displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420. Therefore, since the descent displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 is started with the lid member 480 disposed at the displacement end position on the retraction side, the player is not blocked by the lid member 480, It is possible to visually recognize the displacement of the particulate member accompanying the downward displacement of the collision member 420 (see FIG. 12A, FIG. 38).

  In this situation, by reciprocating the linear motion member 410 between the angle 66 degrees and the angle 125 degrees shown in FIG. 101, the granular member 320 can be vibrated (small displacement) and visually recognized by the player.

  In this embodiment, since the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 is strong, when the driving of the drive motor M1 is cancelled, the biasing member of the coil spring SP1 causes the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 to ascend and displace.

  Therefore, the linear motion member 410 can be reciprocated by energizing the drive motor MT1 intermittently. As a result, it is not necessary to switch the drive direction of the drive motor MT1, so control can be facilitated.

  In addition, in the aspect in which the granular member 320 is vibrated (small displacement) to be made visible to the player in this manner, the load (fatigue) received by the torsion spring SP2 is reduced as compared with the case where the lid member 480 is displaced together. Can.

  In addition, the aspect which displaces the collision member 420 in order to vibrate the particulate member 320 (minute displacement) is not restricted to this. For example, vibration may be transmitted from another vibration device to the collision member 420 to vibrate the collision member 420. In this case, the other vibration device is preferably disposed below the collision member 420 in the displacement direction. Thus, it is possible to prevent the other vibrators from being loaded when the collision member 420 is displaced by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1.

  The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the linear motion member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are simultaneously displaced by driving the drive motor M1 in the forward rotation direction from the effect standby state, but in the fifth embodiment, The shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear side transmission member 460 is changed, and the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480 starts after the displacement of the linear movement member 410 is completed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 102 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear movement member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the protrusion of the contact member 430 in accordance with the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure showing time change of arrangement of setting part 432, and arrangement of cylindrical projection 472 of transmission arm member 470.

  In FIG. 102, the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement change of each configuration is not described, but a guide of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement change occurs is shown. Further, the change in the arrangement of the linear moving member 410 corresponds to the change in the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

  As shown in FIG. 102, in the fifth embodiment, the displacement of the transfer arm member 470 starts after the displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 is completed. Further, after firing of the particulate member 320, the displacement of the lid member 480 is configured to be completed before the particulate member 320 reaches the collision member 420 (see near 290 degrees).

  Therefore, at least a part of the particulate member 320 can be placed on the upper side of the lid member 480 and retained. Although it is conceivable that the granular member 320 collides with the lid member 480 to inhibit the rotation of the lid member 480, in the present embodiment, the advancing and retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis. Therefore, the load received from the granular member 320 can be directed to the rotary shaft side. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to inhibit the rotation of the lid member 480.

  If the drive of the drive motor MT1 continues in the positive rotation direction while the granular member 320 is on the lid member 480, the transmission arm member 470 is displaced to the retraction side (small diameter side in FIG. 102), causing the granular member 320 to collide. It falls on the member 420.

  On the other hand, since the contact between the collision member 420 and the linear movement member 410 is released at this timing, it is possible to prevent the load transmitted from the granular member 320 to the collision member 420 from being transmitted to the linear movement member 410 .

  When the drive motor MT1 is driven to rotate in the reverse rotation direction from the emission standby state, the rising speed of the linear movement member 410 and the collision member 420 can be improved at high speed, and the granular member 320 can be emitted.

  In this case, since the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side at the time of firing, firing of the granular member 320 is inhibited at the left and right center portions where the overhanging portion 482 is disposed, and firing in the left and right direction. Can be viewed as being the main.

  That is, the direction in which the granular member 320 is ejected can be changed between the emission mode in the case of rotating the drive motor MT1 forward and the emission mode in the case of reverse rotation. As a result, variations can be given to the emission direction of the granular member 320, and the rendering effect can be improved.

  The sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the first light irradiation device 330 and the second light irradiation device 340 have flat-plate-like substrates and irradiate light in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction has been described. An electric decoration substrate on which the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 are disposed in a bent manner is provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 103 is a cross-sectional view of gaming board 13 and launch unit 6300 in the sixth embodiment taken along the line corresponding to line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. That is, in FIG. 103, the game board 13 and the launch unit 6300 are illustrated, and the operation unit 500 is omitted. In addition, directions of light emitted from the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 are schematically illustrated by arrows.

  As shown in FIG. 103, in addition to the electric decoration substrate 332, the front side end of the first light irradiation device 6330 is close to the front side end of the electric decoration substrate 332, and the rear side end is the electric decoration substrate A second electric decoration board 6334 is disposed to be inclined and disposed in a posture away from 332.

  The second electric decoration board 6334 includes light emitting means such as an LED disposed so as to be able to emit light at least from the front side surface. With this light emitting means, it is easy to direct light to the dividing member 310, and it is possible to improve the effect of the effect of making the granular member 320 scattering the internal space IE1 of the dividing member 310 glow.

  In the second light irradiation device 6340, in addition to the electric decoration substrate 342, the rear end is close to the rear side end of the electric decoration substrate 342, and the front end is inclined and disposed in a posture of leaving the electric decoration substrate 342 And a second electric decoration board 6344.

  The second electric decoration substrate 6344 includes light emitting means such as an LED disposed so as to be able to emit light at least from the back side surface. With this light emitting means, it becomes easy to direct light to the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the displacement rotation unit 800, etc. arranged on the back side of the launch unit 6300, and the effect of light emission effect can be improved.

  The arrangement of the electric decoration board is not limited to this. For example, only the second electric decoration substrates 6334 and 6344 may be adopted, and the electric decoration substrates 332 and 342 may be omitted, or other combinations may be adopted. Further, the light emitting means may be disposed on the side where the light emitting means is not disposed in the second electric decoration substrates 6334 and 6344, or light may be emitted from both sides.

  Further, for the purpose of making the direction of light irradiation oblique, an apparatus capable of changing the attitude of the light emitting means may be configured without adopting a method of increasing the number of electric decoration substrates. Alternatively, light emitting means may be disposed at the intersections of the electric decoration substrates 332 and 342 and the second electric decoration substrates 6334 and 6344 so that light can be emitted.

  A substrate box A100 according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 120. First, a schematic configuration of the substrate box A100 will be described with reference to FIGS. The same parts as those in each embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 104 is a rear view of a pachinko machine A10 according to the seventh embodiment, FIG. 105 is a front perspective view of a substrate box A100 according to the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 106 is a rear perspective view of the substrate box A100. FIG. 107 (a) is a front view of the substrate box A100, and FIG. 107 (b) is a side view of the substrate box A100.

  Arrows F and B, arrows L and R, and arrows U and D in FIGS. 105 to 107 respectively indicate the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction of the substrate box A100. In addition, since the same applies to each of the following drawings, the description thereof is omitted.

  The pachinko machine A10 according to the seventh embodiment is the same as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment except for the substrate box A100. Therefore, the other description is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 104 to 107, in the substrate box A100, the box cover A200, the box base A300 whose opening is covered by the box cover A200, and the box cover A200 and the box base A300 are connected unsealably (the caulking structure And a sub cover A500 disposed at the end of the box cover A200 connected by the sealing unit A400 and the opposite end of the sealing unit A400 of the box base A300, and the main controller A110 (see FIG. 112) is stored.

  A rotation axis A410 is formed in the sealing unit A400. The rotation axis A410 is an axis for rotatably supporting the substrate box A100 on the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 120), and the short direction (arrows U and D) of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200) And a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R) of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200).

  In the front view (arrow B direction), the rotation axis A410 is one side of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200) in the longitudinal direction (opposite to the first connection wall A220 across the covering portion A270 described later, arrow It is disposed on the R direction side). The rotation axis A410 may be disposed on the other side in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction) opposite to the one side in the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200).

  The switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 are disposed (mounted) in the main control device A 110. The main controller A110 is configured by further arranging (mounting) the switch device A120 and the key device A130 on the main controller 110 in the first embodiment. That is, the main control device A 110 and the main control device 110 in the first embodiment have the same configuration except for the presence or absence of the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130. Therefore, the other description is omitted.

  The switch device A120 is operated (turned on) by the operation unit A 122 being pushed in from the initial position and turned off by the depression being released (the operation unit A 122 is returned to the initial position). It is configured as a switch and is used as an input to the main controller A110. The switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 correspond to part of various switches 208 (see FIG. 4) in the main control device A 110 (main control device 110).

  The switch device A 120 is configured to generate a predetermined click feeling (change in pushing force) when the operation unit A 122 is pushed to the operation position (position to be turned on), and the main control is performed based on the click feeling. The operator can detect the completion of the input to the device A110. Therefore, it is effective when it is necessary to operate the operation unit A 122 in a situation where it can not be visually recognized.

  In the key device A130, the key A140 can be inserted and removed in an initial position (hereinafter referred to as "off position"), and the key A140 inserted in the off position is rotated (in this embodiment, rotated clockwise) to a predetermined position (hereinafter referred to as "on" A key operated selector switch (mode) which is operated (turned on) by being placed in the “position” and turned off when the key A 140 is rotated (left-turned in this embodiment) and placed in the off position. Configured as a changeover switch).

  In the present embodiment, the phase difference between the off position and the on position is set to approximately 90 degrees. In the key position A130, in the off position, the key A140 can be inserted and removed, whereas in the on position, the key A140 can not be extracted.

  Further, the function of the switch device A 120 can be switched according to the on / off state of the key device A 130. For example, in the present embodiment, in the state where the key device A130 is turned off, the switch device A120 functions as a reset switch (RAM clear switch) that initializes the main control device A110 (executes the RAM erase), In a state where A130 is turned on, as described later, switch device A 120 is exemplified as a configuration changing switch for changing the value of the winning probability in the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “setting change”). .

  Here, as described above, since the substrate box A100 (the box cover A200 and the box base A300) is connected unopenably, in order to operate the main control device A110 (for example, the switch device A120 or the key device A130) It is necessary to open the substrate box A100, which takes time and effort.

  On the other hand, according to the substrate box A100 in the present embodiment, the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the box cover A200, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated via the openings A250 and A260. That is, it is possible to suppress trouble because it is unnecessary to open the substrate box A100. Details will be described later.

  Legs A121 and A131 (electrical connection terminals, see FIG. 114) are provided on the back side of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (the pressing direction side of the operation unit A122, the inserting direction of the key A140, and the arrow B direction). The switch device A 120 and the key device are formed by soldering a portion in which the legs A 121 and A 131 are inserted from the front side into the hole opened in the main controller A 110 (printed circuit board A 119) and the back side protrudes. A130 is disposed on the front side of main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

  In this case, in a plane including arrows U and D and arrows L and R, a force for displacing the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 in an external force (for example, the operation unit A 122 or the key A 140 in a direction orthogonal to the push-in direction). When a force in a parallel direction is applied and tilted with respect to the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119), a leg of one side of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (side lifted from the printed circuit board A119 by tilting) While a tensile force is applied to A121 and A131, a compressive force is applied to the legs A121 and A131 on the other side (the side pressed against the printed circuit board A119 by tilting). Therefore, breakage or bending of the legs A121, A131, detachment of the legs A121, A131 from the holes, peeling of the solder may occur, which may cause disconnection or contact failure. On the other hand, in the substrate box A100, means for solving such a problem is adopted. Details will be described later.

  Main controller 100 includes a plurality (four in the present embodiment) of 7-segment displays (not shown), and the 7-segment displays are mounted on printed circuit board A119. In addition, since box cover A200 is comprised from the transparent resin material, a worker can visually recognize the display of 7 segment indicator via box cover A200.

  Here, a method of setting change using the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 will be described.

  First, in a state where the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off, the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 is disposed at the on position, and then the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed to the operating position. Turn on the power. Thus, the setting change mode is activated, and the setting is changed each time the operation unit A 122 of the switch device A 120 is pressed.

  In the present embodiment, first to sixth six values are defined as the setting values, and these values are circulated (for example, the setting value is changed from the first value to the first value by the pressing operation of the operation unit A 122). When the operation unit A 122 is pushed in from the state set to the sixth value, the setting value proceeds to the first value).

  The set value is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 which is a liquid crystal display (display device), and the third symbol display device is operated when the operation unit A 122 of the switch device A 120 is pushed in (when the set value is changed). The setting values displayed on 81 are also changed. In the present embodiment, the set value is also displayed on the 7-segment display.

  In addition, the information regarding the setting change displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is not limited to the setting value, and may include other information. As other information, the current mode (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode), the previous setting value, etc. are exemplified. As described above, by using the third symbol display device 81, the amount of information that can be displayed can be secured (large) compared to, for example, the case where a 7-segment display is used. As a result, the operation state can be easily grasped, and operability can be improved and operation errors can be suppressed. In addition, the product cost can be reduced by sharing the device (the third symbol display device 81) for displaying the information on the game.

  In addition, the display of the setting value may be displayed on only one of the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display and may not be displayed on the other. Alternatively, both the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display may not be displayed.

  After changing the desired setting value, the key A 140 inserted into the key device A 130 is placed in the off position. Thus, the setting change mode is ended (setting values are determined). In this case, the off edge of the key device A 130 is detected, and the power recovery processing is executed triggered by the detection, and the normal mode with the set (changed) set value is activated.

  In addition, after changing the desired setting value, the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off without arranging the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the off position (that is, in the state of being arranged in the on position). By turning on the power of the pachinko machine A10 in a state where the key A140 of the key device A130 is placed in the off position, the normal mode with the set value (changed) is also activated.

  Further, in the setting change mode, the RAM erase is executed. Such RAM erasure is determined by disposing the key A 140 inserted into the key device A 130 in the off position. The timing to execute the RAM erase is exemplified by the timing when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on, the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from that timing, the timing when the key A 140 is arranged at the off position, and the like. That is, the timing to execute the RAM erase can be set appropriately.

  Further, in the setting change mode (that is, in a state in which the setting value can be changed by pressing the operation unit A 122 of the switch device A 120, the key A 140 inserted in the key device A 130 is not arranged in the off position ( That is, when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off in the state of being placed in the on position), the key A140 is extracted from the key device A130 or the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 is removed. When the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on in the state of being placed in the off position, the activation in the normal mode is not performed, and an error state is set, and an error display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. At the same time as or instead of the third symbol display device 81, an error display may be displayed on the 7-segment display.

  Then, the confirmation of the set value set in the setting change mode is performed by first turning off the pachinko machine A10, placing the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the on position, and then powering the pachinko machine A10. Turn on. Thereby, a setting confirmation mode for confirming the setting value is activated, and the setting value set at that time is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display.

  The display of the setting value in the setting confirmation mode may be displayed on only one of the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display and may not be displayed on the other. Alternatively, both the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display may not be displayed.

  In this setting confirmation mode, the key A 140 inserted into the key device A 130 is placed in the off position. Thus, the setting confirmation mode is ended. Further, the off-edge of the key device A 130 is detected, and the power recovery processing is executed triggered by the detection, and the normal mode with the set value set at that time is activated.

  In the setting confirmation mode, the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off, and the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on while the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 is disposed at the off position. The normal mode with the set values set is activated.

  In the present embodiment, when the change of the setting value in the setting change mode is completed (confirmed), the 7-segment display is issued in a predetermined mode. As a predetermined mode, for example, a mode in which a predetermined display (for example, "7") is blinked at a constant time interval is exemplified.

  In addition, a 4-segment display enables four-digit display by arranging four in parallel, and the mode is displayed by the first two digits (two) (for example, “01” in the setting change mode) However, in the setting confirmation mode, “02” is displayed respectively, and the setting value is displayed by two digits (two pieces) in the latter half (for example, the first value is “01”, the second value is “ 02 ”,... And the sixth value“ 06 ”is displayed respectively.

  Next, each component (box cover A200, box base A300, and main controller A110) constituting the substrate box A100 will be described in order with reference to FIGS. 108 to 114. First, the box cover A 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110.

  108 is a front perspective view of the box cover A 200, FIG. 109 is a rear perspective view of the box cover A 200, and FIG. 110 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the box cover A 200 in the arrow CXa direction view of FIG. FIG. 110 (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the box cover A 200 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXb in FIG. 109.

  As shown in FIGS. 108 to 110, the box cover A200 is formed from a front wall A201 formed in a plate shape having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view and a front wall A201 from the four sides to the back side (arrow B direction). The wall portions (upper wall A 202, lower wall A 203, left wall A 204 and right wall A 205 connecting the upper wall A 202 and the lower wall A 203) are formed These wall portions A201 to A205 are formed in a box shape whose back side is opened. The box cover A200 is made of a light transmitting resin material and is molded using a resin mold.

  Two steps are formed on the standing front end surfaces (surfaces in the direction of arrow B) of the upper wall A 202, the lower wall A 203, the left wall A 204, and the right wall A 205. In the step, a first surface (first step) is formed on the inner space side of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200), and a second surface is formed on the outer side (the opposite side to the inner space) of the first surface. A face (first stage) is formed. The first surface is lower than the second surface (the height from the front wall A201 is smaller), and the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) is mounted (hereinafter referred to as "seating surface A206") (Referred to as

  The seat surface A206 is formed in a substantially rectangular frame shape in front view in which the surfaces (first surfaces) of the wall portions A201 to A205 are continuous, and is formed as a surface parallel to the front wall portion A201. A fastening hole A206a in which a female screw is screwed on the inner periphery is recessed at four corner portions of the seating surface A206 (the portions where the surfaces (first surfaces) of the wall portions A201 to A205 are connected). Be done.

  Therefore, main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) brings the outer edge side of the front surface into contact with seat surface A206, and screw ASC (see FIG. 12) inserted through insertion hole A112 of main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119). Screws 117 (b) and 118 (b) shown in FIG. 118 are screwed into the fastening holes A 206a, so that they are fastened and fixed to the box cover A 200 (seating surface A 206) in a posture parallel to the front wall A 201. It is stored.

  A plurality of engagement pieces A207 are juxtaposed at predetermined intervals on the upper wall A202 and the lower wall A203. The engagement piece A207 is extended in one direction (arrow R direction) from a base provided to stand from the upper wall A 202 and the lower wall A 203 to the back side (direction of arrow B) and the standing tip of the base It is formed in a shape bent in a substantially L shape from the extending portion, and is engaged with the engaged portion A307 of the box base A300 as described later.

  The front wall portion A201 is formed with a portion which is recessed toward the back side (the direction of the arrow B) in a part thereof. The recessed portion includes a plate-like operation wall A210 which is positioned to be retracted to the back side (the main control device 110 side) relative to the front wall A201, and the sides of the operation wall A210 as the front wall It is formed in the front wall A201 by the plate-like wall (1st connection wall A220, 2nd connection wall A230, and 3rd connection wall A240) connected to A201.

  That is, the outer surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the front side of the substrate box A100 is located closer to the main control device A110 than the first region formed by the front wall portion A201 and the first region. And a second region formed by the wall portion A210.

  The operation wall A210 is a portion that forms the operation surface of the switch device A120 or the key device A130, and is substantially horizontally long rectangular in a front view (the length in the arrows L and R with respect to the length in the arrows U and D) It is formed in a rectangular shape whose dimension is elongated, and is disposed in a posture substantially parallel to the front wall A201.

  The operation wall A210 is disposed on one side (the rotation axis A410 side of the sealing unit A400) than the longitudinal center of the box cover A200 in a front view (view in the arrow B direction).

  The first connection wall A220 is a wall connecting one side of the operation wall A210 in the longitudinal direction one side (arrow L direction) to the front wall A201, and from the front wall A201 to the operation wall A210 It inclines in the direction which approaches main controller A110 as it goes (falling down), and is formed. Therefore, a space can be formed on the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the first connection wall A220, which is continuous with the space on the front side (the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall A210. As a space obtained by combining the space on the front side of the operation wall A210, the space as a whole (a space that can be used when operating the key device A130) can be expanded.

  In the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the first connection wall A220 with respect to the front wall A201 and the operation wall A210 is set to about 45 degrees. Thereby, coexistence with expansion of the space in the front side (arrow F direction side) of wall part A210 for operation, and securing of the space inside substrate box A100 can be aimed at.

  The second connection wall A230 is a side on one side (arrow U direction side) of the operation wall A210 in the short side direction, and the third connection wall A240 is the other side of the operation wall A210 in the longitudinal direction (arrow R One side in the direction side) is a wall connected to the front wall A201, and is disposed in a posture substantially orthogonal to the front wall A201 and the operation wall A210.

  The operation wall A210 has an opening A250 for projecting the operation part A122 to the outside of the substrate box A100, an opening A260 for enabling the insertion and removal of the key A140 to and from the key device A130, and the main controller A110 ( Openings AOP1 to AOP8 are formed to enable connection to a connector (not shown) mounted on the printed circuit board A119).

  The opening A250 is formed in a shape (in the embodiment, substantially square in the front view) corresponding to the outer shape of the operation portion A122, and the opening A250 is substantially in the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R) of the operation wall A210. Centered Around the opening A250, a guide wall A251 is erected from the front (the outer surface, the surface on the arrow F direction) of the operation wall A210.

  The guide wall A 251 guides the displacement of the operation portion A 122 in the push-in direction (arrow B direction) and also displaces in a direction (parallel to a plane including arrows U and D and arrows L and R) orthogonal to the push-in direction. A portion for restricting (falling) is formed in a frame shape of a substantially square in a front view surrounding the opening A250, and an inner peripheral surface thereof is smoothly formed continuously with the inner peripheral surface of the opening A250.

  In the present embodiment, the vertical height of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall A210 is higher than the height of the operation wall A210 from the tip end of the operation portion A122 pushed to the operation position (the position to be turned on). The size is set such that the tip is at a low position (the tip of the operation portion A 122 is projected outward (in the direction of the arrow F) beyond the standing tip of the guide wall A 251). As a result, it is possible to avoid that the pushing operation of the operation portion A122 is inhibited by the guide wall A251, and the operability of the operation portion A122 can be improved.

  However, the erecting tip of the operation wall A210 is higher than the tip of the operating portion A122 in which the erected height of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall A210 is pushed to the operation position (position to be turned on) The dimensions may be set such that the end of the operation portion A122 is recessed inward (in the direction of the arrow B) with respect to the upright end of the guide wall A251. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress that the operation unit A 122 is unintentionally pushed (turned on) to the operation position by an operator's careless operation or contact (interference) with another member.

  In addition, the tip of the operation unit A 122, in which the vertical height of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall A210 is pushed to the operation position (the position to be turned on), is substantially the same as the front edge of the operation wall A210. You may set to the dimension which becomes the same height position. When pressing the operation unit A122, the finger is abutted against the erected end of the guide wall A251, so that the operator can recognize that the operation unit A122 has been pushed to the operation position on the basis of the contact. . This is effective when it is necessary to operate the operation unit A 122 in a situation where it can not be visually recognized.

  A covering portion A270 is provided on the operation wall portion A210 so as to protrude from the front surface (the outer surface, the surface on the arrow F direction). Cover portion A270 is a portion covering a part of the tip end side (the arrow F direction side) of key device A130 (see FIG. 112A), and is a peripheral wall which is erected from operation wall portion A210 and formed in a cylindrical shape Mainly includes a portion A271 and a plate-like end surface wall portion A272 that closes the projecting end of the peripheral wall portion A271 (forming an end surface), and a part of the tip end side of the key device A130 is accommodated in the internal space Ru.

  The peripheral wall portion A 271 has a base A 271 a formed in a cylindrical shape with a substantially circular cross section, and a pair of protrusions protruding radially outward from two opposing positions (positions different in phase by approximately 180 degrees) of the base A 271 a And A271b. The peripheral wall portion A 271 (the base A 271 a and the protrusion A 271 b) is formed in substantially the same cross-sectional shape along the axial direction (the directions of arrows F and B). Therefore, the operation wall A210 has substantially the same shape as the cross-sectional shape of the peripheral wall A271 (the base A271a and the projection A271b) (that is, the shape in which two opposing points in a circle are projected radially outward) The opening of is formed (see FIG. 110 (b)).

  The opening A260 is formed in the protruding end surface of the covering portion A270, that is, the end surface wall portion A272. Thus, the end surface wall portion A272 is formed in a plate shape extending radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the protruding end of the peripheral wall portion A271. That is, the end face wall portion A 272 is formed as a plate (cantilever) in which the base end is fixed to the inner circumferential surface of the peripheral wall portion A 271 and one end (opening A 260 side) is free.

  Here, the opening A 260 is provided only in a region (a region required to allow displacement) corresponding to the displacement trajectory of the key A 140 when the key A 140 is displaced (rotated) between the off position and the on position. It is formed. Specifically, the opening A 260 is a first fan-shaped opening with a central angle of about 90 degrees for permitting displacement of a portion on one side of the rotation center of the key A 140 and the other side of the rotation center of the key A 140 A second fan-shaped opening with a center angle of about 90 degrees for allowing displacement of the portion (opposite to the one side) is formed in a shape that is coupled with a phase difference of about 180 degrees.

  Thus, an annular portion A272a is formed on the end surface wall A272 so as to extend radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the protruding end of the peripheral wall A271 and to have a substantially annular shape in a front view (arrow B direction). And a square portion A 272 b extending inward in the radial direction from the inner edge of the annular portion A 272 a and formed in a substantially triangular shape in a front view (view in the arrow B direction). The square portion A 272 b is disposed in a tapered shape inward in the radial direction in a front view (view in the direction of arrow B), and is formed at two places having phases different by approximately 180 degrees.

  The key A 140 has dimensions in which the radius of gyration of the portion on one side of the center of rotation and the radius of gyration of the portion on the other side of the center of rotation are different. Therefore, the opening A 260 is an opening of a size (radius) in which the first fan-shaped opening and the second fan-shaped opening are different.

  A first protrusion A211 and a second protrusion A212 are provided in a projecting manner on the front surface (the outer surface, the surface on the arrow F direction) of the operation wall A210. The first protrusion A 211 and the second protrusion A 212 are protrusions extending like a stripe while maintaining a substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape, and one end thereof is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A 270 .

  Specifically, one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the projection A271b of the peripheral wall A271 at a position (phase) facing the edge of the key A140 in the off position, One end of the protrusion A 212 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base A 271 a of the peripheral wall A 271 at a position (phase) opposite to the edge of the key A 140 in the on position. That is, one end of the first protrusion A211 and one end of the second protrusion A212 are respectively connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 at a position where the phase is different by approximately 180 degrees.

  In addition, on the front surface (the outer surface, the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, a display portion is provided at a position adjacent to the other end of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 (extension of the other end). Are formed respectively. The display unit is a portion that indicates information on the operation position (rotational position) of the key A 140, and “OFF” and “ON” are displayed. That is, the key A 140 in the posture with its edge directed to one end of the first protrusion A 211 is disposed at the off position (see FIG. 115 (a)), and the key in the posture with its edge directed to one end of the second protrusion A 212 A 140 is placed in the on position (see FIG. 115 (b)).

  The openings AOP1 are formed in the operation wall A210, and the openings AOP2 to AOP8 are formed (arranged) in series along the edge of the front wall A201.

  Standing walls A280 and A290 are provided upright on the back surface (the inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall A210. The standing wall A280 includes a first standing wall A281, a second standing wall A282, a third standing wall A283 and a fourth standing wall A284, and the respective standing walls A281, A282, A283, A284 make an opening. A 250 is enclosed (see FIG. 110 (b)). Therefore, in the state in which main control device A110 is stored in substrate box A100, switch device A120 is surrounded by standing wall A280.

  The first upright wall A281 is disposed between the opening A250 and the second connection wall A230, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to each of the second connection wall A230 and the lower wall A203. The second upright wall A 282 and the third upright wall A 283 are disposed opposite to each other with the opening A 250 interposed therebetween, and are formed in a plate shape substantially orthogonal to the first upright wall A 281. The fourth upright wall A284 is disposed between the opening A250 and the lower wall portion A203, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to the first upright wall A281.

  One side of the second vertical wall A 282 and the third vertical wall A 283 are connected to the first vertical wall A 281, and the other side is connected to the lower wall portion A 203. That is, the first standing wall A281 is connected to the lower wall portion A203 via the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283. Moreover, one side of the fourth standing wall A284 is connected to the second standing wall A282, and the other side is connected to the third standing wall A283.

  In addition, the erection wall A290 includes a first erection wall A291, a second erection wall A292 and a third erection wall A293, and the respective erection walls A291, A292, A293 enclose the opening A260 (FIG. 110). (B)). Therefore, the key device A130 is surrounded by the standing wall A290 in a state where the main control device A110 is housed in the substrate box A100.

  The first upright wall A291 is disposed between the opening A260 and the second connection wall A230, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to each of the second connection wall A230 and the lower wall A203. The second upright wall A292 and the third upright wall A293 are disposed opposite to each other across the opening A260, and are formed in a plate shape substantially orthogonal to the first upright wall A291.

  One side of the second upright wall A292 and the third upright wall A293 is connected to the first upright wall A291, and the other side is connected to the lower wall portion A203. That is, the first upright wall A291 is connected to the lower wall portion A203 via the second upright wall A292 and the third upright wall A293. Moreover, one side of the fourth standing wall A284 is connected to the second standing wall A292, and the other side is connected to the third standing wall A293.

  The upright wall A290 is formed in a size (a position that is more outward than the covering portion A270) surrounding the periphery of the covering portion A270 in a front view (view in the arrow B direction). Specifically, in a front view (arrow B direction view), the outer surface (arc) of the base A271a in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270 is the inner surface (straight line) of the second upright wall A292 and the third upright wall A293. The outer surfaces (arcs) of the projecting portions A 271 b in the peripheral wall portion A 271 of the covering portion A 270 are inscribed to the inner surfaces (straight lines) of the first standing wall A 291 and the lower wall portion A 203 respectively.

  The first standing walls A281 and A291, the second standing walls A282 and A292, and the third standing walls A283 and A293 in the standing walls A280 and A290 are the back surfaces (inner surface, arrow B direction side) of the operating wall A210. The heights from the surface) are the same, and the front end surfaces (surfaces in the direction of arrow B) of the respective walls A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, A293 are the seat surface A206. It is placed at the same height position as.

  Therefore, in the standing walls A280 and A290, the leading end faces of the second standing walls A282 and A292 and the third standing walls A283 and A293 are connected to the seat surface A206, and the seat surface A206 and the respective standing walls A281 and A293 , A282, A292, A283 and A293 are positioned in the same plane (forming the same plane). Thus, when the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) is fastened and fixed to the box cover A200 (seating surface A206), the first standing walls A281 and A291, the second standing walls A282 and A292, and the third standing wall The standing front end surfaces (surfaces on the arrow B direction side) of the walls A283 and A293 are in contact with the front surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119).

  Here, in the standing wall A280, the length dimensions (dimensions in the directions of arrows U and D) of the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283 are the length dimensions of the first standing wall A281 (arrow L, L, The value is larger than the dimension in the R direction. Therefore, as described later, when the outer surface of the tilted switch device A 120 is in contact with the inner surface of the standing wall A 280 (the second standing wall A 282 and the third standing wall A 283), the second standing wall There is a possibility that A282 and the 3rd standing wall A283 may change, and it can not control inclination of switch device A120.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the facing between the second upright wall A 282 and the third upright wall A 283 is connected by the fourth upright wall A 284, so the second upright wall A 282 and the third upright wall The deformation of A283 can be suppressed. As a result, tilting of the switch device A 120 can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the material volume in the vicinity of the fourth standing wall A 284 is increased by arranging the fourth standing wall A 284 at a position close to the lower wall A 203. This corresponds to the formation of a part having a large plate thickness, and the forming defect in the part having a large plate thickness and the vicinity thereof due to the difference in contraction rate with other parts. Make it happen.

  On the other hand, the standing height of the fourth standing wall A 284 is smaller (lower) than the standing heights of the first standing wall A 281, the second standing wall A 282 and the third standing wall A 283. As a result, the material volume in the vicinity of the fourth standing wall A284 is reduced while securing the function of suppressing the deformation of the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283, and the molding failure due to the difference in shrinkage rate Can be suppressed.

  Further, as the fourth upright wall A284 is provided at a position closer to the opening A250 than the lower wall portion A203, as described later, such a switch against tilting of the switch device A120 in the direction of arrow D The outer surface of the device A120 can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the fourth upright wall A284, and the tilt thereof can be suppressed within an appropriate range (that is, at a smaller angle than in the case of contact with the lower wall portion A203). .

  On the inner surface of the front end of the first standing walls A281 and A291, the second standing walls A282 and A292, and the third standing walls A283 and A293 in the standing walls A280 and A290, the leading end side (arrow B Tapered surfaces A280a and A290a, which are inclined surfaces closer to the outer surface side in the direction of the direction, are formed. Thereby, the thickness dimension (plate thickness dimension) at the erected tip of each erected wall A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, A293 is gradually decreased toward the erected tip side, and the erected wall A281 is correspondingly reduced , A291, A282, A292, A283, A293, and the area of the front end face (surface on the arrow B direction side) is reduced.

  The tapered surfaces A280a and A290a may be omitted. In addition, the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a are formed on the outer surfaces of the first standing walls A281 and A291, the second standing walls A282 and A292, and the third standing walls A283 and A293 in the standing walls A280 and A290, respectively. It may be provided.

  An erecting wall A208 is erected on the back surface (the inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the front wall A201. In addition to the above-mentioned standing walls A280 and A290, a standing wall A209 is provided upright on the back surface (the inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall A210.

  The standing wall A208 is formed in a box shape that connects the plate-like members of four sides and opens on the opposite side to the front wall portion A201, and is an arithmetic device (MPU 201) mounted on the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) 4) is formed at the position corresponding to the The upright wall A209 has an inner shape corresponding to the opening AOP1 and is formed in a box shape whose opposite side to the operation wall A210 is open, and is a connector mounted on the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) It is formed at the position corresponding to. Therefore, in a state where the main control device A110 is housed in the substrate box A100, the computing device (MPU 201) is surrounded by the standing wall A208 and the connector is surrounded by the standing wall A209.

  Here, as for the plurality of erected walls A208, A209, A280, A290 that respectively surround the plurality of objects, the height position of the erected front end surface of one or more erected walls corresponds to the erected construction of the remaining erected walls It is set to a height position different from the height position of the tip surface. In the present embodiment, the height position of the standing front end surface of the standing installation wall A209 is recessed from the height position of the standing installation front end faces of the standing installation walls A208, A280 and A290 (that is, separated from the printed circuit board A119) Located on the Thereby, even if there is a dimensional tolerance of the erected walls A208, A209, A280, A290, a mounting tolerance of the printed circuit board A119 to the box cover A200, or a dimensional tolerance of the printed circuit A119 (for example, variation in flatness). As compared with the standing wall A209, the leading end faces of the standing walls A208, A280, and A290 can be easily adhered to the printed circuit board A119. That is, the close contact of the erected wall surrounding the highly important object with the printed circuit board A 119 can be secured.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the box base A 300 will be described. Fig. 111 (a) is a front perspective view of the box base A300, and Fig. 111 (b) is a rear perspective view of the box base A300.

  As shown in FIG. 111, the box base A300 is erected from the four sides of the rear wall A301 formed in a plate shape having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view and the rear wall A301 toward the front side (arrow F direction). Mainly provided with wall portions (upper wall A 302, lower wall A 303, left wall A 304 and right wall A 305 connecting the upper wall A 302 and lower wall A 303) formed in a plate shape, These wall portions A301 to A305 form a box whose front side is open. The box base A 300 is made of a resin material and is molded using a resin mold.

  A plurality of engaged portions A 307 are provided in parallel on the upper wall portion A 302 and the lower wall portion A 303 at predetermined intervals. The engaged portion A307 is a portion with which the engagement piece A207 of the box cover A200 is engaged, and is formed to project downward (in the direction of the arrow D).

  The connection between the box base A300 and the box cover A200 is first phased by the extension length of the extension portion on the opposite side (arrow L direction side) of the extension portion of the engagement piece A207. Face each other at the shifted position, and push the box cover A200 toward the box base A300. As a result, the engaging piece A207 enters the space between adjacent engaged portions A307, and then, the box cover A200 is extended with respect to the box base A300, and the extending direction of the extending portion in the engaging piece A207 ( Slide to the direction of arrow R). As a result, the engaging piece A207 enters the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the engaged portion A307, and both are engaged (the displacement of the box cover A200 in the arrow F direction is restricted).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114, main controller A110 will be described. FIG. 112 (a) is a front perspective view of main controller A110, FIG. 112 (b) is a rear perspective view of main controller A110, and FIG. 113 is a main perspective view of portion CXIII in FIG. 112 (a). It is a partial enlargement front perspective view of control device A110.

  FIG. 114 (a) is a front view of main controller A110 in the direction of arrow CXIVa in FIG. 112 (a), and FIG. 114 (b) is the main controller A110 in the direction of arrow CXIVb in FIG. FIG. 114 (c) is a side view of the main control device A110 as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIVc in FIG. 114 (a).

  In FIG. 112 to FIG. 114, in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, only main ones of various electronic components mounted on the printed circuit board A 119 are shown, and the other illustration is omitted. .

  As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, main controller A110 includes printed circuit board A119, and switch device A120 and key device A130 mounted on printed circuit board A119. The printed circuit board A119 mounts various electronic components (ICs, resistors, capacitors, transistors, etc.) on a plate made of an insulating resin material, and the circuit (pattern) connecting between the electronic components is a conductor such as copper foil The through holes A112 are formed in the four corner portions.

  The printed circuit board A119 is a substrate box A100 in a posture in which the front surface (the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted, the surface on the arrow F direction side) faces the back surface of the box cover A200 (front wall portion A201). Housed in

  In this case, at least the areas AS1 and AS2 of the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 where the standing front end surfaces of the standing walls A280 and A290 of the box cover A200 and the seating surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 abut (see FIG. (See (a)) The electronic parts are not mounted or the circuit is not formed, and the areas AS1 and AS2 are formed as flat surfaces. In FIG. 114 (a), only the portion connected to the upright walls A280 and A290 in the area where the seat surface A206 abuts is illustrated.

  The switch device A120 includes a main body A123 for holding the operation portion A122 so that displacement (pushing operation) is possible, and a coil spring for disposing an urging force for returning the operation portion A122 to the initial position. Biasing means (not shown), a contact (not shown) disposed inside the main body A123 and whose contact is switched according to the displacement of the operation portion A122, and a leg A121 electrically connected to the contact Prepare.

  The main body A123 includes a base portion A123a formed in a substantially cubic shape and mounted on the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, and a cylindrical projection A123b projecting from the front surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the base portion A123a The outer diameter dimension of the protrusion A 123 b is larger than the maximum dimension (diagonal length) of the opening A 250 (inner edge of the guide wall A 251). In a state in which the main control device A110 is housed in the substrate box A100, the front of the protrusion A123b and the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall A210 face each other.

  In the present embodiment, a portion protruding from the bottom of the base A123a (a part of the bottom of the base A123a and a portion from which the leg A121 protrudes) is in contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the base A123a (a part of the bottom surface of the base A123a and where the leg A121 protrudes) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the base A123a may be raised from the front of the printed circuit board A119 by the leg A121.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface of the protrusion A 123 b and the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall A 210. However, the front surface of the protrusion A 123 b may be in contact with the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall A 210.

  The leg A121 is protruded from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side, the surface facing the printed circuit board A119) of the base A123a in the main body A123, and is inserted from the front into the hole opened in the printed circuit A119 as described above. The part projected on the back side is soldered. As a result, the switch device A120 is disposed (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

  The key device A130 has a cylinder portion A132 formed as a lock that allows rotation of the inner cylinder A132a relative to the outer cylinder A132b when the compatible key A140 is inserted into the inner cylinder A132a, and the cylinder portion A132 disposed therein. Contacts that are switched according to the state of the main body A133 to be held and the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the main body A133 and the state of the cylinder portion A132 (rotational position of the inner cylinder A132a with respect to the outer cylinder A132b) (Not shown) and a leg A131 electrically connected to the contact point.

  The main body A133 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape, and a base A133a for holding the cylinder portion A132 on the inner peripheral side (inside) and two positions (a phase is different by approximately 180 degrees) on the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base A133a And an end A133c forming an end surface on the tip end side (the arrow F direction side) of the base A133a.

  In the present embodiment, a portion protruding from the bottom surface of the main body A133 (a part of the bottom surface of the main body A133 and from which the leg A131 protrudes) is in contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the main body A133 (a part of the bottom surface of the main body A133 and from which the leg A131 is projected) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the main body A 133 may be raised from the front of the printed circuit board A 119 by the leg A 131.

  The end face on the arrow F direction side of the protrusion A 133 b is formed at a position (arrow B direction side) one step lower than the end face (face on the arrow F direction side) formed by the end A 133 c. The end A133 c is formed with a circular opening in a front view at a position substantially concentric with the base A 133 a, and the key A 140 can be inserted into and removed from the cylinder portion A 132 (inner cylinder A 132 a) through the opening. .

  When the main control unit A110 is housed in the substrate box A100, a part of the tip end side (the arrow F direction side) of the main body A133 is housed in the internal space of the covering portion A270.

  Specifically, the outer diameter of the base A133a of the main body A133 is set to a value equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the base A271a in the peripheral wall A271 of the covering portion A270, and the projecting shape of the projection A133b of the main body A133 is coated The recessed portion A271 of the peripheral wall portion A271 in the portion A270 is formed in a size equal to or slightly smaller than the recessed shape of the protruding portion A271b, whereby the base A133a of the main body A133 is on the inner peripheral side (inner side) of the base A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271 The protrusion A 133 b of A 133 is accommodated on the inner peripheral side (inner side) of the protrusion A 271 b of the peripheral wall portion A 271.

  Further, in this case, a predetermined gap is present between the front (end face, face in the arrow F direction) of the end A133c of the main body A133 and the back face (face in the arrow B direction) of the end face wall A272 in the covering portion A270. It is formed. The front surface of the end A133c may be in contact with the back surface of the end surface wall A272.

  The leg A131 is protruded from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side, the surface facing the printed circuit board A119) of the base A133a in the main body A133, and is inserted from the front into the hole opened in the printed circuit A119 as described above The part projected on the back side is soldered. As a result, the key device A130 is disposed (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

  The support A 134 has an opening formed substantially at the center, and a base portion A 134 a through which the main body A 133 (the base A 133 a and the protrusion A 133 b) is inserted and the two opposing sides of the base portion A 134 a toward the printed circuit board A 119 A pair of extending portions A134b extending and a pair of reinforcing portions A134c extending toward the printed circuit board A119 from the remaining two sides of the base portion A134a, the metal plate member is bent and integrated Is formed.

  The extending length of the extending portion A134b from the base portion A134a is larger than the extending length of the reinforcing portion A134c from the base portion A134a, and the extending end surface of the extending portion A134b (surface on the arrow B direction side) Is brought into contact with the front surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119. Further, a leg A134b1 is provided so as to protrude from the extending end surface of the extending portion A134b. The support A 134 is disposed on the front side of the printed circuit board A 119 and is supported by being soldered by inserting the leg A 134 b 1 into the hole opened in the printed circuit board A 119 from the front side and soldering the projecting portion to the back side. As a result, the main body A 133 can be supported by the support A 134, and tilting of the main body A 133 with respect to the printed circuit board A 119 can be suppressed by the support A 134.

  A gap may be provided between the extended end surface (the surface on the arrow B direction) of the extended portion A 134 b and the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction) of the printed circuit board A 119. That is, the support A 134 may be raised from the front of the printed circuit board A 119 by the leg A 131. In this case, the heat dissipation of the key device A 130 can be enhanced by the gap.

  On the other hand, the extension length from the base portion A 134 a of the extension portion A 134 b and the extension length from the reinforcing portion A 134 c may be the same. That is, the extended end surface (surface on the arrow B direction) of the reinforcing portion A 134 c may also be configured to abut on the front surface (surface on the arrow F direction) of the printed circuit board A 119. In this case, the main body A133 is supported by both the extending portion A134b and the reinforcing portion A134c, and thus the main body A133 can be more firmly suppressed from being inclined with respect to the printed circuit board A119. Moreover, it can suppress that foreign substances, such as a wire, enter into the leg A131 side of key device A130.

  Also, soldering of the leg A134b1 is omitted, and the leg A134b1 is formed into a cross-sectional shape in which the leg A134b1 is bent in a substantially V-shape or an approximately S-shape, and inserted elastically into the hole of the printed board A119. It is good also as composition to do. That is, the leg A134b1 may be resiliently engaged with the inner peripheral surface (inner surface) of the hole of the printed circuit board A119 using the elastic recovery force of the leg A134b1. Since the soldering can be omitted, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Alternatively, in addition to the elastic engagement of the leg A 134 b 1 with the hole, soldering may also be performed. It can be more strongly suppressed that the leg A134b1 comes out of the hole. Thus, the function of the support A 134 for supporting the tilting of the main body A 133 can be further enhanced.

  In the leg A134b1, the width (arrows L and B, the dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 114B) is set to a larger value than the thickness of the plate-like member constituting the support A134 (ie, the cross section of the leg A134b1 The hole of the printed circuit board A119 through which the leg A134b1 is inserted is formed in a rectangular shape. As a result, when the rigidity of the leg A134b1 is enhanced and the tilting of the main body A133 is supported by the support A134, it is possible to suppress deformation or breakage of the base of the leg A134b1 (the connecting portion with the extending portion A134b).

  However, the width dimension of the leg A 134 b 1 may be substantially the same as the thickness dimension. That is, the cross-sectional shape of the leg A 134 b 1 may be square.

  Further, by forming the reinforcing portions A134c on two opposing sides of the support A134, it is possible to control the bending and twisting of the base portion A134a. As a result, the rigidity of the entire support A 134 can be enhanced, and the function of supporting the main body A 133 can be enhanced, so that the tilt of the main body A 133 with respect to the printed circuit board A 119 can be more firmly regulated (suppressed).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 115 to 119, the detailed configuration of the substrate box A100 will be described.

  FIG. 115 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the substrate box A100 in a state in which the key A140 is operated to the off position, and FIG. 115 (b) is a substrate box A100 in a state in which the key A140 is operated to the on position. 116 (a) is a partial enlarged side view of the substrate box A100 in the direction of arrow CXVIa of FIG. 115 (a), and FIG. 116 (b) is a partial enlarged front view of FIG. 115 (b). It is a partial expanded side view of substrate box A100 in arrow CXVIb direction view.

  FIG. 117 (a) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 along the cutting line CXVIIa-CXVIIa of FIG. 115 (a), and FIG. 117 (b) is the substrate along the cutting line CXVIIb-CXVIIb of FIG. FIG. 118 (a) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 along the cutting line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa of FIG. 115 (a), and FIG. 118 (b) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the box A100. It is the elements on larger scale sectional view of substrate box A100 in cutting line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb of a).

  FIG. 119 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 along the cutting line CXIXa-CXIXa in FIG. 116 (a), and FIG. 119 (b) is the substrate along the cutting line CXIXb-CXIXb in FIG. 116 (a) It is a partial expanded sectional view of box A100.

  In FIGS. 117 to 119, in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, the internal structure is not shown, but a single hatching is applied to the cross section to schematically show the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130. It illustrates in figure.

  As shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, in the substrate box A100, a covering portion A270 protrudes from the front surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 of the box cover A200, and the covering portion A270 protrudes An opening A 260 is formed in the end surface wall portion A 272 that forms the tip end surface (surface on the arrow F direction side). This makes it difficult for the tip of a foreign object such as a wire to reach the opening A 260.

  For example, in the case where the opening A 260 can not be visually recognized by a person who performs fraud by a shield or the like, and it is difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire into the opening A 260, the tip of the foreign substance such as a wire is box cover A200 (for operation A method of sliding on the front surface (the outer surface, the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the wall portion A210) to reach the opening A260 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the covering portion A270 is protruded from the front surface (outer surface) of the operation wall portion A210, the tip of a foreign object such as a wire is slid on the front surface (outside surface) of the operation wall portion A210. The tip of a foreign object such as a wire can be abutted against the outer surface of the covering portion A 270 (the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion A 271) to stop further movement (sliding). That is, the outer surface of the covering portion A270 (peripheral wall portion A271) can function as a wall that restricts the sliding of foreign matter such as a wire. As a result, insertion of foreign matter such as a wire can be suppressed from the opening A260.

  The covering portion A270 has an internal space, and a part of the tip end side (one end side, arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 of the main control device A110 is accommodated in the internal space. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a part of the front end side of the key device A130.

  Thereby, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent. That is, when a foreign substance such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 from the opening A260, a path through which the foreign substance such as the wire passes (a gap between the end wall A272 and the end A133c, and a peripheral wall A271 (A path formed by the gap between the base A133a and the projection A133b) is bent, and a wall (a wire passing through the gap between the end wall A272 and the end A133c) The wall against which the tip of the foreign object abuts, that is, the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A 271) can be formed in the path. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the main controller A110 is tampered with by the foreign matter such as the inserted wire (see FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)).

  The key device A130 is formed by inserting a substantially cylindrical main body A133 into a support A134 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped outer shape. In this case, the width dimension (the dimension in the horizontal direction of FIGS. 117A and 117B) of the support A 134 is the inner diameter dimension of the covering portion A 270 (the peripheral wall portion A271) (FIGS. 117A and 117B). Is set to a value larger than the horizontal dimension of

  Thereby, the upper surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the support A 134 can be made to face the inner surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall A 210. Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent.

  That is, when a foreign substance such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 from the opening A260, a path through which the foreign substance such as the wire passes (formed by a gap between the peripheral wall A271 and the base A133a and the projection A133b (A) the wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire passes through the gap between the peripheral wall A 271 and the base A 133 a and the projection A 133 b In addition, for foreign objects such as wires whose traveling direction has been changed by striking the upper surface of the support A 134, the inner surfaces of the erected walls A 291, A 292, A 293 and the lower wall A 203 are formed in the path. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the main controller A110 is tampered with by the foreign matter such as the inserted wire (see FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)).

  A protrusion A 271 b is formed on the peripheral wall portion A 271 of the covering portion A 270, a protrusion A 133 b is formed on the main body A 133, and a base A 133 a of the main body A 133 is on the inner peripheral side (inner side) of the base A 271 a of the peripheral wall portion A 271 The protrusion A133 b of the main body A 133 is accommodated on the inner peripheral side (inner side) of the protrusion A 271 b of the peripheral wall portion A 271.

  Thus, the outer surface in the circumferential direction of the protrusion A 133 b (the surface on the arrow L, R direction side) can be made to face the inner surface in the circumferential direction of the protrusion A 271 b (the surface in the arrow L, R direction). Therefore, the gap between the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can be bent.

  That is, when a foreign substance such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 from the opening A260, a path along which the foreign substance such as the wire passes (a gap between the peripheral wall A271 and the base A133a and the projection A133b in the circumferential direction A path formed along the wall is bent and a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire abuts (a tip of the foreign object such as a wire passing along a circumferential direction between the peripheral wall A271 and the base A133a and the projection A133b) The wall on which the end portion abuts, that is, the outer surface in the circumferential direction of the protrusion A 133 b and the inner surface in the circumferential direction of the protrusion A 271 b can be formed in the path. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the main controller A110 is tampered with by an inserted foreign object such as a wire (see FIG. 118 (a)).

  In the switch device A120, the outer diameter dimension of the protrusion A123b is set to a value larger than the maximum dimension (diagonal length) of the opening A250 (inner edge of the guide wall A251). Thereby, the upper surface (the surface on the arrow F direction) of the protrusion A 123 b can be made to face the inner surface (the surface on the arrow B direction) of the operation wall A 210. Therefore, the gap between the inner surfaces of the guide wall A 251 and the operation wall A 210 and the outer surface of the switch device A 120 can be bent.

  That is, when a foreign substance such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 from the opening A250, a path through which the foreign substance such as the wire passes (the guide wall A251 and the operation wall A210, and the operation portion A122 and the projection A123b (A path formed by the gap between them) is bent, and a wall against which the tip of the foreign substance such as a wire abuts (a wall against which the tip of the foreign substance such as a wire passes through the gap between the guide wall A251 and the operation portion A122) The upper surface of the projection A123b, and the foreign material such as a wire whose traveling direction is changed by hitting the upper surface of the projection A123b, the inner wall of the erected walls A281, A282, A283 and the lower wall portion A203) It can be formed in. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the main controller A110 is tampered with by the foreign matter such as the inserted wire (see FIGS. 118 (a) and 118 (b)).

  As described above, the covering portion A 270 has an internal space, and a part of the tip end side (one end side, arrow F direction side) of the key device A 130 of the main control device A 110 is accommodated in the internal space. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a part of the front end side of the key device A130.

  Thereby, the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can face each other in a direction (parallel to a plane including arrows U and D and arrows L and R) orthogonal to the insertion direction of the key A140. Thus, for example, due to the worker's careless operation or violent operation on the key A 140 inserted into the key device A 130, or the collision of other members with the key A 140 at the time of opening the inner frame 12 to the outer frame 11, etc. When an external force is applied to the key A 140 in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction, the outer surface of the key device A 130 can be made to abut on the inner surface of the covering portion 170 to suppress (restrict) tilting of the key device A 130.

  Therefore, as described above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of breakage or bending of the leg A131, detachment of the leg A131 from the hole of the printed circuit board A119, and peeling of the solder. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disconnection of the key device A130 from the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) or the occurrence of disconnection or contact failure of the key device A130 (leg A131).

  In the covering portion A270, an end surface wall portion A272 is formed at the protruding tip (arrow F direction side), and the end surface wall portion A272 is opposed to the end portion A133c of the key device A130. Thereby, in addition to the area of opening A 260 (in addition to the area of opening A 260 in a front view (view in the arrow B direction), the cross-sectional area of the path through which foreign matter such as a wire passes) can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 and the main control device A110 is tampered with.

  In particular, in the end surface wall portion A272 of the covering portion A270, square portions A272b extend radially inward from two places on the inner edge of the annular portion A272a. That is, only the area that allows displacement of the key A 140 (area corresponding to the displacement trajectory of the key A 140) is opened on the protruding end surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the covering A 270, The other region of the tip end surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) is all used as the end surface wall portion A 272. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the area of the opening A260 and to make it difficult to insert foreign matter such as a wire into the opening A260. Further, since the opposing area between the inner surface of the end face wall A272 and the outer surface of the key device A130 (end A133c) can be maximized, even if foreign matter such as a wire is inserted from the opening A260, foreign matter such as the wire passes It can be difficult to do.

  As described above, in order to make the opening A 260 a different shape (a shape in which a pair of fan-shaped portions are combined to be opposed to each other), the end wall A272 has a relatively complicated shape in which the pair of square portions A 272 b project from the inner edge of the annular portion A 272 a. It is formed in a shape. In this case, the end face wall portion A272 (annular portion A272a and square portion A272b) is a plate having a constant thickness (a base end is fixed to the peripheral wall portion A271 and one end (extending end) is free) Shape, so the shape can be simplified and its formability can be secured. As a result, the yield can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

  Here, only the peripheral wall portion A271 is formed on the covering portion A270, and the inner edge of the protruding front end side (the arrow F direction side) of the peripheral wall portion A271 is an opening A260. Even in the configuration), when the external force in the direction orthogonal to the insertion direction is applied to the key A140, the outer surface of the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the peripheral wall A271 to suppress tilting of the key device A130 (Restricted) can.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the end wall A272 is formed on the protruding tip end side (the arrow F direction side) of the cover A270, and the key A140 is formed on the inner edge (portion forming the opening A260) of the end wall A272. Can be abutted. That is, a position (key A 140) farther from the fulcrum (leg A 131) when the key device A 130 is tilted by the action of the above-described external force can be brought into contact with the end surface wall A 272. As a result, tilting of the key device A130 can be suppressed (restricted), and damage to the box cover A200 (covering portion A270) can be suppressed.

  In addition, the projection A133b of the main body A133 and the projection A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 are partially formed in the circumferential direction, and the projection A133b of the main body A133 is housed inside (inner side) of the projection A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 Therefore, as described above, the outer surface in the circumferential direction of the protrusion A 133 b (the surface on the arrow L, R direction side) and the inner surface in the circumferential direction of the protrusion A 271 b (the surface in the arrow L, R direction surface) face each other. (See FIG. 118 (a)).

  Thus, for example, due to the worker's careless operation or violent operation on the key A 140 inserted into the key device A 130, or the collision of other members with the key A 140 at the time of opening the inner frame 12 to the outer frame 11, etc. When an external force in the rotational direction is applied to the key A140, the outer surface in the circumferential direction of the projection A133b (the surface on the arrow L, R direction side) is the inner surface in the circumferential direction of the projection A271b (the arrow L, R surface) , And the rotation (displacement in the circumferential direction) of the key device A 130 can be restricted.

  Therefore, as described above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of breakage or bending of the leg A131, detachment of the leg A131 from the hole of the printed circuit board A119, and peeling of the solder. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disconnection of the key device A130 from the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) or the occurrence of disconnection or contact failure of the key device A130 (leg A131).

  Here, for example, the operator A's careless operation or rough operation on the key A 140 inserted into the operation unit A 122 of the switch device A 120 or the key device A 130, or the operation unit A 122 at the time of opening the inner frame 12 to the outer frame 11. Or external force of the direction (parallel to a plane including arrows U and D and arrows L and R) is orthogonal to the push-in direction or insertion direction to the operation unit A 122 or key A 140 due to collision of other members to the key A 140 or the like. When it is operated, the switch device A 120, the key device A 130 or the key A 140 tilts, and there is a risk that the box cover A 200 (particularly, the operation wall A 210 or the cover A 270) may be deformed and damaged by their contact. .

  On the other hand, erecting walls A280 and A290 are erected on the back surface (the inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall A210, and these erecting walls A280 and A290 have their distal end surfaces ( The surface on the arrow B direction side is in contact with the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A 119 (see FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)).

  Thus, in addition to the improvement of the rigidity of the operation wall A210 due to the erected walls A280 and A290 being erected (functioning as a rib), the supporting portion supporting the operation wall A210 and the covering portion A270 As a means), the standing walls A280 and A290 can be functioned. As a result, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the box cover A200 (in particular, the operation wall A210 and the cover A270) and to suppress the damage.

  When the switch device A 120 or the key device A 130 is tilted by the action of an external force, the outer surface of the switch device A 120 or the key device A 130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the standing walls A 280 and A 290 to switch the device A 120 or The tilting of the key device A 130 can be suppressed (restricted). That is, the portion which abuts on the switch device A 120 or the key device A 130 and suppresses its tilting is shared not only by the operation wall A 210 or the covering portion A 270 but also the standing walls A 280 and A 290. It can be dispersed. Also from this point, damage to the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, even if foreign matter such as a wire inserted from the openings A250 and A260 reaches the printed circuit board A119 because the front end surfaces of the erected walls A280 and A290 are in contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. The upright walls A280 and A290 can function as a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire strikes (a wall that restricts further movement). Thereby, it is possible to suppress that the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) is tampered with.

  The upright walls A280 and A290, together with the lower wall portion A203, are formed to surround the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (see FIG. 118 (b)). That is, a region AS1 where the front end surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) of the standing walls A280 and A290 and the seat surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 abut on the front surface (surface on the arrow F direction) of the printed circuit board A119. , AS2 have a substantially rectangular frame shape, and are formed as an endless continuous shape (closed shape) (see FIG. 114A).

  Therefore, it is possible to block (divide) a path for foreign matter such as a wire to intrude into the inside of the substrate box A100 by the standing walls A280 and A290. That is, even if foreign matter such as a wire inserted from the openings A250 and A260 reaches the printed circuit board A119, the outward movement of the space surrounded by the standing walls A280 and A290 and the lower wall portion A203 is restricted. Can. Thereby, it is possible to suppress that the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) is tampered with.

  Further, the standing walls A280 and A290 are formed along with the lower wall portion A203 so as to surround the periphery of the switch device A120 and the key device A130, whereby the standing walls A280 and A290 are erected (function as a rib Not only can the rigidity of the operation wall A210 be further improved, but also depends on the direction of the external force applied to the operation part A122 or the key A140 (ie, arrows U and D and arrows L and R). Even when an external force is applied in any direction in a plane including the above, the function as a supporting portion (deformation suppressing means) for supporting the operation wall A210 and the covering portion A270 can be reliably exhibited. As a result, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the box cover A200 (in particular, the operation wall A210 and the cover A270) and to suppress the damage.

  The first upright wall A291 is disposed orthogonal to the key A140 in the off position and parallel to the key A140 in the on position. The three standing walls A 293 are disposed in an attitude that is orthogonal to the key A 140 in the on position and parallel to the key A 140 in the off position. Therefore, the function as a support part (deformation suppression means) which supports the operation wall part A210 and the coating part A270 can be efficiently exhibited on the standing wall A290.

  That is, of the external forces in the direction parallel to the plane including arrows U and D and arrows L and R, when the external force in the directions of arrows U and D or arrows L and R is applied to key A 140, the standing wall While the load received by A290 (load capacity that the erecting wall A290 should exert as a support) is maximized, an external force is applied that is inclined by a predetermined angle with the arrow U or D direction or the arrow L or R direction. In this case, there is a high possibility that the key A 140 is rotated due to the inclination of the direction of action of the external force, and the load received by the erection wall A 290 (the erection wall A 290 exerts as a support Load capacity should be low. As a result, by setting the posture of the standing wall A290 to the above-described arrangement, the standing wall A290 can efficiently exhibit the function as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) for supporting the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270. be able to.

  Since the upright walls A280 and A290 (the second upright walls A282 and A292 and the third upright walls A283 and A293) are connected to the lower wall portion A203, the upright walls are utilized by utilizing the rigidity of the box cover A200. The rigidity of A280 and A290 can be enhanced, and by connecting the inner surfaces of the operation wall A210 and the lower wall A203 via the upright walls A280 and A290, the rigidity of the entire box cover A200 can be enhanced. Therefore, the function of standing wall A280, A290 as a support part (deformation suppression means) which supports wall part A210 for operation and coating part A270 can be heightened. As a result, damage to the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

  In the printed circuit board A119, the surface to which the electronic components are connected by soldering is the surface facing the box base A300 (the opposite side to the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted). , A290, and the areas AS1 and AS2 with which the seat surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 abuts (see FIG. 114 (a)), electronic components are not mounted or circuits are formed, and such areas AS1 , AS2 are formed as flat surfaces.

  Therefore, the front end surfaces (surfaces on the arrow B direction side) of the standing walls A280 and A290 are easily brought into close contact with the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119. It can suppress that a clearance gap is formed between printed circuit board A119. Therefore, the upright walls A280 and A290 can be reliably functioned as walls against which the tips of foreign substances such as wires inserted from the openings A250 and A260 abut.

  The first standing walls A281 and A291, the second standing walls A282 and A292, and the third standing walls A283 and A293 of the standing walls A280 and A290 have tapered surfaces A280a and A290a, respectively, to form the leading ends of the standing walls. The area of the surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) is reduced (see FIGS. 117 and 118). Thus, the surface pressure at the front end face of the erected plate brought into contact with the printed circuit board A119 can be increased, and insertion of foreign matter such as a wire from between the printed circuit board A119 and the erected walls A280 and A290 can be suppressed.

  In this case, since the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a are formed on the inner surfaces (surfaces facing the switch device A120 and the key device A130) on the front end of the standing walls A280 and A290, the formability is improved. At the same time, insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the inside of the substrate box A100 can be suppressed.

  That is, the shape of the erected walls A280 and A290 is achieved by reducing the area of the erected front end surface by the inclined surfaces (taper surfaces A280a and A290a) gradually approaching the outer surface side toward the erected front end side (arrow B direction). It is possible to ensure the flowability of the resin in the mold by slowing the change. Thus, the formability can be improved.

  Furthermore, when the standing front end surfaces of the standing walls A280 and A290 are in contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, a groove having a substantially V-shaped cross section can be formed by the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 117 (a) and 117 (b)). Therefore, the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted from the openings A 250 and A 260 can be moved (guided) along the above-mentioned groove. That is, it is possible to make it difficult for the front end surfaces of the erected walls A280 and A290 and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 to pass (enter). Therefore, it can suppress that foreign substances, such as a wire, are inserted into the inside of substrate box A100.

  A first protrusion A211 and a second protrusion A212 are provided in a projecting manner on the front surface (the outer surface, the surface on the arrow F direction) of the operation wall A210. One end of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (the base A271a or the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) (FIG. 115 (a) and FIG. b) see).

  Thereby, the first protrusion A 211 and the second protrusion A 212 can be functioned as ribs for enhancing the rigidity, and the covering portion A 270 can be supported by the first protrusion A 211 and the second protrusion A 212. As a result, when the outer surface of the switch device A 120 or the key device A 130 is in contact with the inner surface of the covering portion A 270, the rigidity of each of the ridges A 211 and 222 is used to tilt the switch device A 120 or the key device A 130 While being able to control certainly, damage to covering part A270 can be controlled.

  In addition, on the front surface (the outer surface, the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, a display portion is provided at a position adjacent to the other end of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 (extension of the other end). ("ON" and "OFF") are respectively formed. Thereby, the function as an instruction line for pointing out the position corresponding to the predetermined information displayed by the display unit can be shared by the first projection A 211 and the second projection A 212. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In this case, the position where one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (the projection A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) is the end surface of the key A140 in the off position (The position facing the end face of the key A 140) (see FIG. 115 (a)), and one end of the second protrusion A 212 is the covering portion A 270 (the peripheral wall portion A 271). The position connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base A 271 a) is in the same phase position as the end surface of the key A 140 in the on position (see FIG. 115 (b)).

  As a result, an external force acts on the key A 140 in the off position, and the key A 140 covers the end face on the arrow U direction side (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the face gripped with a finger). ) When it is tilted in the direction (arrow U direction) to be abutted, the first protrusion A 211 is positioned on the extension of the load input from the key A 140 (see FIG. 115 (a)), the on position When an external force acts on the key A 140 located on the key A 140 and the key A 140 is tilted in the direction (arrow L direction) in which the end face on the arrow L direction abuts against the covering portion A 270 (end face wall A 272) The second protrusion A 212 is positioned on the extension of the load input from the key A 140 (see FIG. 115 (b)).

  As a result, when the key device A 130 is tilted by the action of an external force, a portion (the end surface of the key A 140 is in contact) to which a load is input from the end surface of the key A 140 Portion) can be efficiently reinforced by the first protrusion A 211 and the second protrusion A 212. As a result, breakage of the covering portion A 270 can be suppressed.

  In addition, it can be suppressed by the second connection wall A 230 that an external force (a force that displaces the key A 140 in the direction of the arrow D) in the opposite direction to that described above acts on the key A 140 in the off position (see FIG. The first connection wall A220 can suppress that an external force (a force for displacing the key A 140 in the direction of the arrow R) acts on the key A 140 in the ON position in the opposite direction to that described above (see FIG. 115). (B)).

  That is, as described later, the operation wall A210 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a front view, and the other side (arrow D) of the operation wall A210 (second region) in the short direction (arrows U and D). Direction side) is open (connection wall is not formed). In addition, the key device A130 is positioned on one side (the first connection wall A220 side) with respect to the center in the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R directions) of the operation wall A210 (second region). The distance to the connection wall A 240 is increased.

  Therefore, because there is a space on the open side and a space on the third connection wall A 240 side, the operator's hand and other components on the space side collide with the key A 140, and the arrow A for the key A 140 An external force that is displaced in the direction or in the direction of the arrow L is likely to act. Therefore, by forming the first protrusion A 211 and the second protrusion A 212 on the side (the receiving side) which suppresses the tilting of the key device A 130 against such external force, it is possible to reduce the material cost and secure the rigidity. It can be done efficiently.

  As described above, the square portions A 272 b of the end face wall portion A 272 are disposed at two places different in phase by approximately 180 degrees, and formed in a substantially triangular shape in a front view (view in the arrow B direction). In this case, the length dimensions of the two sides (the outer edge, the edge forming the opening A 260) in the triangular shape of the square portion A 272b are set to different values (that is, the front view shape is formed as a scalene triangle).

  Specifically, with respect to the key A 140 in the off position, the square portion A 272 b closer to the first connection wall A 220 is a side (outer edge) facing the gripping surface (surface gripped with a finger) of the key A 140 The square portion A 272 b on the side (the opposite side across the key A 140) from the first connection wall A 220 is longer (larger) in length dimension (longer) than the key A 140 in the off position. The length dimension of the side (outer edge) of the side facing the face is shortened (reduced) (see FIG. 115 (a)).

  Thus, in other words, the length of the side (outer edge) of the square portion A272b closer to the first connection wall A220 faces the gripping surface (the surface gripped by the finger) of the key A140 in the on position Is short (small), and the square portion A 272 b on the side far from the first connection wall A 220 has a long side (outer edge) of the side (outer edge) facing the grip surface of the key A 140 in the on position. (See FIG. 115 (b)).

  As described above, the presence of the space on the open side and the space on the third connection wall A 240 side causes the operator's hand and other components on the space side to collide with the key A 140, and the key A 140 According to the square portion A 272 b in the present embodiment, the side on which the key A 140 on which the external force in the arrow D direction or the arrow F direction is acted is received. Since the length dimension of the (outer edge) is lengthened, the rigidity of the square portion A 272 b can be efficiently enhanced, and the tilting of the key A 140 (key device A 130) can be reliably suppressed. Further, the surface pressure can be suppressed to suppress the breakage of the square portion A 272 b.

  The outer surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the front side of the substrate box A100 is a first area formed by the front wall portion A201 and a side closer to the main control device A110 than the first area, and the operation wall The second region formed by the portion A210 is formed, and the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the second region.

  Thus, the openings A250 and A260 are disposed at a position recessed from the outer surface (the first area formed by the front wall A201) of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200), and the first area and the second area are connected. Steps (the first connection wall A220, the second connection wall A230, and the third connection wall A240) can be disposed around the openings A250 and A260. As a result, compared to the case where the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the front wall A201 (the first area), the distance to the openings A250 and A260 can be made longer for the person who performs the fraud. By making the openings A 250 and A 260 less visible, it is difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign object such as a wire into the opening A 260.

  Here, in consideration of heat radiation from main controller A110, the distance between main substrate A110 and substrate box A100 (for example, the distance between the front surface of printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of box cover A200 (internal space )) Need to secure. On the other hand, if the openings A 250 and A 260 are too far from the switch device A 120 or the key device A 130, the operability deteriorates.

  In this case, by forming the openings A250 and A260 in the operation wall A210 (second region), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be easily secured, and as described above, the openings A250, It can suppress that foreign substances, such as a wire, are inserted into the inside of substrate box A100 from A260. However, when operating the switch device A 120 or the key device A 130, work is performed on the steps (the first connection wall A 220, the second connection wall A 230, and the third connection wall A 240) connecting the first area and the second area. The hand of the person (operator) interferes with the operation. Therefore, the operability when operating the switch device A 120 or the key device A 130 is deteriorated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first connection wall A220 is formed to be inclined (falling downward) in the direction closer to the main control device A110 from the front wall A201 toward the operation wall A210. The space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall A210 can be enlarged by the amount of such inclination (the space on the front side of the first connection wall A220). As a result, the operability when operating the switch device A 120 or the key device A 130 can be improved.

  The operation wall A210 (second region) has another dimension (arrows U and D) in which the length dimension along one direction (arrows L and R) in a front view (view in the arrow B direction) is orthogonal to one direction It is formed as an area of a front view approximately rectangle (horizontal rectangle) larger than the length dimension along the direction (see FIGS. 115 (a) and 115 (b)).

  The key device A 130 is arranged such that the attitude of the key A 140 in the off position is along the above-mentioned other direction (arrows U and D) (see FIG. 115A). That is, the key A 140 in the off position has a surface gripped with a finger facing in the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R) of the operation wall A 210 (second region), and the key A 140 in a front view (arrow B direction). The longitudinal direction of the head is taken along the short direction (directions of arrows U and D) of the operation wall A 210 (second region).

  Thus, it is possible to secure a space on the side (right and left sides in FIG. 115A) where the surface gripped by the finger of the key A 140 in the off position is desired. Therefore, when the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130 or pulled out from the key device A130, a step (a first connection wall) in which a finger (for example, a thumb and a forefinger) gripping the key A140 connects the first region and the second region Interference with the portion A 220, the second connection wall A 230, and the third connection wall A 240) can be suppressed. As a result, the operability when operating the key device A 130 can be improved.

  In this case, the key device A130 is located on one side (the first connection wall A220 side) than the middle of the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R directions) of the operation wall A210 (second region). As described above, since the first connection wall portion A220 is formed to be inclined downward, the key A140 is gripped with a finger and operated (turned from the off position to the on position or vice versa). Interference with a step (a first connection wall A 220, a second connection wall A 230, and a third connection wall A 240) that connects a first region and a second region with fingers different from the fingers to be gripped can be suppressed. As a result, the operability when operating the key device A 130 can be improved.

  For example, when holding the key A 140 in the off position with the index finger and the thumb, the little finger or ring finger can be arranged using the space secured by the downward inclination of the first connection wall A 220, and from the off position to the on position When the key A 140 is operated (rotated), the little finger or ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space secured by the downward inclination of the first connection wall A 220.

  Further, when holding the key A 140 in the on position with the index finger and the thumb, the little finger or ring finger is formed, and the operation wall A 210 (second region) is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape for front view and the key device A 130 is operated By using the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operation wall A210 by locating the wall A210 (second region) on one side of the longitudinal center When the key A 140 is operated (rotated) from the off position to the on position, the little finger or ring finger may be displaced (moved) using the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side) described above it can.

  In the switch device A120, the position (the height from the operation wall A210) of the projecting end surface (the surface on the arrow F direction) of the operating portion A122 at the initial position is the projection of the covering portion A270. It is set to a position (small dimension) lower than the position (the height of the standing from the operation wall A210) of the front end surface (the front of the end surface wall A272, the surface on the arrow F direction). Therefore, interference between the operation unit A 122 and the finger when operating the key A 140 can be suppressed.

  In the operation wall A210 (second region), connection surfaces (first connection wall A220 and third connection wall on one side (arrow L direction) and the other side (arrow R direction 9) of the longitudinal direction are provided. Part A240) is formed, and a connection surface (second connection wall A230) is formed on one side (arrow U direction side) in the short side direction, while on the other side (arrow D direction side) in the short side direction The connection surface is not formed.

  Thereby, the other side (arrow D direction side) in the lateral direction of the operation wall A210 (second region) can be opened. That is, by this opening, the space on the front side of the operation wall A 210 (second region) can be communicated with the space outside. Therefore, when holding the key A140 with a finger and performing an operation (insertion to the key device A130, removal from the key device A130, rotation from the off position to the on position, or the reverse rotation), the key A140 Use a space (external space) communicated with the above-mentioned opening as a space for arranging and displacing (moving) a finger (small finger or ring finger) different from a griped finger (for example, thumb and index finger) Can. As a result, the operability when operating the key device A 130 can be improved.

  Here, as described above, in consideration of heat dissipation from main controller A110, substrate box A100 is at a distance from main controller A110 (for example, between the front surface of printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of box cover A200). It is necessary to secure the distance (internal space) of

  In this case, the steps (first connection wall A220, second connection wall A230, and third connection wall A240) connecting the front wall A201 (first area) and the operation wall A210 (second area). While the first connection wall A220 is inclined downward from the first area to the second area, the second connection wall A230 and the third connection wall A240 are front wall A201 (first area) and It is formed in a form substantially orthogonal to the operation wall A210 (second region).

  That is, by inclining the first connection wall A220 downward, interference with fingers is suppressed to improve the operability of the key device A130, and the second connection wall A230 and the third connection wall A240 can be reduced. By making the non-inclination (by making the downward inclination only the first connection wall A 220), it is possible to secure the volume of the internal space of the substrate box A 100 for coping with the heat radiation from the main control device A 110.

  As described above, even if only the first connection wall A220 is inclined downward and the other (the second connection wall A230 and the third connection wall A240) is not inclined, the interference with the fingers can be suppressed. The operation wall A210 (second region) has a rectangular shape with a long front view and one side (the first connection wall A220 side) from the longitudinal center of the operation wall A210 (second region). ) And the key device A 130 is disposed in proximity to each other.

  Note that the third connection wall A240 is formed on the other side (opposite to the first connection wall A220) in the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 (second region), so that the third connection wall A240 The switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 (key A 140) can be protected. For example, the robot arm that handles the substrate box A100 at the time of manufacture can be prevented from colliding with the switch device A120 or the key device A130.

  FIG. 120 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10, showing the outer frame 11 with the inner frame 12 open. In FIG. 120, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, illustration of part of the configuration (for example, various electrical connection lines connected to main controller A 110) is omitted, The symbols are shown only for the main components.

  As shown in FIG. 120, in the pachinko machine A10, as described above, the hinges 18 (rotational axes) for supporting the inner frame 12 to the outer frame 11 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view. The inner frame 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable toward the front side, with the side on which is provided as an open / close shaft.

  Here, in the state where the inner frame 12 is opened to the front side with the hinge 18 as the opening / closing axis, the release angle can be sufficiently increased (for example, as shown in FIG. 120, approximately 90 degrees) When the operator can secure the opening angle of the switch box), the operator stands in a position facing the front of the substrate box A100, and the switch device A120 or the key device in the above-described manner (the manner described in FIGS. 115 to 119). The A130 can be operated and its operability can be secured.

  On the other hand, when the release angle can not be made sufficiently large (for example, only about 45 degrees of the release angle can be secured, the outer frame 11 and the inner frame can be opened to the space formed on the back side of the inner frame 12 by opening). The operability of the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 is secured even when it is necessary to operate the key device A 130 by inserting a hand from between 12 and 12).

  That is, in the substrate box A100, the longitudinal direction (for example, the directions of arrows R and L in FIG. 115 (a)) of the operation wall A210 (second region) is substantially orthogonal to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotation axis). At the same time as the longitudinal direction (FIG. 115 (a), the short direction (arrows U and D in FIG. 115 (a)) is directed substantially parallel to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotation axis). It is disposed in a posture in which the L direction side is positioned on the hinge 18 side. Therefore, the first connection wall A220 is disposed closer to the hinge 18 than the key device A130, and the switch device A120 is disposed farther to the hinge 18 than the key device A130.

  Thereby, when a hand is inserted from the space between the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 to the back surface of the inner frame 12 (the front surface of the substrate box A100) at the same height position as the operation wall A210 (second region), While forming the space between the key device A130 and the third connection wall A240 (i.e., the operation wall A210 (second region) in a rectangular shape in a front view horizontally long, the palm of the thumb and the base of the thumb) The space on the other longitudinal direction side (arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operation wall A210 by positioning the A130 one side of the longitudinal center of the operation wall A210 (second region)) It can be arranged using.

  With this arrangement, the switch A 120 can operate (push) the operation unit A 122 with the thumb or forefinger, and the key A 130 can rotate the key A 140. As the space for displacing (moving) the thumb and forefinger holding the key A140, the space secured by lowering the first connection wall A220 can be used. As a result, the operability of the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 can be secured.

  In the state where the substrate box A100 is rotated about the rotation axis A410 from the state shown in FIG. 120, the above-described setting change (operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130) may be performed. Since the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 can be positioned on the front side (the front side of the outer frame 11), the operability of the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 can be improved.

  In a state where the inner frame 12 is opened to the front side with the hinge 18 as an opening and closing axis, the substrate box A100 is further opened to the front side (the front side in FIG. 120) with the rotation axis A410 as an opening and closing axis. Also good. Thereby, the operator can stand at a position facing the front of the substrate box A100 at a position not interfering with the outer frame 11, and the switch device A120 or the like in the above-described manner (the manner described in FIG. 115 to FIG. 119). The key device A 130 can be operated, and its operability can be secured.

  In this case, various devices (power supply device 115, payout control device 111, audio lamp control device 113, various switches 208, solenoid 209, and the like) can be connected to main controller A110 (input / output port 205) through openings AOP1 to AOP8. The other end (connector) of the electrical connection line to which one end is connected is connected to the one symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the second symbol hold lamp 84 (see FIG. 4).

  Here, if operation of the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 is permitted regardless of the connection state of the electrical connection lines to the main control device A 110, the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 may be easily operated illegally. If the operation of the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 is uniformly inhibited regardless of the connection state of a plurality of electrical connection lines, the work (setting change) associated with the operation of the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 There is a risk of deterioration of sex.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the operability of the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 is changed according to the connection state of the electrical connection line with the main control device A 110. Thus, it is possible to suppress fraud and improve the workability.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, the other end (connector) of the electrical connection line whose one end is connected to at least the power supply device 115 and the audio lamp control device 113 among the plurality of electrical connection lines is the main controller A110. As long as they are connected to (input / output port 205), regardless of the connection state of other electrical connection lines (that is, even if they are connected or disconnected, whether they are both connected and disconnected. , And the operation of the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 are permitted. Thus, it is possible to suppress fraud and improve the workability.

  That is, if the predetermined electrical connection line (the electrical connection line connecting the power supply 115 and the audio lamp controller 113 to the main controller A110) is not connected to the main controller A110, the switch A120 and the key A130 The operation of the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 can be suppressed from being performed illegally.

  On the other hand, when the connection of the predetermined electrical connection line (the electrical connection line connecting the power supply 115 and the audio lamp control device 113 to the main controller A110) to the main controller A110 is secured, and the fraud can be suppressed. The other electric connection lines (the payout control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first symbol display device 37, second symbol display device 83, and second symbol hold lamp 84 are connected to the main control device A 110 Improvement in operability (enabling versatility) by allowing operation (setting change) of the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 even when the electrical connection line) is released (removed) from the main control device A 110 ) Can be

  That is, when the main controller A110 is opened to the front side (the front side in FIG. 120) with the rotation axis A410 as an opening / closing axis, the main control device A110 is rotated (electrical connection line main control It is necessary to release the electrical connection (so that the rotation of the device A 110 is not restricted).

  Therefore, in a configuration in which the operation (change of setting) of the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 is not permitted unless all the electrical connection lines are connected to the main control device A 110, the main control device A 110 is at a predetermined position (switch device After rotating to a position where the operation of the A 120 and the key device A 130 is easy to be performed), it is necessary to reconnect the electrical connection line released (removed) from the main control device A 110 to the main control device A 110.

  In particular, when the main control device A110 is separated from the back of the inner frame 12 by displacement (rotation) and the length of the electrical connection line is insufficient, the extension line is interposed and released (extracted) The electrical connection line needs to be reconnected to the main controller A110, which is troublesome.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if a predetermined electrical connection line (an electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the audio lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is connected to the main control device A110, Since operation (change of setting) of the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 is permitted, other electrical connection lines (the payout control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first symbol display device 37, second symbol display It is possible to eliminate the need to reconnect (reconnect) the device 83 and the electrical connection line connecting the second symbol storage lamp 84 to the main control device A 110 with an extension line interposed.

  As a result, while enabling the main control device A 110 to be disposed at a position where the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 can be easily operated, the time and effort is reduced and the workability associated with the operation (setting change) of the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 Can be improved.

  Next, a substrate box A 2100 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventh embodiment, the entire back surface of the end surface wall A272 is formed as a flat surface. However, in the end surface wall A2272 in the eighth embodiment, a protrusion A2273 is provided to project from the back surface. The same parts as those in each embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 121 (a) is a partially enlarged rear view of a substrate box A2100 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 121 (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the substrate box A2100 taken along line CXXIb-CXXIb in FIG. 121 (a). It is.

  FIG. 121 (a) corresponds to FIG. 110 (b). Also, in FIG. 121 (b), only the part viewed in cross section is illustrated in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate the understanding.

  As shown in FIG. 121, a ridge A2273 is provided on the end surface wall A2272 of the covering portion A2270 of the eighth embodiment so as to protrude from the back surface (the inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction). The protrusion A 2273 is a portion (a protrusion) extending in a stripe shape while maintaining a substantially semicircular cross-sectional shape, and an outer edge of the end surface wall A 2272 (a projecting direction tip end protruding radially inward from the peripheral wall A 271 It is formed in a predetermined range along the side edge).

  Specifically, the range in which the protrusion A 2273 is formed is a position facing (facing) the end A 133 c (see FIG. 113) in the main body A 133 of the key device A 130 and along the outer edge of the square portion A 272 b (position A range between the position AP1 including the AP2 and the position AP3, a range between the position AP4 including the position AP5 and the position AP6), and one side across the square portion A272b (radially inward from the peripheral wall portion A271 (The range between the position AP3 and the position AP4) and the range along the inner edge of the annular portion A272a) It is formed continuously.

  The protrusion dimension from the back surface of the end face wall portion A2272 (the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b) of the protrusion A 2273 is set to a constant value in the range between the position AP3 and the position AP4, and from the position AP3 to the position AP2 The value is gradually changed to a larger value as it moves toward it, and is gradually changed to a smaller value as it moves from position AP2 to position AP1, and is set to the same value as position AP3 at position AP2. Similarly, the projection size is gradually changed from the position AP4 to the position AP5 and gradually changed from the position AP5 to the position AP6, and the position AP6 is the same value as the position AP4. It is set. Further, the position AP2 and the position AP5 are set to the same value (projected dimension).

  Thus, the rigidity of the end surface wall A2272 can be enhanced by the protrusion A2273 protruding from the end surface wall A2272. Therefore, a force in a direction (a direction parallel to a plane including arrows U and D and arrows L and R) is applied to the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, and along with the tilting of the key device A130. When the key A140 is in contact with the inner edge of the end face wall A2272, damage to the end face wall A2272 can be suppressed.

  The protrusion A 2273 is formed at a position facing (facing) the end A 133 c (see FIG. 113) in the main body A 133 of the key device A 130, so the back of the end face wall A 2272 and the end A 133 c of the key device A 130 (main body A 133) The clearance between the front surface of the substrate box A2 and the front surface of the substrate box A2 can be reduced, and foreign matter such as a wire can be prevented from being inserted into the inside of the substrate box A 2100 from the clearance.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the projection A2273 has a projection dimension in the range between the position AP3 and the position AP4 that is the distance between the back surface of the end surface wall A2272 and the front surface of the end A133 c of the main body A133 of the key device A130. It is set to a value substantially equivalent to the facing interval between the two. Therefore, the protruding end (the arrow B direction side) of the protrusion A 2273 abuts on the front surface of the end A 133 c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A 133 of the key device A 130.

  Thus, the gap between the back surface of the end face wall A2272 and the front of the key device A130 (the end A133c of the main body A133) is eliminated, and foreign matter such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A2100 from the gap. Can be suppressed.

  In particular, at the positions AP2 and AP5, the projection dimension of the ridge A 2273 is set to a large value, so that the elastic deformation of the square portion A 272 b formed as a plate (cantilever) in a free state on the outer edge side is used. Thus, the ridges A2273 in the range from the position AP1 to the position AP3 and in the range from the position AP4 to the position AP6 can be firmly in close contact with the front of the key device A130 (end A133c of the main body A133). Thus, foreign matter such as a wire can be more reliably suppressed from being inserted into the inside of the substrate box A2100 from the gap between the back surface of the end face wall A2272 and the front of the key device A130 (end A133c of the main body A133). .

  Further, as described above, the protruding end (the arrow B direction side) of the protrusion A 2273 is in contact with the front of the end A 133 c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A 133 of the key device A 130, thereby the key device A 130 Even when the end wall A2272 is accidentally pushed in the insertion direction by the key A140 when inserting the key A140, deformation of the end wall A2272 in the insertion direction can be suppressed. Therefore, it can suppress that the base end side (The side connected with the surrounding wall part A271) of end surface wall part A2272 is damaged.

  Next, a substrate box A3100 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventh embodiment, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are disposed on the side closer to the rotation axis A410 (arrow R direction side) than the center of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200) in the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R directions). In the ninth embodiment, the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 are disposed farther from the rotation axis A 410 than the longitudinal center of the substrate box A 3100 (box cover A 3200). The same parts as those in each embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 122 (a) is a front view of a substrate box A3100 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 122 (b) is a schematic front view of a pachinko machine A3010. In FIG. 122 (b), a state in which the substrate box A3100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) of the movable range (rotatable range) is illustrated. Also, in FIG. 122 (b), only main components are schematically illustrated in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

  Here, the substrate box A3100 in the ninth embodiment is the formation position of the operation wall A210 and the opening A260 (cover A270, a key in the operation wall A210 with respect to the substrate box A100 in the seventh embodiment. The arrangement of the device A130) and the opening A250 (the guide wall A251, the switch device A120) is different, but the other configurations are the same, so the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 122, in the substrate box A3100 in the ninth embodiment, the operation wall A210 is formed on the side (arrow L direction side) farther from the rotation axis A410 than the longitudinal center of the box cover A3200. Three sides of the wall portion A210 are connected to the front wall portion A201 by the first connection wall portion A220, the second connection wall portion A230, and the third connection wall portion A240.

  An opening AOP1, an opening A260 (cover A270) and an opening A250 (guide wall A251) are formed in the operation wall A210, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated through the openings A250 and A260. Be done.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the switch device A 120 is disposed on the side farther from the rotation axis A 410 (the side closer to the first connection wall A 220, the arrow L direction side) than the key device A 130. That is, the arrangement is the reverse of the arrangement in the seventh embodiment.

  Here, in the substrate box A3100, a first position where the movable range (rotatable range) when rotating about the rotation axis A410 is disposed on the back side of the inner frame 12 (arranged at the time of gaming From the position (see FIG. 120), the second position where the front of the box cover A3200 (the operation wall A210) faces the front side of the pachinko machine A3010 is displaced (rotated) in a direction away from the back of the inner frame 12 That is, a position facing the same side as the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, a range of about 180 ° up to FIG. 122 (b)) is set.

  Thereby, the board box A3100 is disposed (displaced) at a position where the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 can be operated while visually recognizing information (for example, information on setting change, setting value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 )be able to. As a result, it is possible to operate while confirming the display (information), so that it is possible to easily grasp the operation states of the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 based on the display (information). As a result, the operability can be improved, and an operation error can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 are not operated, they can be disposed on the back side of the pachinko machine A 3010 (inner frame 12) (that is, a position hardly visible from outside; see FIG. 120). It can be suppressed that the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 are illegally operated.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the direction in which the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 of the substrate box A 3100 are disposed (the front of the operation wall A 210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are the same (arrow The substrate box A3100 can be displaced (rotated) to a position where the direction B is desired (in the present embodiment, the two sides are substantially parallel). In addition, it is preferable that the angle which the front of wall part A210 for operation and the display surface of 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 make is set in the range of about 0 degree to about 45 degrees.

  That is, the board can be positioned at a position where the surface on which the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 of the substrate box A 3100 are disposed (the front of the operation wall A 210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be simultaneously viewed. The box A3100 can be displaced (rotated). As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need to take an unreasonable posture, such as letting the hand turn around to the back side of the pachinko machine A3010, in order to operate the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 while visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81 .

  As a result, it is possible to more easily perform the operation of operating the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 while confirming the information displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, information related to setting change). Can be achieved more reliably.

  Further, as described above, the operation wall A210 is formed on the side (arrow L direction side) farther from the rotation axis A410 than the longitudinal center of the box cover A3200, and the switch A120 and the key are provided on the operation wall A210. Apparatus A130 is provided.

  Thus, the board can be positioned at a position where the surface on which the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 of the substrate box A 3100 are disposed (the front of the operation wall A 210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be simultaneously viewed. In a state in which the box A3100 is displaced (rotated) (see FIG. 122 (b)), a position farther from the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12) (FIG. 122 (b) right) Can be placed on Therefore, interference between fingers operating the switch device A 120 (operation unit A 122) and the key device A 130 (key A 140) with the outer edge of the pachinko machine A 10 (inner frame 12) can be suppressed. As a result, operability can be improved.

  Here, in the setting change mode, the push operation of the switch device A 120 (operation unit A 122) needs to be repeatedly performed, and the operation frequency of the switch device A 120 is higher than that of the key device A 130.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the switch device A120, which has a high operation frequency compared to the key device A130, is closer to the side farther from the rotation axis A410 than the key device A130 (that is, closer to the first connection wall A220). It is arranged. As a result, the switch device A 120 having a high operation frequency can be disposed at a position (right side in FIG. 122B) farther from the outer edge of the pachinko machine A 10 (inner frame 12). Therefore, interference with the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12) can be more reliably suppressed by fingers operating the switch device A120 (operation unit A122). As a result, operability can be improved.

  Furthermore, since the switch device A120 is disposed adjacent to the first connection wall portion A220, the space formed by the inclination of the first connection wall portion A220 is also used when operating the switch device A120 (operation part A122). It can be used as a space (a space for avoiding interference between a finger and the box cover A3200). As a result, the operability can be improved also from this point.

  Here, the pachinko machine A3010 in the ninth embodiment is at the second position (a position where the front of the operation wall A210 faces the front side of the pachinko machine A3010, see FIG. 122 (b)) in which the substrate box A3100 is described above. When it is displaced (rotated), it engages with the substrate box A3100 to restrict displacement (rotation) of the substrate box A3100 in the direction toward the first position (that is, fixes the substrate box A3100 in the second position) ) Regulation means. Thus, when the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 are operated, there is no need to hold the substrate box A 3100 by hand, which can improve operability.

  In addition, as a regulation means, one that fixes (holds) the substrate box A 3100 in the second position by using the magnetic force (adhesion force) of the magnet (a force exceeding the adsorption force is applied, Displacement (rotation) in the direction to the position), a projecting member disposed in the projecting position by the elastic recovery force of the elastically deformed biasing means (for example, a coil spring), and disposed in the projecting position Which engage with the substrate box A3100 disposed at the second position and restrict displacement (rotation) of the substrate box A3100 in the direction toward the first position (biasing means from the projection position) If the protrusion member is inserted against the biasing force of (1), displacement (rotation) in the direction toward the first position of the substrate box A3100 is permitted.

  Next, a substrate box A4100 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Although the seventh embodiment has described the case where the rotation axis A410 of the substrate box A100 is disposed along the vertical direction (directions of arrows U and D) of the pachinko machine A10, the rotation axis A4410 in the tenth embodiment is The pachinko machine A4010 is disposed in a posture along the width direction (left and right direction, arrow L and R directions). The same parts as those in each embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Fig.123 (a) is a front view of substrate box A4100 in 10th Embodiment, FIG.123 (b) is a front schematic diagram of pachinko machine A4010. In FIG. 123 (b), the substrate box A4100 is shown displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) of the movable range (rotatable range), and is displaced to the first position. The (rotated) substrate box A4100 is illustrated by a broken line. Also, in FIG. 123 (b), only main components are schematically illustrated in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

  Here, the substrate box A4100 in the tenth embodiment is different from the substrate box A100 in the seventh embodiment in the arrangement (position and position) of the rotation axis A4410 and the number of arrangements, but the other configuration is the same. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 123, a substrate box A4100 according to the tenth embodiment includes a pair of rotation axes A4410 protruding from the sealing unit A400 and the sub cover A500 in directions away from each other. The pair of rotation axes A4410 are located on one side (opposite to the operation wall A210, arrow U direction side) of the substrate box A4100 in the short side direction (arrows U and D), and longitudinal direction of the substrate box A4100 (arrow L, R directions) are formed to project outward from the both ends along the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A4100. Further, the pair of rotation axes A4410 are coaxially arranged.

  Here, in the substrate box A4100, a first position (arranged at the time of gaming) in which the movable range (rotatable range) when rotated about the rotation axis A4410 is disposed on the back side of the inner frame 12 The position (shown by the broken line in FIG. 123 (b)) is displaced (rotated) in the direction (arrow B direction) away from the back of the inner frame 12 and the front of the box cover 4200 (operation wall A210) is vertical It is set in the range of approximately 90 ° to the second position (that is, the position where the substrate box A4100 projects most to the back side of the inner frame 12, see FIG. 123 (b)) facing the upper direction (arrow U direction). .

  Thereby, in the second position, the operation wall A210 can be directed upward, and the release side (opposite to the second connection wall A230) can be directed to the side where the operator is located, thereby the switch device A120. And the operativity of key device A130 can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the first position, the front surface of the operation wall A210 can face the back surface of another component disposed on the inner frame 12. Therefore, it is possible to make the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 face different parts and to arrange the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 in a position where it is difficult to operate. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the fraud is applied (the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 are fraudulently operated).

  Further, in the present embodiment, in a state where the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130, the key A140 is in contact with another member of the inner frame 12 even if the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position. By being in contact, the substrate box A4100 can not be disposed at the first position. Thereby, it is possible to suppress forgetting to remove the key A140. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the key A 140 which is forgotten to be removed is acquired illegally.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the second position of the substrate box A4100 is positioned lower in the gravity direction (vertical direction) than the first position, as described above, the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130. When the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position in the closed state, the substrate box A4100 can then be displaced (rotated) to the second position by its own weight. Therefore, it can be made easy for the worker to recognize that the substrate box A4100 can not be placed at the first position.

  In the separate member, when the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the first position, part of the separate member is closer to the front side of the operation wall A210 than the front wall A201 of the box cover 4200. It is preferable that the shape be intruded into. As a result, the space formed on the front side of the operation wall A210 can be reduced, and unauthorized operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be suppressed.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with the configuration of part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to provide another embodiment.

  Although the case where the ball flowing down the ball flow down unit 150 is decelerated by the protruding portion 154 has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the flow-down resistance of the ball may be increased by disposing an adhesive member on the inner surface, air may be fed into the flow path, or the flow-down speed of the ball is adjusted by the magnetic force. You may.

  Although the case where the displacement regulating device 180 is disposed in the rear case 510 has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement control device 180 may be disposed on the movable object side. The displacement restricting device 180 may be disposed on the back side of the effect member 700, and the extension width to the back side may be changeable by the pressing operation.

  In this case, it is possible to restrict the displacement of the effect member 700 by configuring so that the main body portion 183a of the operation member 183 of the displacement restricting device 180 can be inserted into the back case 510 in a state where the overhang width is long. it can. On the other hand, the effect member 700 can be displaced by configuring so that the insertion to the rear case 510 is released in a state where the operation member 183 is operated and the overhang width is shortened. The displacement regulating device 180 is also displaced along with the displacement. Therefore, by adding a design shape to the displacement regulating device 180 or arranging a light emitting device such as an LED, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the displacement regulating device 180 and produce effects.

  Although the case where the state change of the displacement regulating device 180 is caused by the manual operation has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the displacement control device 180 may include a drive device, and the arrangement of the operation member 183 may be electrically switched. In this case, by controlling the displacement regulating device 180 to be in the deregulation state prior to the initial operation from the power on, the displacement regulating device 180 is prevented from starting the displacement of the scaling unit 600 in the regulated state. can do. As a result, overloading of the operation member 183 can be prevented.

  Further, a cushioning material having a high cushioning property may be disposed around the cylindrical portion 183 d of the operation member 183. Further, a detection sensor capable of detecting the arrangement of the operation member 183 is provided even before the displacement restriction device 180 is driven, and it is determined that the displacement restriction device 180 is in the restriction state by this detection sensor In this case, control may be performed so as not to start driving of the scaling unit 600.

  Although the case where the displacement regulating device 180 is disposed on the back side of the back case 510 has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be disposed on at least one of the upper and lower sides of the back case 510, may be disposed on at least one of the left and right sides of the back case 510, or a combination thereof.

  For example, in order to maintain the arrangement of the effect member 700, it is sufficient to prevent the change in the arrangement of the lower arm member 630. Therefore, a recess is provided on the upper surface of the lower arm member 630 in the effect standby state. When the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183 is extended, the cylindrical portion 183d is configured to engage with the recess provided in the lower arm member 630, thereby preventing a change in the arrangement of the lower arm member 630 in the left-right direction. Can.

  In the first embodiment, the displacement restricting device 180 is provided as an example of the device for restricting the displacement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 disposed above the game area, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, the granular member 320 displaces the internal space IE1 at the time of shipment by arranging a device for regulating (restricting) the displacement of the granular member 320 of the injection device 400 (a member capable of freely displacing the internal space IE1). By doing so, it may be rubbed against the wall surface of the dividing member 310 to prevent the granular member 320 from being broken or scratching the dividing member 310.

  For example, the granular member 320 is prevented from displacing the internal space IE1 beyond the lid member 480 by shipping in a state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side (effect standby state) While being able to limit the range of the partition member 310 to which the granular member 320 can contact at the time of shipment, it is possible to suppress the displacement amount of the granular member 320 and to avoid the occurrence of cracking due to collision of the granular members 320 with each other. it can.

  Further, as another example, the granular member 320 which is disposed on the lower support member 163 of the light guide plate rendering means 160, is configured to be able to protrude into the internal space IE1 of the dividing member 310, and is arranged in the internal space IE1 in the expanded state. A projecting member configured to be able to limit the displacement of the lens may be provided.

  The projecting member is configured to be able to be pushed in from the front side of the lower support member 163 (the front side of the game board 13), and configured to be switched between the overhanging state and the non-overhanging state each time the pushing operation is performed. After the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the gaming machine store, the overhanging member can be operated from the front side by opening the front frame 14, so that the operability of the overhanging member can be improved.

  In addition, the aspect of the state change of an overhang member is not limited at all. For example, as in the displacement restricting device 180, the state may be changed by the latch mechanism, or the state may be changed by engagement or disengagement between the claws.

  As another example, the arrangement of the granular members 320 may be maintained by shipping with the internal pressure of the dividing member 310 increased. In this case, by installing the pachinko machine 10 in the gaming machine store and lowering the air pressure in the dividing member 310 before operation, the arrangement of the granular member 320 can be made free.

  As another example, a metal powder of a ferromagnetic material may be mixed with a resin used as the material of the granular member 320, and a magnet may be disposed near the lower end of the dividing member 310 at the time of shipment. Thereby, at the time of shipment, the arrangement of the granular member 320 can be maintained by the magnetic force of the magnet. On the other hand, at the time of operation, the arrangement of the granular member 320 can be freed by removing the magnet.

  The magnet is not limited to one that needs to be removed at the time of operation. For example, a magnet may be disposed on a part of another movable part, and as an example, a magnet may be disposed on the lid member 480.

  In the mode of mixing the metallic powder of the ferromagnetic material in the granular member 320, for example, it operates so as to generate a magnetic force in the vicinity of the dividing member 310 after execution of the emission effect (for example, making the magnet approach the dividing member 310) By disposing the effect product for operation), it is possible to include the effect mode of causing the granular member 320 to stop in the air (visualize as if it is floating) in the emission effect.

  Although the case where the displacement control device 180 for restricting the displacement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is fixed to the rear case 510 has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the rear case 510, an insertion hole is formed in the rear case 510, the insertion hole being formed on the same straight line as the central axis of the controlled hole 657 in a state where the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is disposed at the predetermined end position. A metal rod or resin rod is inserted through the insertion hole into the regulated hole 657 and fixed with a tape etc., and after arrival at the gaming machine store, the salesperson of the gaming machine store removes the metal rod or resin rod. The scaling unit 600 may be configured to be displaceable.

  On the other hand, with this method, there is no possibility that the pachinko machine 10 may be soiled with the fixing tape, or the metal rod or resin rod can not be thrown away for delivery to another store of the pachinko machine 10 Need to be done.

  In addition, when leaving the storage of metal rods or resin rods to each game machine shop, the possibility of loss increases, and when delivering to other stores without metal rods or resin rods, the quality of pachinko machine 10 is secured It may not be possible. It can also be recognized that what improved this point of view is the displacement control device 180 fastened and fixed to the back case 510.

  In the first embodiment, the front and rear width of the internal space IE1 and the front and rear widths of the left and right center portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 and the rear lower portion 314 are substantially the same. is not. For example, the front and rear widths of the left and right center portion 312b and the back surface lower portion 314 may be configured as narrow as the front and rear widths of the left and right portion 312a and the back surface lower portion 314. In this case, since the movement resistance of the granular member 320 can be increased on the lower side of the internal space IE1 regardless of the left and right positions, the momentum of the granular member 320 to be ejected can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the probability that the particulate member 320 may be broken or damaged by a collision.

  Further, for example, the front and rear widths of the left and right portions 312a and the rear lower portion 314 may be expanded to the same extent as the front and rear width of the internal space IE1. In this case, the granular member 320 can enter the internal space IE1 without reducing the force of the granular member 320 to be ejected.

  In addition, the front and back width of the internal space IE1 does not have to be constant. For example, the shape may be tapered toward the moving direction (upper side) of the ejected granular member 320. In this case, since the force of the granular member 320 can be gradually dropped, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of an excessive load locally on the dividing member 310. Furthermore, by moving the tapered direction toward the front side, the scattering granular member 320 can be easily moved toward the front side.

  Also, for example, even if a bump-like portion protruding in a manner of protruding toward the back side is provided at a portion which is a part of the front face plate portion 311 and it is predicted that the ejected granular members 320 collectively reach. good. The bump-like portion may be configured such that a separate member may be disposed and fixed to the back surface of the front plate portion 311, or may be shaped so that part of the front plate portion 311 can be extended to the back side. You may comprise so that a convex part may be provided in a type | mold.

  In the first embodiment, the granular member 320 has a soccer ball shape, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a spherical shape, a rugby ball shape, or a star shape (a shape in which projections are formed in three dimensions) may be used. By forming the members with a certain size, it is possible to create a gap between the members, so that the granular members 320 can be scattered violently when the launch effect is performed.

  In the first embodiment, the injection device 400 is disposed below the rear surface side of the light guide plate 161 and emits the granular member 320 in the obliquely upper front direction. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the arrangement of the injection device 400 may be the left or right position of the light guide plate 161 or the upper position. Even in this case, it is possible to execute an effect of firing the granular member 320 diagonally forward. In addition, when arrange | positioning the injection device 400 in the upper position, it is preferable to add the apparatus which lifts up the granular member 320 to a production waiting position.

  Although the case where the granular member 320 is formed of a single-color (red in this embodiment) resin member has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, one granular member 320 may be configured by combining two members of two-color molding or different colors. In this case, it is possible to devise the appearance at the time of deposition by performing color coding in consideration of the position of the center of gravity. For example, by changing the color at the horizontal position in the stable posture of the granular member 320 in consideration of the position of the center of gravity, the color layer can be visually recognized at the time of deposition of the granular member 320.

  Further, the number of granular members 320 is not limited, and may be one. For example, a member having the same size as that of the collision member 420 may be adopted as the granular member 320, and the concave curved shape similar to that of the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 may be formed on the outer surface. Thereby, the flying manner and the appearance of the granular member 320 are changed between the case where the firing effect is performed with the curved shape fitting properly and the case where the firing effect is performed with the curved shape not fitting. be able to.

  In the first embodiment, the granular member 320 is disposed so as to be able to scatter in the internal space IE1 and is gathered on the collision member 420 by gravity. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a biasing means is provided for biasing the granular member 320 toward the initial position side (position side in the production standby state), and the granular member 320 is configured to be returned to the initial position side by the biasing force of the biasing means. It is good. In this case, it can be avoided that the initial position side of the granular member 320 is limited to the lower side.

  As the biasing means, for example, a spring, a stretchable rubber-like member, a net-like member whose end is fixedly arranged, an elastic sheet which partially covers the path of the granular member 320, etc. are exemplified.

  The relationship between the biasing means and the granular member 320 is not limited at all. For example, the particulate member 320 and the biasing means may be bonded, or they may not be separated but they may not be separated, and a part of the biasing means may be disposed inside the particulate member 320 to be integrated. The biasing means may be a mode that can be disposed apart from the granular member 320 while being supported by the inner space IE1.

  Also, the biasing means is not limited to an object that can contact the granular member 320. For example, as in the case where the gravity acts on the granular member 320 in the first embodiment, an air pressure adjusting means for adjusting the air pressure of the internal space IE1 may be employed. In this case, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be influenced by raising or lowering the pressure of the internal space IE1.

  For example, when the pressure in the internal space IE1 is increased by injecting gas into the internal space IE1 from the upper side, the particulate member 320 can be easily maintained below the internal space IE1, and conversely, the upper side of the internal space IE1 When the air pressure of the inner space IE1 is lowered in such a manner that the gas is extracted from the inner space IE1, the granular member 320 can be displaced (floatingly displaced) toward the upper side of the inner space IE1. Further, the direction of gas injection and the direction of gas extraction are not limited to the upper side, and can be set to any side vertically and horizontally.

  In the case where a pressure change is caused, it is preferable to close the deformed through portion 315. It is possible to easily provide the lid member 480 with the function of closing the deformed through portion 315. For example, when a flexible thin deformable member (for example, a sponge-like member or a low friction rubber-like member) is attached to the lid member 480 and the lid member 480 enters the deformed through portion 315, the lid The gap between the member 480 and the deformed through portion 315 may be filled with a deformable member. Thus, the deformed through portion 315 can be closed or opened in accordance with the displacement of the lid member 480 with respect to the deformed through portion 315.

  In the first embodiment, the protrusion 414 of the linear motion member 410 is formed along a straight line, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the surface on the side facing the transmission protrusion 446 of the right end may be formed as a curved surface along the displacement locus of the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440. In this case, not only when the transmission protrusion 446 is disposed at the lower end position, but also because the linear movement member 410 can be maintained at the displacement lower end position while in contact with the curved surface, the coil spring SP1 It is possible to shift to the firing state while maintaining the biasing force of

  In the first embodiment, the case where the left and right center portions of the collision member 420 are formed to have a curved shape of a protrusion on the upper side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be a slope with its central portion pointed sharply down in the lateral direction, or it may be a ridge. In this case, compared to the curved shape, it is possible to make it difficult for the granular member 320 to pass in the left and right direction of the pointed portion in the central portion. Therefore, it is possible to increase the deviation of the lateral arrangement of the granular members 320.

  Also, for example, it may be a flat shape orthogonal to the displacement direction, or may be configured as a curved shape in which the left and right center portions are recessed downward. In this case, unlike the first embodiment, it is possible to configure a displacement mode in which the granular member 320 is displaced by lumps and separated by collision until collision with the inner wall of the dividing member 310.

  When the shape of the collision member 420 is changed, it is preferable to change the shape of the lid member 480 accordingly. For example, in the case where the upper surface of the collision member 420 is formed in a curved shape in which the left and right central portions are recessed downward, the advancing and retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 preferably has a curved shape in which the left and right central portions are upwardly convex. As a result, the collision between the particulate member 320 and the lid member 480 can be easily avoided.

  Although the case where the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 is configured to have a flat shape in side view has been described in the first embodiment, the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the lower half may be configured to be overhanging and bent in side view. In this case, the dense position of the granular members 320 can be moved to the upper half side.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the size of the dividing member 310 in a front view is configured to be approximately the same as the size of the light guide plate 161 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the size of the partitioning member 310 in the front view is designed to be about the size or the size of the visible area where the player can view the display within the display area of the third symbol display device 81 You may Thereby, since the occurrence of a situation where the edge of the dividing member 310 is visually recognized overlapping the display by the third symbol display device 81 can be avoided, the visibility of the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved. it can.

  In the first embodiment, the single collision member 420 is employed as a member for applying a load to the granular member 320, but the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a plurality of collision members 420 arranged to be able to apply a load to the granular members 320 may be employed, and cooperative operation or individual operation may be performed by different driving devices.

  In the first embodiment, the linear moving member 410 is in contact with the collision member 420, and the front transmission member 440 is not in contact with the collision member 420. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a pillar protruding from the plate portion 422 toward the rear side may penetrate the intermediate member 401 and be able to abut on the front transmission member 440. In this case, the contact portion of the front side transmission member 440 with the column portion is unevenly formed in such a manner that the radial length is switched according to the angular arrangement, whereby the arrangement of the column portion with the rotation of the front side transmission member 440 Can change. By utilizing this, the collision member 420 may be slightly displaced up and down, and the granular member 320 may be vibrated (small displacement).

  In the first embodiment, the case where the lid member 480 enters the partitioning member 310 by rotational displacement has been described. However, the displacement mode of the lid member 480 is not limited at all and is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, you may approach by the slide displacement along a linear direction. In this case, the shape of the irregular through portion 315 can be easily formed.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the extended plate portions 485 disposed on the left and right of the lid member 480 are formed in a concave shape toward the back surface side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the recess may not be formed. In this case, the inflow of the particulate member 320 to the collision member 420 from the left and right can be easily prevented.

  In the said 1st Embodiment, in the effect standby state of the injection device 400, although the case where the granular member 320 was separated and accommodated below the cover member 480 was demonstrated, it does not necessarily restrict to this. For example, a protrusion may be formed to protrude from the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the lid member 480 toward the inner diameter side, and the protrusion may be configured to be able to abut on the granular member 320. In this case, when the particulate member 320 is locally deposited, the deposition of the particulate member 320 can be broken along with the displacement of the lid member 480 toward the entry side by pushing the particulate member 320 by the protrusion. . Thereby, equalization of arrangement of granular member 320 can be attained.

  The shape of the protrusion of the lid member 480 is not limited in any way. For example, a plurality of projections may be dispersed. In this case, regardless of the position where deposition of the particulate members 320 occurs, the protrusions can be brought into contact with the deposited particulate members 320, and the deposition of the particulate members 320 can be broken.

  In addition, it may be configured as a pair of ridges that are disposed to be inclined to both the left and the right outside toward the retraction side tip end of the advancing and retracting portion 481 starting from the left and right center of the entry side tip of the overhang portion 482 . In this case, with the displacement on the entry side of the lid member 480, a load can be applied to the granular member 320 in a direction to push the granular member 320 outward in the left and right direction.

  Also, the direction of the protrusion is not limited to this. For example, the opposite inclination may be used, or the ridges may be formed along a single inclination direction instead of the pair of inclination directions, or may be a combination of projections with different inclination degrees, or the inclination There may be no protrusion (a protrusion extending on a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis, or a protrusion extending on a plane parallel to (or overlapping with) the rotation axis). Moreover, the number of protrusions is not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily.

  In addition, the protrusion length of a protrusion part is not limited at all. For example, the projecting end may be protruded until it reaches a circle having the same diameter as the rotation axis of the lid member 480, or the projection length of the lid member 480 from the advancing / retracting portion 481 may be constant. Also good. In the latter case, the surface connecting the protruding tips of the protrusions has a shape along the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the advancing and retracting portion 481, so the same effect as the effect obtained from the shape of the lid 480 is obtained It can be played by the club.

  The action timing of the projecting portion when the projecting portion is formed on the lid member 480 is not limited when the granular member 320 is stopped and the lid member 480 is displaced to the entering side. For example, in a state where the granular member 320 is located below the lid member 480, the drive motor MT1 is squeezed forward and backward in the vicinity of a state where the front transmission member 440 is rotated 66 degrees in the forward rotation direction based on the effect standby state. By rotating (for example, reciprocating between 56 degrees and 76 degrees), the linear movement member 410 and the collision member 420 can be displaced up and down little by little, and the granular member 320 placed on the collision member 420 Can be displaced up and down.

  Since the granular member 320 is not fixed to the collision member 420, it can be flipped up by the vertical displacement of the collision member 420 and collide with the projection of the lid member 480. Due to this collision, the repositioning of the granular member 320 can be performed, and the deposition of the granular member 320 can be broken.

  In addition, when the collision member 420 bounces up the granular member 320 (when it is lifted and displaced), the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entry side, so it is easy to apply a load to the granular member 320 via the projecting part. be able to.

  The execution of the small-sized forward and reverse rotation of the drive motor MT1 may be controlled so as to reverse the driving force in forward and reverse directions, or it may be that rotation in the forward direction is generated at short time intervals. In this case, reverse rotation of the drive motor MT1 can be generated by displacing the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission member 440 in the reverse rotation direction via the linear movement member 410 by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1.

  In the first embodiment, the curved plate portion 312 disposed opposite to the advancing and retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed along the same plane over the right and left so that the lid member corresponds to the shape of the lid member 480. Although the case where the space | interval of 480 and the curved plate part 312 changes is demonstrated, it does not necessarily restrict to this. For example, the curved plate portion 312 disposed opposite to the lid member 480 is not a flat surface but has a shape having irregularities (wave shape), and the relative position between the shape of the lid member 480 and the shape of the curved plate portion 312 You may comprise so that the space | interval of 480 and the curved plate part 312 may change. In addition, the entrance side end of the advancing and retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 may be formed in parallel with the axis of the rotation axis O1.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the contact area of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 is secured by changing the inclination angle of the contact surfaces 489a to 489c of the left cover member 489 has been described. It is not limited to this. For example, a roller member capable of changing the posture may be disposed on the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470, and the contact area with the inner surface of the left cover member 489 may be secured by the posture change of the roller member. In this case, the inner wall of the left cover member 489 can be formed as a simple through hole.

  In the first embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted through the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460, and a plurality of members (the linear movement member 410, the collision member 420, the contact member 430, the transmission arm In the situation where the member 470 and the lid member 480) are displaced, the case where the displacement timing is devised so as not to displace all the members at the same time has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, there may be timing to displace all members among the plurality of members by the driving force of the driving motor MT1. In this case, the drive motor MT1 to be adopted may be slightly enlarged.

  Although the case where driving force is transmitted by the front side transmission member 440 abutting on the linear movement member 410 has been described in the first embodiment, the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when at least a part of the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 is made of a magnetic material, and the ridge portion 414 of the linear motion member 410 is made of a magnetic material, when a repulsive force is generated between them, The load can be transmitted to the linear movement member 410 in a state where the transmission member 440 and the linear movement member 410 are not in contact with each other.

  For example, a magnetic material of a magnetic pole that generates an attractive force between the protrusion 446 and the protrusion 414 is disposed in a circumferential half portion of the transmission protrusion 446 that is disposed opposite to the protrusion 414 of the linear motion member 410. On the other hand, by configuring the magnetic material of the magnetic pole that generates a repulsive force between the protruding portion 414 and the circumferential half on the opposite side, the repulsive force can move the direct acting member 410 to the lower end position. The load at the start of the contact between the linear movement member 410 and the contact member 430 can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, the driving force is transmitted at two positions: the groove forming portion 442 formed on the front surface of the front side transmission member 440 and the groove forming portion 462 formed on the rear surface of the rear side transmission member 460. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a groove may be formed on at least one circumferential surface of the front transmission member 440 or the rear transmission member 460, and the transmission of the driving force may be increased by transmitting the driving force through the groove.

  Although the case where it may become unclear whether it is the timing to reverse rotate the front side transmission member 440 by the detection by the detection sensor SC4 has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in addition to the detection sensor SC4, a detection sensor for detecting the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 or the collision member 420 is disposed, and the detection result of the detection sensor and the detection sensor SC4 indicates that the front transmission member 440 is reversely rotated. Whether to allow or not may be determined. In this way, it is possible to determine whether or not the firing state has been reached by driving in the forward rotation direction, so that reverse rotation is possible if the firing state is not reached, and reverse rotation is not possible if the firing state is exceeded. It can be determined that it is possible.

  Although the case where the front side transmission member 440 and the rear side transmission member 460 are rotationally displaced has been described in the first embodiment, the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, at least one of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 may be displaced by a displacement other than rotation (for example, a linear movement slide).

  In the first embodiment, by making the shape of the extending claw portion 734 of the effect member 700 different at the upper and lower sides, it is possible to prevent a defect related to the displacement toward the collective arrangement state of the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760. Although the case where it comprises is demonstrated, it does not necessarily restrict to this.

  For example, by making the shape of the extension claw portion 734 different, the start timing of the expansion displacement in the radial direction is higher than the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 on the lower side. The design member 760 may be configured to be faster. As a result, the lower telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 balance the early start of the displacement due to their own weight, and for the player, the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 simultaneously in all directions. It can seem as if displacement starts.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the load is generated in the radial direction of the circle centered on the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730 by causing the rotary plate 730 to abut on the telescopic displacement member 740 has been described. It is not limited. For example, a spring member may be provided to apply a biasing force to the telescopic displacement member 740, and a biasing force may be applied to the telescopic displacement member 740, or a magnet may be disposed to apply a magnetic force to the telescopic displacement member 740. good.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotary plate 730 is used as means for transmitting a load to the telescopic displacement member 740 and as means for displacing the telescopic displacement member 740 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the means for applying a load to the telescopic displacement member 740 and the means for displacing the telescopic displacement member 740 may be provided separately.

  In the first embodiment, when the telescopic displacing members 740 are displaced toward the collective arrangement state, the first guided projections 743b receive a load first, and are further radially outward than the first guided projections 743b. Although the case where the 2nd to-be-guided protrusion 744b arrange | positioned receives a load after was demonstrated, it does not necessarily restrict to this. For example, the shape of the extending claw portion 734 of the rotary plate 730 may be configured to be reversed in order, or the load transmission to the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b simultaneously occurs. It may be configured as follows.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the telescopic displacement member 740 includes the two protrusions of the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, one protrusion may be configured to be obliquely provided with respect to the rotation axis of the rotary plate 730. In this case, in addition to the function of changing the arrangement of the telescopic displacing member 740, the function of causing a load for adjusting the posture of the shielding design member 760 can be generated in one protrusion.

  In the first embodiment described above, the extension claws 734 disposed outward in the circumferential direction are configured to assist the displacement toward the collective arrangement state of the telescopic displacement members 740, but it is not always necessary to It is not limited. For example, a protrusion is formed on the outer side of the circumference of the rotary plate 730, and the protrusion can be used to push the first guided protrusion 743b radially outward at the protrusion to the discrete state side of the telescopic displacement member 740. It can assist in the directed displacement.

  In the first embodiment, the lower arm member 630 suppresses the change in posture of the effect member 700 at the displacement lower end position, and loosens the degree of change in the posture of the effect member 700 allowed at the upper and lower intermediate positions. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the tolerance to the posture change of the effect member 700 may be increased toward the displacement lower end position.

  Moreover, although the degree of posture change was comprised by increase / decrease of the generation | occurrence | production position of the acting force with respect to the presentation member 700, it is not restricted to this. For example, you may comprise by increase and decrease of the generation | occurrence | production area of action force.

  That is, the contact area between the arc-shaped hole 634 and the auxiliary projection 712 may be variable. For example, the thickness (hole depth) of the arc-shaped hole 634 can be changed by changing the thickness of the tip portion of the lower arm member 630 for each part, and thus the arc-shaped hole 634 and the auxiliary projection 712 Contact area can be changed.

  The degree of posture change of the effect member 700 is not specified only by the connection position of the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700. For example, unevenness may be provided on the plate front surface of the main body member 601 disposed opposite to the pressing member PC1 of the lower arm member 630 or on the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 to change the distance from the pressing member PC1. good. In this case, in the process of displacing the lower arm member 630, the posture change of the effect member 700 can be easily allowed in the plate front surface of the main body member 601 or in the portion where the distance between the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 and the pressing member PC1 is large. As a result, in the portion where the distance is narrow, it becomes easy to suppress the posture change. Also, the gap may be configured to be gradually narrowed as the effect member 700 approaches the lower end.

  In the first embodiment, the configuration at the connecting position between the lower arm member 630 and the rendering member 700 is not changed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a resistance increase / decrease device capable of increasing / decreasing displacement resistance of relative displacement between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 may be provided at the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700. The resistance increase / decrease device may be a brake device capable of increasing / decreasing friction resistance, a device for increasing / decreasing displacement resistance by magnetic force, or a device for projecting the displacement of lower arm member 630 to a position that can be mechanically restricted. . In the case of a device using magnetic force, the magnetic body is easily disposed in a portion (for example, an auxiliary arm portion in which an arc-shaped hole 634 is formed) disposed close to the tip side of the lower arm member 630. be able to.

  In the first embodiment, the larger the displacement of the effect member 700 is, the larger the displacement of the effect member 700 is permitted as the arrangement position of the effect member 700 moves downward, and the upper and lower positions of the effect member 700 are fixed. Although the case where a displacement arises was demonstrated, it does not necessarily restrict to this. For example, control may be performed so that displacement in the enlargement direction occurs during displacement of the effect member 700 in the vertical direction. In this case, the lower arm member 630 is laterally displaced by displacing the telescopic displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 in the direction of contracting (radiating inward) the directing member 700 while the directing member 700 is moving downward. It is possible to offset the influence of changing from the long posture to the long posture up and down, and to suppress the posture change in the forward tilting direction of the effect member 700.

  Although the case where the effect member 700 was displaced up and down was demonstrated in the said 1st Embodiment, it does not necessarily restrict to this. For example, they may be displaced back and forth. In this case, an opening is provided at the central portion of the center frame 86, the effect member 700 projects to the front side of the center frame 86 in the collective arrangement state, and the state changes to the discrete state on the front side of the center frame 86. It may be configured to change to a larger state.

  In this case, in order to avoid a collision between the glass unit 16 and the rendering member 700, it is preferable to make an opening in the front side portion of the center frame 86 of the glass unit 16. That is, it is preferable to provide a second-layer glass unit covering the front side of the glass unit 16 separately from the glass unit 16 covering the front of the game area. In addition, the second glass unit is inclined from the front and rear position similar to the lower end of the glass unit 16 toward the front side as it goes upward, from the viewpoint of maintaining the size of the upper plate 17 Are preferred.

  Although the case where the posture of the shielding design member 760 and the tip end adjusting member 744 is easily inclined due to the positional relationship of the second long member 743 has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, biasing means such as a spring that generates a biasing force is disposed between the second long member 743 and the tip adjustment member 744, and the posture of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is set by the biasing force. It may be configured to change. In this case, since the posture inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be intentionally formed, the effect by the posture inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be easily exhibited.

  Although the case where the cable tube is wound around the wiring DK2 has been described in the first embodiment, the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the cable tube may be wound around the electrical wiring DK1. In particular, by winding the cable tube around the portion disposed on the upper side of the proximal end through hole 635a, it is possible to prevent the body member 601 or the front cover member 610 and the electrical wiring DK1 from being rubbed.

  Although the case where the wiring arm member 870 is displaced along the shape of the guide recess 886 in the displacement and rotation unit 800 has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a driving device such as a solenoid for changing the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 may be provided. By performing the operation control of the drive based on the detection of the position of the vertical slide member 820, the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 can be appropriately changed.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the electrical wiring DK2 is temporarily held by being pinched by the narrowed portion 871a of the wiring arm member 870 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the electrical wiring DK2 may be fixed to the wiring arm member 870 by a fixing tool such as a binding band, or the displacement direction of the electrical wiring DK2 may be limited.

  In addition, the fastening position of the electrical wiring DK2 can be set arbitrarily. For example, in the electrical wiring DK2 disposed through the connection position of the wiring arm member 870 and the vertical slide member 820, a fastening position (for example, the narrowed portion 871a) may be provided closer to the wiring arm member 870 than the connection position. The fastening position may be provided closer to the vertical slide member 820 than the coupling position.

  Further, the means for retaining the electrical wiring DK2 is not limited to the use for the electrical wiring DK2. For example, it may be used to hold the electrical wiring DK1 of the scaling unit 600. That is, the width of a part of the placement portion 635 in which the electrical wiring DK1 is disposed may be narrowed to limit the displacement by sandwiching the electrical wiring DK1 or the inner side of the placement portion 635. Alternatively, the electrical wiring DK1 may be temporarily fixed by a fixing tool such as a binding band at a position upstream or downstream of the placement portion 635 as the wiring path of the electrical wiring DK1.

  In this case, the target to which the electrical wiring DK1 is temporarily fixed may be the lower arm member 630 including the placement portion 635, or the effect member 700 disposed on the tip end side (one end side) of the lower arm member 630. Alternatively, the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 disposed on the base end side (the other end side) of the lower arm member 630 may be used, or the back case 510 to which the main body member 601 is fastened and fixed may be used.

  In the first embodiment, in the displacement and rotation unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 is displaced in the direction (longitudinal direction) in which the wiring arm member 870 approaches and separates from the vertical and horizontal planes in association with the horizontal slide member 840 displacing the vertical and horizontal planes. Although the case where it carries out was demonstrated, it does not necessarily restrict to this. For example, when the displacement direction of the horizontal slide member 840 is on the front and rear, left and right plane, it is naturally possible to displace the wiring arm member 870 in the vertical direction. It may be inclined and displaced.

  In the first embodiment, the relationship between the small diameter pinion 861 a and the large diameter pinion 861 b in the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the magnitude relationship may be reversed, or the small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b may be configured to have the same diameter.

  In the first embodiment, in the displacement and rotation unit 800, the electric wiring DK2 is displaced in a spiral shape in the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of arm members whose postures can be changed according to the vertical displacement of the vertical slide member 820 are disposed in accordance with the arrangement of the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b, and electrical wiring is made to pass through the plurality of arm members. Thus, the arrangement of the electrical wiring may be configured to be changeable by the posture change of the arm member.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 are integrally displaced in the displacement and rotation unit 800 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 may be spaced apart.

  In this case, the wiring arm member 870 can be displaced even while the vertical slide member 820 is stopped by arranging a driving device such as a solenoid for displacing the wiring arm member 870. Therefore, for example, by further separating the wiring arm member 870 from the vertical slide member 820 during rotational displacement of the wing-like member 854, the wiring arm member 870 is displaced if necessary even while the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. Can be driven and controlled.

  In the first embodiment described above, the expansion / reduction state of the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is changed in the effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800, but it is not limited thereto. Absent. For example, when the wing-like members 854 of the displacement rotation unit 800 having the same position in the front-rear direction with respect to the effect member 700 are disposed in the gaps between the shielding design members 760 of the effect member 700 in the discrete state May be changeable to the expanded state.

  In this case, a collision between the effect member 700 and the displacement rotation unit 800 can be avoided, and prediction of a change in the state of the effect member 700 from the arrangement of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be avoided. In this case, it is preferable to add a detection sensor for detecting the vertical position of the wing-like member 854 of the displacement rotation unit 800.

  Although the case where the shape of the intermediate flow passage LM1 is formed from the same shape as the guide path DL1 has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed as a flow path bent with a longer left-right width compared to the guide path DL1, may be bent in the front-rear direction, or may be formed as a flow path extending vertically without bending. .

  In the first embodiment, the intermediate flow path LM1 has been described as a path for causing the ball having entered the second winning opening 640 to flow down, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the intermediate flow passage LM1 may be used as the path of the ball entering the general winning opening 63, or may be used as the path of the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a, or may be used in combination. good. In addition, the intermediate flow passage LM1 may be configured as a path of a ball which has passed through the out port 71.

  Further, since the arrangement of the respective winning openings 63, 64, 640 and 65 is set at an arbitrary position in the game area, the arrangement of the intermediate flow passage LM1 can also be set arbitrarily. For example, the intermediate flow passage LM1 may be disposed on the left side of the game area.

  Further, the intermediate flow passage LM1 is not limited to the case where it is disposed on the back side of the game area. For example, they may be arranged side by side on the left and right of the game area, or may be arranged on the front side of the game area (inside the glass unit 16 or the like). Also in this case, the intermediate flow passage LM1 preferably includes a section flowing down along a path in a front view of the ball flowing down the game area.

  Further, for the purpose of putting the ball flowing down the middle flow passage LM1 into the player's field of view, it is sufficient if the middle flow passage LM1 is formed to be close to the left and right center side of the game area. Therefore, it may be a path that does not reach the inside of the center frame 86 in a front view.

  Although the case where the electric decoration substrate of the horizontal placement substrate unit 166 is disposed in the posture in which the thickness direction matches the vertical direction has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, as in the hemispherical illumination device 613, the electric decoration substrate may be arranged to be inclined with respect to the vertical direction.

  Further, the entire range of the electric decoration substrate is not limited to the one covered by the first decoration member 171. For example, a part of the electric decoration substrate may not be shielded, and light emitted from light emitting means such as an LED may be directly visible.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the displacement start timing of the telescopic displacement member 740 is changed by changing the shape of the guide hole 733 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, by forming the shape of the guide hole 733 in a step shape, a section in which the telescopic displacement member 740 is displaced and a section in which it stops may be alternately generated.

  Further, by holding the guide holes 733 formed in a step-like shape in a part of the guide holes 733, the shielding design member 760 can be displaced so as to approach or abut at different displacement loci or different displacement timings.

  Although the said 6th Embodiment demonstrated the case where the 1st light irradiation apparatus 6330 and the 2nd light irradiation apparatus 6340 which are arrange | positioned on the right and left of the emission presentation unit 6300 are equipped with a plurality of electric decoration board | substrates, it is necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the configuration using a plurality of electric decoration substrates may be adopted for the horizontally placed substrate unit 166 and the vertically placed substrate unit 167 of the light guide plate effect means 160. In addition, the portion corresponding to the horizontally long groove portion 171a of the decoration means 170 (left and right long portion) is configured to have good light transmission, and the horizontally long groove portion 171a is adopted as a crossing position of a plurality of electric decoration substrates. By arranging a light emitting means such as an LED, the light may be visible through the horizontal groove portion 171a.

  Further, from the viewpoint of increasing the light irradiation direction, the present invention is not limited to the case of using a plurality of hard electric decoration substrates. For example, light emitting means such as LEDs may be provided on a flexible substrate (flexible printed circuit board). In this case, the surface of the flexible substrate can be oriented in various directions by winding or fixing the flexible substrate in a part. As a result, the optical axis of the light emitting means such as an LED disposed on the surface of the flexible substrate can be oriented in various directions, and the light irradiation direction can be increased. Also, in this case, it can be configured with a single substrate.

  In each of the above embodiments, the configuration may be omitted (the number of configurations may be reduced in the case of a plurality) regardless of whether the number of configurations is one or more. Similarly, the number of configurations may be increased.

  For example, in the above embodiments, the case where the protrusions A 133 b are formed at two places of the key device A 130 has been described, but the number (the number of formations) of the protrusions A 133 b may be reduced to one. Similarly, in the above embodiments, the case where one key device A 130 is disposed in the main control device A 110 has been described, but the number (arrangement number) of such key devices A 130 may be increased to two or more .

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the arrangement position with respect to the other configuration of each configuration, the arrangement direction (direction, posture, phase) with respect to the other configuration of each configuration, or the arrangement based on the other configuration of each configuration You may change the order of. The order of arrangement may be changed for all configurations, or only some configurations may be interchanged. That is, the arrangement position, arrangement direction, and arrangement order of each configuration are arbitrary.

  For example, in each of the above embodiments, the opening A 260 (key device A 130) is on one side (first connection wall A 220 side) than the center of the operation wall A 210 (second region) in the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R). However, the opening A 260 (key device A 130) may be disposed at the center in the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A 210 (second region), and the opening A 260 (key device A 130) may be You may arrange | position in the longitudinal direction other side (3rd connection wall part A240 side).

  Further, for example, in each of the above embodiments, the direction in which the key device A130 (covering portion A270) connects the pair of projections A133b (projections A271b) is the longitudinal direction (arrow L) of the operation wall A210 (second region) In the arrangement direction (posture, phase) orthogonal to the direction R, the case where the arrangement is described, the direction in which the pair of projections A 133 b (projections A 271 b) are connected is the operation wall A 210 ( Predetermined direction (arrangement, phase) parallel to the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R directions) of the second region) and predetermined longitudinal direction (arrows L and R directions) of the operation wall A 210 (second region) The key device A130 (covering portion A270) may be disposed in the disposition direction (posture, phase) having an angle of 0 ° (angle greater than 0 ° and less than 90 °).

  Further, for example, in the above embodiments, the case where the opening A 260 (covering portion A 270), the opening A 250 (guide wall A 251), and the opening AOP 1 are arranged in order from the side closer to the first connection wall A 220 has been described. For example, the order of arranging the opening AOP1, the opening A250 (guide wall A251), and the opening A260 (covering portion A270) in the reverse order of the arrangement order of each embodiment (that is, from the side closer to the first connection wall A220) Or the order of arrangement of only a part may be reversed (for example, the order of arrangement where the opening AOP1 is located between the opening A250 (guide wall A251) and the opening A260 (covering portion A270) is illustrated Will be

  Although the above-mentioned each embodiment explained the case where covering A270 was projected on the front (surface by the side of arrow F) of operation wall A210, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the operation wall A210 is formed at the same height position as the end wall A272, A2272 (that is, the operation wall A210 doubles as the end wall A272, A2272), and a configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall A271 is provided. You may provide in the back side (arrow B direction side) of wall part A210 for operation.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the opening A250 is formed in the operation wall A210 and the opening A260 is formed in the covering portion A270 (end surface wall A272) has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. It may be formed at the site of That is, it is not necessary to form in the site | part made low one step among the outer surfaces of board | substrate box A100, A2100, A3100, A4100. As another part, for example, the part which forms the outer surface of substrate box A100, A2100, A3100, A4100, ie, front wall part A201 of box cover A200, A3200, upper wall part A202, lower wall part A203, left wall part Examples include A204 or right wall A205, back wall A301, upper wall A302, lower wall A303, left wall A304, or right wall A305 of box base A300. Similarly, as another part, for example, a first connection wall A220, a second connection wall A230, or a third connection wall A240 is exemplified.

  Although the above-mentioned each embodiment explained the case where covering A270 was projected on the front (surface by the side of arrow F) of operation wall A210, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the operation wall A210 is formed at the same height position as the end wall A272, A2272 (that is, the operation wall A210 doubles as the end wall A272, A2272), and a configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall A271 is provided. You may provide in the back side (arrow B direction side) of wall part A210 for operation.

  In this case, the switch device A120 may extend the length dimension of the operation portion A122 to a position where it protrudes from the front surface (surface on the arrow F direction) of the operation wall portion A210. In addition, it is preferable to provide guide wall A251 also in the back (surface by the side of arrow B) of wall part A210 for operation with the extension of the length dimension of operation part A122.

  In the above embodiments, when the recess is formed on the outer surface (front) of the box cover A200 or A3200, and the portion forming the recessed bottom of the recess is the operation wall A210 (ie, from the front wall A201) Although the operation wall A210 is positioned at a position one step lower (on the main control device A110 side), the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the outer surface (for example, the front) of the box covers A200 and A3200 It is also possible to form a protrusion and to form the projecting end face of the protrusion as the operation wall A210 (ie, to a position one step higher than the front wall A201 (opposite to the main control device A110) Position the wall portion A210).

  Although the case where the main control unit 100 is housed in the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 has been described in the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited thereto. The storage item is optional as long as the operator is operated through the opening. For example, it may not have an electrical configuration. Such a storage item includes, for example, a connecting portion connected to an open / close lid for opening and closing a discharge port for discharging a ball from a flow path of the ball, and the open / close lid is operated by operating the connecting portion as an operator. Members (structures, devices) that open and close the

  Although the case where a push button switch or a key operated selector switch is adopted as the operation means (switch device A 120, key device A 130) has been described in the above embodiments, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and other types The following operation means may be adopted. As another type of operation means, for example, a tactile switch, a rocker switch, a dip switch, a thumb rotary switch, a toggle switch and the like are exemplified.

  In the above embodiments, the operation mode of the operators (the operation unit A122 and the key A140) has been described as pressing and rotating, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and is formed on the box covers A200 and A3200. Any operation mode may be used as long as it is disposed to be operable via the openings (the openings A250 and A260 in the above embodiments). Other operation modes include pulling out, sliding, seesaw displacement (e.g., a mode in which the operation button is displaced like a seesaw by pressing both ends alternately, such as an operation button of a rocker switch), tilting (e.g. As in the operation lever of the switch, an aspect in which the operation lever is displaced so as to fall to one side with the base end side as a fulcrum is exemplified.

  In this case, the sliding direction of the operating element, the direction connecting both ends of the operating element for seesaw displacement, and the falling direction of the inclined operating element are in the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R directions) of the operation wall A210 (second region). It is preferable to dispose the operating means in a parallel posture. This is because the space formed along the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A 210 (second region) can be effectively used to improve the operability of the operation means.

  In any of the above-described operation modes, the shapes of the openings A250 and A260 in a front view are formed only in the area corresponding to the displacement trajectory of the operation element (the area necessary for allowing displacement). Also good.

  In the above embodiments, the case where a predetermined gap is formed between the face and the end face held by the finger of the key A140 and the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 (the outer edge of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b) has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and in a state where no external force is applied to the key A 140 or the key device A 130, at least one of the face or the end face gripped by the finger of the key A 140 and the end face wall portion A272 or A2272 The outer edge of the portion A 272 a or the square portion A 272 b may be in contact with the outer edge. That is, at least one of the face or end face gripped by the finger of the key A140 in the off position or on position is in contact with the end face wall A272 or A2272 (outer edge of the ring A272a or the square A272b), and the key A140 is operated At the time of (rotation), the end face of the key A 140 may be slid relative to the end face wall portions A 272 and A 2272 (the outer edge of the annular portion A 272 a).

  A gap between the face and end face of the key A140 held by the finger and the end face wall A272, A2272 (the outer edge of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b), the outer surface of the key device A130 and the inner surface of the cover A270. Between the outer surface of the key device A130 and the inner surface of the standing wall A290 and the lower wall portion A203, the inclination of the key device A130 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 is a prescribed angle (the angle at which the key device A130 can be inclined That is, at least one of the gaps is set to a value (the key A 140 or the key device A 130 is abutted) before the gap A reaches an angle at which it is difficult to cause detachment or damage of the leg A 131 or solder peeling). . The prescribed angle is preferably 10 degrees or less, more preferably 7 degrees or less, and still more preferably 5 degrees or less. In this embodiment, it is set to 7 degrees.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are formed at two places in the circumferential direction is described, but the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. , A 133 b may be formed only at one place or three or more places. Moreover, when forming in two or more places, those circumferential direction positions (phase) are arbitrary. That is, they may be formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction as in each of the above embodiments, or may be formed at uneven intervals in the circumferential direction.

  In each of the above embodiments, the protrusion A 271 b of the covering portion A 270 and the protrusion A 133 b of the key device A 130 are intermittently formed in the circumferential direction, but the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. , A 133 b may be formed continuously in the circumferential direction.

  In the above embodiments, the projection A271b of the covering portion A270 and the projection A133b of the key device A130 project radially outward, and the projection A133b of the device A130 is disposed in the space formed by the projection A271b. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and a projection is provided radially inward from the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and radially inward on the outer surface of the base A133a of the key device A130. A configuration may be employed in which a recessed portion that is recessed is recessed and the protruding portion of the covering portion A 270 is disposed in the internal space of the recessed portion of the key device A 130. In this case, the concave portion may be continued to the end surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the base A 133 a so that the covering portion A 270 can cover the key device A 130 (insert the protrusion into the concave portion) It is preferable to form an opening on the end face for inserting the portion into the recess.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the first protrusion A 211 and the second protrusion A 212 are connected to the covering portion A 270 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. You may connect.

  Although the above-mentioned each embodiment explained the case where two projected ridges (the 1st projected ridge A211 and the 2nd projected ridge A212) were connected to covering part A270, it is not necessarily restricted to this, and such formation number is It may be one or three or more. When forming a plurality, the connecting position of one end thereof and the covering portion A 270 is arbitrary. However, it is preferable to connect the other ridges to positions where the phases are different by about 180 degrees from the first ridges A 211 and the second ridges A 212 respectively. This is because the load input to the cover A 270 from the key A 140 in the off position / on position can be efficiently received.

  The cross-sectional shape of the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212, the other ridges, the height dimension of the cross-sectional shape (the front surface of the operation wall A210 (surface in the arrow F direction)) And width dimensions (dimensions in the direction perpendicular to the height direction of the cross section disappearing shape) are arbitrary and can be set as appropriate. Examples of the end face shape include a rectangular shape, a semicircular shape, a triangular shape, and a shape combining these. The relationship between the height dimension and the width dimension of the cross-sectional shape is arbitrary, and either one may be a large value.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the height dimensions of the first protrusion A 211 and the second protrusion A 212 (the vertical dimension from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall A 210) are along the extending direction Although the case where it is made constant is described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be changed along the extension direction.

  The height dimension may be configured to gradually decrease as it is separated from one end connected to the covering portion A270. In this case, the rigidity of the covering portion A 270 can be efficiently enhanced while reducing the material cost.

  Although the case where the rotation angle of the key A 140 (the phase difference between the on position and the off position) is set to 90 ° has been described in the above embodiments, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The phase difference may be set. That is, the rotation angle of the key A 140 may be set to an angle smaller than 90 °, or may be set to an angle larger than 90 °.

  In this case, the shape of the opening A 260 (the shape of the edge of the end wall A 272) is a region corresponding to the displacement locus of the key A 140 when the key A 140 is displaced (rotated) between the off position and the on position. It is preferable to form only in the (area required to allow displacement). That is, when the rotation angle of the key A 140 is θ, the opening A 260 is a first fan-shaped opening having a central angle of about θ for permitting displacement of a portion on one side of the rotation center of the key A 140; A second fan-shaped opening with a central angle of about θ for allowing displacement of a portion on the other side (opposite side to the one side) than the rotation center of the key A 140 is coupled with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees. It is formed in the following shape.

  In each of the above embodiments, from the rotation center and the rotation radius of a portion on one side of the key A 140 from the rotation center (the distance from the rotation center to the end surface (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped with a finger)) Although the case where the rotation radius of the other side portion is different from that of the rotation radius has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the rotation radius on one side and the other side The distance to the narrow surface (along the outer edge of the surface) may be substantially the same. That is, the first fan-shaped opening of the opening A 260 and the second fan-shaped opening may be openings of substantially the same size (radius).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the front wall shape of the operation wall A210 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape (rectangular shape). good. As another front view shape, for example, a substantially square shape, a substantially circular shape, a substantially elliptical shape, a substantially triangular shape, a substantially polygonal shape including pentagonal characters or the like, and a shape combining these are exemplified.

  In the above embodiments, the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 is substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction of the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 (box covers A200 and A3200). It is not limited and may be non-parallel. Alternatively, it may be substantially orthogonal (that is, the configuration in which the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 is along the directions of the arrows U and D).

  In each of the above embodiments, a part (three sides in the above embodiments) of the outer edge of the operation wall A210 is the connection wall (the first connection wall A220, the second connection wall A230, and the third connection wall). Although the case of being surrounded by A240) and the remaining part (one side in the above embodiments) of the outer edge is not surrounded (opened) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The entire area of the outer edge of the operation wall A210 may be surrounded by the connection wall.

  That is, in the front view of the box covers A200 and A3200, in the above embodiments, the operation wall A210 is positioned so that a part of the outer edge of the operation wall A210 coincides with a part of the outer edges of the box covers A200 and A3200. However, the operation wall A210 may be disposed (formed) at a position where the outer edge of the operation wall A210 does not coincide with the outer edge of the box cover A200, A3200.

  In the above embodiments, the case where the opening AOP1, the opening A250 (guide wall A251), and the opening A260 (covering portion A270) are arranged in substantially series (approximately one row) has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Other arrangements are also possible. As another arrangement, a staggered arrangement, an arrangement dispersed to a position having no regularity, a lattice arrangement (arrangement at a crossing point of a plurality of mutually orthogonal straight lines) and the like are exemplified. In the case of arranging in a substantially series (approximately one line), the arrangement direction may be arranged not to be parallel to the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 (box cover A200, A3200), the arrangement being substantially orthogonal It may be

  Although the above-mentioned embodiment explained the case where the front (surface by the side of arrow F) of end face wall A272, A2272 was formed as a flat face, it is not necessarily restricted to this, and end face wall A272, A2272 One or more projections or ribs may be erected from the front (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the above.

  In this case, the protrusion (rib) (for example, a portion formed by extending in a stripe shape while maintaining a substantially semicircular or substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape) has an end surface wall in a front view (view in the arrow B direction) It is preferable to extend radially outward from the center of the portions A272 and A2272 (the axial center of the peripheral wall portion A271) radially outward. In addition, it is preferable that a plurality of such ribs (ribs) be provided at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. As a result, even when the key A140 is engaged with the edge of the end wall A272, A2272 when the key A140 is extracted, the end wall A272, A2272 is lifted in the extraction direction of the key A140 (arrow F direction), It is because breakage of the end surface wall portions A 272 and A 2272 can be suppressed by utilizing the rigidity of the protrusion (rib).

  Alternatively, the protrusion (rib) may be formed in an annular shape in front view continuous in the circumferential direction. A plurality of such ribs (ribs) may be provided with different diameters (that is, with a predetermined distance in the radial direction). In addition, the circumferential direction may be intermittent (discontinuous).

  In each of the above embodiments, the height position of the standing front end surface of the standing installation wall A209 is retracted from the height position of the standing front end surface of the standing installation walls A208, A280, and A290 (that is, from the printed circuit board A119) However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the other standing walls A208, A280, and A290 may be retracted.

  Further, the amount of receding from the reference surface of each upright wall A208, A209, A280, A290 may be different from the amount of receding from the reference surface of the other upright walls A208, A209, A280, A290. Furthermore, the amount of retreat of one erected wall A208, A209, A280, A290 may be changed.

  In this case, it is preferable to reduce the amount of receding from the reference surface of the front end face of the standing installation wall as the standing wall is farther from the fastening hole A 206a. The printed circuit board A119 is separated from the standing wall when the standing wall is abutted as much as the area farther from the fastening hole A206a becomes weaker as compared with the near area when the standing wall is abutted. It becomes easy to be deformed (displaced) in the direction of movement and the degree of adhesion of the printed circuit board A119 to the front weakens, by reducing the amount of receding from the reference surface of the front end face of the standing wall as the standing wall is farther from the fastening hole A206a. This is because the close contact between the standing front end face of the standing wall and the front surface of the printed circuit board A 119 can be easily secured in all the standing walls.

  For example, in the present embodiment, assuming that the front end surface of the upright wall A209 closest to the fastening hole A206a is a reference surface, the fastening wall A280, the vertical wall A290, and the vertical wall A208 are in this order. As the distance from the standing wall A209) increases, the amount of retraction from the reference surface described above is reduced in this order according to the distance from the fastening hole A206a (ie, the standing front end face of the standing wall A208) It is preferable to minimize the amount of retraction from the reference surface of

  In each of the erected walls A208, A209, A280, and A290, the amount of retraction from the above-described reference surface may be reduced as the distance from the fastening hole A 206a increases. That is, the front end faces of the upright walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 may be inclined to the front wall A201 of the box covers A200 and A3200, for example.

  In the above embodiments, in the setting change mode, the case where the setting value is displayed on at least one of the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. In addition to this, it may be displayed on another display device. As other display devices, for example, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84 and the like are exemplified.

  Further, the set value may not be displayed on any of the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display.

  In this case, at the start of the setting change mode, the set value is updated to a predetermined initial value (for example, a first value) regardless of the set value before the start and the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed. The configuration may be such that the operator recognizes the setting value based on the number of times. Unauthorized acquisition of the setting value can be suppressed by an unauthorized means (for example, a means for photographing the display of the third symbol display device 81 by a hidden camera installed in a hall). In addition, when the setting is changed during the game, the player can be prevented from recognizing the setting value. In this case, the setting confirmation mode may be omitted.

  Although the description has been omitted in each of the above embodiments, a first detection sensor for detecting the relative position (rotational position with the hinge 18 as the rotation center) relative to the outer frame 11 is provided. When it is detected by the first detection sensor that the frame 12 is opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more, the above-described setting change is allowed, and the predetermined angle or more of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 is If opening (rotation) is not detected by the first detection sensor, the setting change may be prohibited (for example, the input from the switch device A 120 or the key device A 130 may be invalidated). . It is because it can control that setting change is made illegally.

  In addition, a second detection sensor is provided to detect the relative position (rotational position about the rotation axis A410) of the substrate box A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 relative to the inner frame 12, and the substrate box A100 relative to the inner frame 12 , A2100, A3100, and A4100 are detected by the second detection sensor that they are open (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more, the above-described setting change is prohibited (for example, switch device A 120 or key device If the second detection sensor does not detect the input from A130 (the input from A130 is invalid) and the substrate box A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 is not detected by more than a predetermined angle, the setting change It may be configured to be acceptable. It is because it can control that setting change is made illegally.

  Note that both the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor may be provided, or only one may be provided (the other may be omitted). When both are provided, the first detection sensor detects the opening (rotation) of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 at a predetermined angle or more, and the substrate box A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 The setting change described above may be allowed if the second detection sensor does not detect opening (rotation) equal to or more than an angle. In addition, as the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor, for example, a rotary sensor that detects a rotation angle, and a limit switch in which a mechanical detection unit is displaced with opening and closing are exemplified.

  In the above embodiments, if the predetermined electrical connection line (the electrical connection line connecting the power supply 115 and the audio lamp controller 113 to the main controller A110) is connected to the main controller A110, the switch device A120 is selected. Although the case where the operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is permitted (that is, the setting change is prohibited if a predetermined electrical connection line is not connected to the main control device A110) has been described, this is not necessarily the case. The predetermined electrical connection lines can be set (selected) arbitrarily.

  For example, the predetermined electrical connection line may be only the electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 to the main controller A110. That is, as long as at least the power supply device 115 is connected to the main control device A 110 by an electrical connection, it is connected regardless of the connection state of the other electrical connections (that is, even if it is connected or released). The operation (setting change) of the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 may be permitted even if the connection and the release are mixed. In this case, although the setting value accompanying the setting change can not be confirmed by the third symbol display device 81, it can be confirmed by the seven-segment display of the main control device A110.

  In the above embodiments, if the predetermined electrical connection line (the electrical connection line connecting the power supply 115 and the audio lamp controller 113 to the main controller A110) is connected to the main controller A110, the switch device A120 is selected. And the case where the operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is permitted (that is, the setting change is prohibited if the predetermined electrical connection line is not connected to the main control device A110) has been described. If the predetermined electrical connection line is not released from main controller A110, it is released regardless of the connection state of the other electrical connection lines (that is, it is released even if it is connected). Also, even if connection and disconnection are mixed, operation (setting change) of the switch device A 120 and the key device A 130 is not permitted (that is, the predetermined electrical connection line is the main control device). When connected to the A110 may be configured to set change is prohibited). Also in this case, the predetermined electrical connection line can be set (selected) arbitrarily.

  For example, the payout control device 111 is exemplified as the predetermined electrical connection line. According to this, since the power supply of the payout control device 111 is turned off, it is possible to suppress that the payout control device 111 is operated illegally and the payout of the game ball is performed.

  In the eighth embodiment, as the form of the portion projecting from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the end face wall portion A2272, the case where the ridges A2273 are extended in a streak shape has been described. It is not limited to For example, the plurality of projections may be arranged in parallel with a predetermined interval between the positions AP1 and AP6 including the positions AP2 and AP5. Alternatively, the protrusion A 2273 may be intermittently formed between the position AP 1 and the position AP 6 including the position AP 2 to the position AP 5.

  The range in which the protrusion A 2273 or the plurality of protrusions is formed is not limited to the range from the position AP1 to the position AP6 including the position AP2 to AP5, and the range may be reduced or enlarged. . Such a range may be set as the entire area of the outer edge of the annular portion A 272 a and the square portion A 272 b.

  In the ninth embodiment, the substrate box A3100 is rotated about the rotation axis A410 to a second position (a position where the front of the operation wall A210 faces the front of the pachinko machine A3010, FIG. Although the case where it arrange | positions to b) reference was demonstrated, it is not necessarily limited to this, It is of course possible to employ | adopt another displacement form.

  As another displacement form, for example, the substrate box is disposed so as to be slidably displaceable in the width direction (arrows L and R directions) with respect to the inner frame 12, and is slid to the opposite side (arrow L direction) with the hinge 18 Forms the substrate box at the second position, and forms the rotation axis A410 as an axis along the longitudinal direction (directions of arrows F and B) of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12), and the rotation axis By displacing (rotating) around A410 as a rotation center, a mode in which the substrate box is arranged at the second position is exemplified.

  Although the case where the rotation axis A4410 is formed in each of the sealing unit A400 and the sub cover A500 has been described in the tenth embodiment, the present invention is not limited thereto, and at least one or both rotation axes A4410 can be You may form in box cover A200, A3200 or box base A300. In this case, a divided body of the rotation axis A4410 is formed on each of the box covers A200 and A3200 and the box base A300, and the box covers A200 and A3200 are connected to the box base A300. A4410 may be formed.

  The same applies to the seventh to ninth embodiments, and the case where the rotation axis A410 is formed in the sealing unit A400 has been described, but the rotation axis A410 is formed on the box cover A200, A3200 or the box base A300. It is good. Further, as in the case described above, in the state in which the box covers A200 and A3200 are connected to the box base A300, one rotation axis A410 may be formed from divided bodies formed in each of them.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Directed with randomness>
A game machine comprising: action means; and displacement means configured to be displaceable by receiving action from the action means, the auxiliary means being configured to have a plurality of displacement modes of the displacement means. A1.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine which is disposed displaceably on the front side of a liquid crystal display area and is provided with a displacement means which is displaced with the drive of a driving device such as a motor (e.g. See). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the operation pattern of the displacing means is poor, the effect on the front side of the liquid crystal display area becomes monotonous, and the player's attention gradually decreases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, it is possible to make the displacement of the displacement means complicated by the action of the assistance means that the auxiliary means makes the displacement aspect of the displacement means in plural forms. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being bored and to keep the player's attention at a high level.

  In addition, the specific example of an auxiliary | assistant means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a box-shaped space forming means that constitutes a space in which the displacing means can be displaced, or a push that changes the displacement mode of the displacing means by displacing the displacing means by a drive device different from It may be a means. Further, the drive device of the pushing means may be used also as the drive device for driving the action means.

  In the gaming machine A1, the action means is capable of configuring a first state in which the first action portion can act on the displacement means, and a second state in which the second action portion can act on the displacement means. A game machine A2 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, since the portion when the action means acts on the displacing means can be made different, displacement occurs even if the action action of the action means is the same. The displacement modes of the means can be different.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the action means includes contact means for bringing a load into contact with the displacement means, and the load generation can be performed in a plurality of types of modes via the contact means. A game machine A3 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the displacement aspect of the displacing means can be made into a plurality of types by a plurality of types of load occurring through the contact means.

  In the gaming machine A3, the contact means is configured to be displaceable, and a first contact portion configured to be able to abut the displacement means, and configured to be able to abut the displacement means, and the first contact A second contact part different from the part, and an angle in a predetermined direction between the displacement direction of the contact means and the first contact part (or a tangent of the first contact part) is A game machine A4 characterized in that the angle between the displacement direction of the contact means and the second contact portion (or the tangent of the second contact portion) is different from the angle in the predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the directions of the load applied to the displacing means can be made different without changing the displacing direction of the abutting means. In the direction of

  In the gaming machine A4, the contact means is a tangent drawn to the first contact portion and the second contact portion, and tangents parallel to each other are orthogonal to the displacement direction of the contact means. A game machine A5 characterized in that it is configured.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4, since the load can be applied to the displacement means in a direction parallel to the plane along the displacement direction of the contact means, the energy loss is reduced. It can be done. Thereby, a large displacement amount of the displacement means can be secured.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the game machine comprises a load generating means configured to be capable of generating a load for displacing the action means, and the load generating means is a load when the arrangement of the displacing means is closer. A game machine A6 configured to generate

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the load can be efficiently transmitted to the displacement means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the action means is supported in a support mode that allows an attitude change, and the attitude change occurs on the side that easily maintains balance of the disposition of the displacement means with respect to the action means. A game machine A7 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the balance of the disposition of the displacing means can be maintained by the posture change of the acting means. It can be avoided to occur.

  The cause of the change in posture of the action means is not limited at all. For example, it may be generated by the balance of the load from the displacement means, or a drive device may be provided to change the attitude of the action means. When changing the posture of the operating means by balancing the load from the displacing means, it is easy to change the posture of the operating means by providing a plurality of different lengths from the part facing the displacing means to the support position of the operating means. Can occur in multiple ways.

  In any one of the game machines A1 to A7, the auxiliary means includes guiding means configured to guide the displacement of the displacing means, and the guiding means can guide the displacement in one direction of the displacing means First guiding portion and a second guiding portion capable of guiding displacement of the displacing means in the other direction, the first guiding portion and the second guiding portion being surfaces facing the displacing means A game machine A8 characterized in that the formation mode of is different.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be made different according to the displacement direction of the displacement means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the action means is configured to be displaceable, and the arrangement is configured to change the ease of maintaining the balance of the displacement means, at a position where the balance of the displacement means is easy to maintain. A game machine A9 characterized in that it is configured to act on the displacement means.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, it is possible to easily maintain balance of the displacement means with respect to the action means.

  The gaming machine A10 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, wherein the displacement means includes one or more members, which are not coupled to each other.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the advantageous effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, when the displacing means is composed of a plurality of members, it is possible to prevent the plurality of members from being combined and solidified. Therefore, a configuration in which a plurality of members scatter can be easily realized.

  In the gaming machine A10, the one or more members have their centers of gravity arranged at positions different from the member centers.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A10, it is possible to stabilize the attitude of the displacing means when the displacing means is disposed in the action means.

  In addition, the formation method of a gravity center is not limited at all. For example, a method of partially changing the density of the members may be used, or a method of partially making holes in the members may be used.

<Change by advancing / retracting means to advance / retract to the displacing range of the displacing means>
The range includes an arranging unit configured to be arrangeable in a predetermined range, and an advancing and retracting unit configured to be displaceable in a direction of advancing and retracting the range, and the advancing and retracting means enters the predetermined portion of the range to obtain the range A game machine B1 that is configured to be changeable in width, and is configured to have a plurality of types of change modes of the width.

  A gaming machine, such as a pachinko machine, comprising: a first movable member that is displaced to the left and right; and a second movable member that enters a range formed between the first movable members with displacement of the first movable member. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-231434). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is only one displacement mode when the second movable member enters the range, and there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the displacement mode of the second movable member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the advancing / retracting means is constituted of a plurality of types of change modes of the width of the range when entering into the range, so the displacement means of the arranging means can be constituted by a plurality of types. Can be improved.

  In addition, the aspect of the arrangement | positioning means is not limited at all. For example, a granular effect member formed of a resin material, a powdery member, a liquid, or a game ball may be used.

  Moreover, the method of comprising the change aspect of the width | variety of the range by the displacement of an advancing / retracting means by multiple types is not limited at all. For example, the entry side of the advancing and retracting means may be formed by an inclined surface, and the width of the range may be changed by providing the part having a different width into the range, or the range by changing the displacement width of the advancing and retracting means It may be possible to change the width of.

  In the gaming machine B1, the range is formed inside the box-like means configured to be able to prevent the placement of the arrangement means from entering and exiting, and is configured to be changeable, and the advancing and retreating means enters in the non-changed state of the range. A game machine B2 that is configured to be displaceable in an aspect, and the box-like means includes an opening portion through which the advancing and retracting means can be inserted and the placement means can not be inserted.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, while advancing and retreating means can be made to enter the range through the opening, it is possible to prevent the placement means from falling out of the range.

  In addition, arrangement | positioning of an open part is not limited at all. For example, the placement means may be placed at a location that is difficult to reach. In this case, it is possible to further reduce the possibility of the placement means accidentally falling out of the range. In addition, the opening portion may be disposed at a location where a load from the placement means is less likely to occur (for example, the upper side as the opposite side in the direction of gravity). In this case, the load from the placement means is given to the advancing and retracting means during displacement, and it is possible to prevent the displacement of the advancing and retracting means from being disturbed or the occurrence of a defect in the advancement or withdrawal means or the placement means.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the advancing / retreating means is configured to be different in the direction of guiding the arranging means according to the direction in which the advancing / retreating means abuts on the arranging means.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, it is possible to show the player that the arranging means is guided in the different directions by the same advancing and retreating means. As a result, since the types of effects can be increased, it is possible to improve the effects of the effects using the arranging means and the advancing and retreating means.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the advancing / retracting means is configured such that the gap between the opposing surface of the range is shorter than the width of the arranging means when entering the range. Game machine B4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the advancing and retreating means are used as the arranging means in the state of entering even if the arranging means is arranged far from the advancing and retreating means Can act.

  In addition, you may comprise so that a clearance gap may not exist between an advancing and retreating means and the opposing surface of a range. Also, there may be a gap in part and no gap in other parts.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the advancing / retreating means is configured to enter into the range by rotational displacement about a predetermined axis, and at the tip on the entering side, the representative tip farthest from the axis is the aforementioned A game machine B5 characterized in that a gap between the range is the shortest.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the representative tip which is most likely to have the largest positional deviation from the axis enters into the range first, Misalignment can be dealt with early, and the resistance of the subsequent approach motion can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B5, the representative leading end portion is provided with a predetermined overhanging portion, and is formed so as to be inclined toward the retreating side from the range as the distance from the overhanging portion along the axial direction increases. Gaming machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the arranging means can be displaced away from the predetermined overhanging portion in the process of entering the advancing and retreating means.

  In the gaming machine B6, the advancing / retreating means is configured to have a shape in which the range side is opened at a position away from the overhanging portion in the axial direction.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B6, the shape of the advancing / retreating means is such that the range side is opened at the position away from the overhanging portion, so the dispositioning means pushed away by the overhanging portion Placement locations can be secured.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as a shape by which the range side is open | released. For example, the shape may be such that the range side is opened before entering the advancing and retracting means, or the shape may be opened when the advancing and retracting means enters.

  In any one of the game machines B5 to B7, the game machine comprises a drive means capable of generating a drive force, and a transfer means configured to be able to transmit the drive force of the drive means to the advancing and retracting means; The drive force is transmitted by contact, and the contact area of the contact surface between the transfer means and the advancing and retracting means is configured to be changeable, and the contact area is an entry into the range of the advancing and retracting means A gaming machine B8 characterized in that it is initially maximized and then decreased.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the contact area is maximized at the initial stage of entering where a large load is likely to occur because the advancing / retracting means starts contacting the placement means. By doing this, the load per unit area of the contact surface can be reduced. Thus, the durability of the advancing and retracting means and the transmitting means can be improved.

  In addition, the aspect of an advancing and retreating means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means which is displaced outside the game area, or a means which is displaced within the game area.

<Synchronize two members with transmission cam>
A driving unit, a displacement unit configured to be displaceable and configured by one or a plurality of members, and a transmission unit configured to be capable of transmitting the driving force of the driving unit to the displacement unit, the transmission unit comprising: A first transmission portion configured to be capable of transmitting the driving force of the drive means to a first target portion of the displacement means in a first aspect; and a second transmission means different from the first aspect in the second aspect A game machine C1 comprising: a second transmission unit configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive means to a second target unit.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, which is a driving device used for displacing the displacing means, comprising a first driving device for vertically displacing the displacing means, and a second driving device for rotationally displacing the displacing means There is a gaming machine (see, for example, JP-A-2016-202210). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, even if the first drive device and the second drive device are synchronized to displace the plurality of displacement means in order to execute the operation effect of the displacement means, the drive timing is shifted. There is a problem that the possibility can not be excluded and the displacement of the displacement means tends to be unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the transmission means is provided with the first transmission part and the second transmission part, and the driving force is transmitted to the first object part or the second object part of the displacement means, respectively. Since it is comprised, transmission of the driving force to a 1st object part and a 2nd object part can be synchronized automatically, and the displacement of a displacement means can be stabilized.

  In addition, the time to which driving force is transmitted is not limited at all. For example, a mode may be employed in which the driving force is simultaneously transmitted to the first target unit and the second target unit, the time at which the driving force is transmitted may be divided, or a combination thereof (partially simultaneously transmitted) may be used.

  In the case where the driving force is simultaneously transmitted to the first object portion and the second object portion, it is preferable that the generation direction of at least a part of the driving force be arranged along the gravity direction. Thus, it is possible to use its own weight for driving force transmission.

  In the gaming machine C1, a gaming machine C2 characterized in that the driving force transmission to the first object part and the driving force transmission to the second object part are generated at different times.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the driving force required of the driving means can be suppressed by suppressing the maximum value of the driving resistance low.

  Here, driving force transmission may mean load in the traveling direction in which the transmission means is displaced by the driving force, or as load transmission caused by displacement caused by the driving force without considering the traveling direction. Also good.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the displacement means includes a first member having the first object portion and a second member having the second object portion, and a displacement locus of the first member and the second member And the first member is configured to be able to abut on the second member in a predetermined arrangement, and in the state of being in contact with the second member via the first member. A game machine C3 characterized in that the driving force can be transmitted to the second member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, a plurality of types of states in which the driving force is transmitted to the displacement means can be configured. In other words, the case where the driving force is directly transmitted to the second member from the transmission means and the case where the driving force is indirectly transmitted via the first member can be configured.

  In the gaming machine C3, in a state in which the first member is displaced toward the predetermined arrangement, the second member is configured to be retractable to a position not in contact with the first member. .

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3, it is possible to avoid the contact of the first member during displacement with the second member. Thereby, the contact between the second member and the first member occurs when the first member arrives at a predetermined position and stops, so that the mode of transmission of the driving force to the second member is smoothly generated. Can be made easier.

  In the game machine C3 or C4, a state of the first member is associated with an arrangement of the transmission means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3 or C4, switching of the transmission mode of the driving force can be performed by changing the arrangement of the transmission means, so that the displacement of the first member and the second member is stabilized. Unintended collision or contact of each member can be avoided.

  One of the gaming machines C3 to C5 includes biasing means configured to be capable of biasing the second member in a predetermined direction, and drive power transmission to the second member is in a direction opposed to the biasing force. A game machine C6, wherein the first member is arranged on the predetermined direction side with respect to the second member in the predetermined arrangement.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the first member may be disposed in a predetermined arrangement with the second member disposed opposite to the first member in the predetermined direction. Can. As a result, it is possible to form the timing for displacing the second member against the biasing force with the displacement of the transmission means, and the timing for holding the second member against the biasing force.

  In the gaming machine C6, the gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the first member is displaced toward the predetermined arrangement while the first transmission portion of the transmission means is displaced in the predetermined direction side. .

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, a part of the load required for the displacement of the first member can be generated by the biasing force of the biasing means. That is, the biasing force can be used auxiliaryly.

  In any one of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the second transmission unit is capable of forming a non-contacting state in which the second transmitting unit is not in contact with the second member, and in the non-contacting state, displacement of the second member A game machine C8, characterized in that the second member is configured such that the second transmission unit does not disturb.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the displacement state of the second member as the displacement state of the second member, and the displacement state of being separated from the second transmission portion And can be configured.

  In any one of game machines C3 to C8, a straight line extending in parallel with the predetermined direction from the contact point between the first member and the transmission means arranged in the predetermined arrangement makes the displacement of the transmission means a predetermined mode. A gaming machine C9 characterized by passing through a regulating section that regulates.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines C3 to C8, reaching the driving means by blocking the urging force transmitted to the transmitting means via the first member by the regulating section. Can be prevented (the degree can be lowered).

  In addition, the aspect of a control part is not limited at all. For example, the guide portion may limit the displacement mode to slide displacement by restricting the displacement, or may be a shaft support portion limited to rotational displacement.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C9, a first target portion of the displacement means receives a load from the second target portion in a first state of being displaced or stopped by receiving a driving force of the driving means. A game machine C10 characterized in that it is changeable in a second state in which it is displaced or stopped.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the displacement mode of the first target portion can be complicated.

<Stop the load transfer by limiting the occurrence of the load at a time>
A game machine comprising a drive means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable, and a transmission means configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive means to the displacement means, the abutment contacting the displacement means A first means configured to be changeable in a state and in a non-contact state not in contact with the displacement means, and an object to which an externally applied load is transmitted to the first means is configured to be switchable Game machine D1 characterized by

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which displacement means composed of one movable body displaced by the driving force of the driving means can come into contact with another movable body at a displacement end position (upper end position) and receive a load. (See, for example, JP-A-2016-028623). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a risk that loads from other movable bodies may be transmitted to the drive means via the displacement means, and the state of the drive means by control (for example, the rotation angle of the motor); There is room for improvement from the viewpoint of stabilizing the drive state because there may be a difference with the actual drive means state.

  In addition, the load applied to the drive means may cause the operating resistance of the drive means to increase or decrease in an unstable manner, which may accelerate the deterioration of the drive means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the load transmission in the contact state can be suppressed, the drive state of the drive means can be stabilized. Further, the durability of the drive means can be improved by suppressing the unstable increase and decrease of the operating resistance of the drive means.

  In addition, the method of suppression of the load transmission in a contact state is not limited at all. For example, a member capable of absorbing a load may be interposed in the contact portion, and the displacement of the first means (for example, the first means is subjected to an external force) causing the load is the first means. It may be configured to occur only in the non-contact state.

  A gaming machine D2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine D1, a load received by the displacement means from the first means and a driving force received by the displacement means via the transmission means face the same side.

  According to the gaming machine D2, compared with the case where the load from the first means and the driving force face the opposite side, the load received by the displacing means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the first means is provided with placement means disposed to be able to collide, and the collision of the placement means is configured to occur in a non-contact state with the transmission means and the displacement means. Game machine D3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, a collision of the placement means occurs in the non-contacting state of the transmission means and the displacement means, so that the load transmission is performed between the transmission means and the displacement means It can be shut off.

  The collision of the arrangement means may occur in the contact state of the first means or in the non-contact state. When the collision of the placement means occurs in the non-contact state, the load transmission between the first means and the displacement means can be interrupted, so the arrangement of the transmission means (the presence or absence of the contact between the transmission means and the displacement means Regardless of the above, it is possible to suppress load transfer to the drive means.

  In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the transmission means includes an abutment portion configured to be abuttable to the displacement means, and the abutment portion bends in the direction of the load generated by the abutment ( A game machine D4 characterized in that it can be flexibly deformed.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the load transmission between the displacing means and the transmitting means is suppressed by absorbing the load by bending (deformation) of the contact portion. can do.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the first means and the displacement means include a second contact portion configured to be abuttable, and the second means of at least one of the first means or the displacement means. A game machine D5 characterized in that the contact portion is formed of a shock absorbable material.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, since the second contact portion can absorb an impact, it is possible to suppress load transmission to the driving means.

  One of the game machines D1 to D5 is characterized in that it comprises biasing means for biasing the displacement means, and the standby position of the displacement means is set at the end of the biasing direction displacement range of the biasing means. A gaming machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, it is possible to avoid shifting of the standby position of the displacing means (position for waiting for load generation from the transmitting means). It is easy to arrange the stop position (high-speed rotation start position) of the transmission means at an appropriate position in the control of operating the transmission means at high speed to the position where the first means and the displacement means are separated. Thereby, control of a drive means can be performed easily and appropriately.

  In addition, by lowering the degree of freedom of the arrangement of the first means and the displacement means, it is possible to prevent the contact between the first means and the displacement means carelessly.

  A game machine D7 according to any one of the game machines D3 to D6, characterized in that the first means is allowed to change in posture due to a collision of the arrangement means.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the load from the arranging means can be used for the attitude change of the first means, thereby suppressing the load transmission to the driving means. be able to.

  In the gaming machine D6 or D7, the first means and the displacing means are in contact with each other, and the transmission means and the displacing means are not in contact with each other, whereby the first means performs the biasing force of the biasing means. An urging state to be received, the transmission means is in contact with the displacement means, and the displacement means is displaced to the side opposite to the direction of the urging force of the urging means, and the first of the urging forces of the urging means A game machine D8 characterized in that the state change is possible between an invalid contact state in which the transmission to the means is invalidated and a non-contact state in which the first means and the displacement means are separated.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6 or D7, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of states of the first means (for example, the degree of ease of posture change with respect to collision of the arranging means).

<Conditionally restrict one rotation of forward / reverse rotation>
A displacement means configured to be displaceable along a path including a predetermined position is provided, and the displacement means is configured to be displaceable from the predetermined position to a reference position serving as a reference point at which the displacement mode changes. A game machine E1 characterized in that it is displaceable to the predetermined position in the mode of.

  BACKGROUND In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that controls the same movable combination to perform different actions in a plurality of effects (for example, see JP-A-2016-73517). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the different operations correspond to the presence or absence of the switching of the drive direction of the drive device, the type of effect can be determined from the drive sound of the drive device, and the effect to be executed from now There is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the player's interest, since the player can predict about.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine the effect to be executed from now on by the determination participation means. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest.

  In addition, the displacement aspect of a displacement means is not limited at all. For example, different effects involving displacement of the displacing means may be provided between the correct effect and the off effect. In this case, if the displacement mode to the predetermined position of the displacing means is uniform, displacement from the predetermined position occurs (for example, driving noise is generated), and it is determined whether or not the situation is true. On the other hand, by setting the displacement mode to a plurality of types, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not displacement occurs (for example, drive noise is generated).

  Moreover, as a displacement aspect, it is not limited at all. For example, it may be a path, a displacement velocity, or a velocity pattern of displacement.

  The gaming machine E1 includes a drive means for generating a driving force for displacing the displacing means, and a restraining means for restraining the displacement of the displacing means. A gaming machine E2 characterized in that the displacement of the displacement means can be regulated in the absence state.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the driving sound of the driving means can be extinguished when the displacing means is regulated. It can be made difficult to determine whether it is in the reverse direction.

  Further, unlike the case where the driving force continues to be generated by the driving means when the effect (long reach etc.) is performed for a long time in a state where the displacement of the displacing means is restricted, heat generation of the driving means can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the regulating means is displaced to a position where it can act on the displacing means by the driving force of the driving means.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the number of driving means can be reduced as compared with the case where a driving means for driving the regulating means is separately provided.

  A gaming machine characterized by comprising discrimination participation means configured to have a section that makes it difficult to discriminate in which of the plurality of types of modes it is displaced in any of the game machines E1 to E3. E4.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the discrimination participation means can be configured to make it difficult to determine the displacement mode of the displacement means in a predetermined section. As compared with the case where it is difficult to determine the displacement mode, it is easy to perform the displacement continuation of the displacement means while it is difficult to determine the displacement mode.

  In the gaming machine E4, a gaming machine E5 characterized in that the arrangement of the displacement means can be maintained in the section.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, it is possible to switch the driving direction of the driving means while maintaining the displacing means. Thus, it is possible to prevent the type of the displacement mode of the displacement means from being detected from the drive sound. Therefore, for example, drive control can be performed such as starting the drive of the drive unit before notification of success or failure.

  One of the game machines E1 to E5 includes detection means capable of detecting the position of the displacement means, and the detection means determines the switching of the feasible displacement among the displacements in the plurality of types of displacement modes. A game machine E6 characterized in that it is also used as a determination means.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the sensor for detecting the position of the displacing means can also be used as the sensor for determining the displacement mode switching. The number of arrangement can be reduced.

<A sense of unity of multiple members>
It is a game machine which is constituted so that displacement of the 1st member and the 2nd member is possible, and a mode that the 1st member and the 2nd member adjoin differ by the 1st member and the 2nd member A game machine F1 characterized in that

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that controls the first member and the second member configured to be displaceable so as to move up and down while maintaining a close state (for example, JP-A-2015-231434) See). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the displacement of the first member and the second member occurs on the same straight line, there is a possibility that the first member and the second member may return after contact depending on the approaching speed. Yes, it may look bad. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of maintaining the rendering mode regardless of the displacement speed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the aspect in which the first member and the second member approach is made different. For example, the displacement modes of the first member and the second member are not made close to one another on the same straight line, but are changed in direction after coming close to another straight line so that they approach each other. Reversion can be avoided, and the presentation mode can be easily maintained.

  In the gaming machine F1, the displacements of the first member and the second member are at least divided into a first section for coming close to each other and a second section as a preparation section for coming in contact with each other. The game machine F2 characterized in that the second member is configured such that the postures in the first section and the second section are different.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the postures of the first member and the second member can be changed in accordance with the purpose of the displacement.

  A game machine F3 comprising a load generation unit capable of generating a load directed to the side maintaining the close arrangement of the first member and the second member in the game machine F1 or F2.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the arrangement of the first member and the second member can be maintained by the load generation means.

  The load generated by the load generation means is not limited to a load in a fixed direction or a load of a fixed size. For example, when the load (for example, the effect mode causing an external force) susceptible to change depending on the situation (for example, the game state), the direction or the size of the load generated by the load generating means may be changed accordingly.

  Moreover, the load generated by the load generating means does not have to be always generated. For example, the generation of the load and the cancellation of the load may be switched in accordance with the change in the above-mentioned situation. The load generating means may be external.

  The gaming machine F3 includes displacement generating means configured to displace at least one of the first member or the second member, and configured to be able to configure a predetermined state by the displacement, the load generating means including the displacement A game machine F4 characterized by being integrally formed with the generation means.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F3, the relationship between the timing of load generation by the load generation means and the arrangement of the first member and the second member can be properly maintained, and the timing shifted Load can be prevented.

  Also, the action of the load generating means and the action of the displacement generating means can be complemented with each other. For example, the load of the load generating means can be used to assist the displacement of the first member or the second member generated by the displacement generating means.

  In the gaming machine F4, the predetermined state is an abutting state in which at least a part of the first member abuts on the second member.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F4, it is possible to easily carry out the effect of filling the gap between the first member and the second member.

  In the game machine F4 or F5, the load generation means is configured to generate a load in the predetermined state.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F4 or F5, it is possible to avoid that the load of the load generating means affects the first member and the second member until the state except the predetermined state.

  In any one of the game machines F3 to F6, the load generation means is configured to generate loads at a plurality of places with respect to the first member or the second member.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in any one of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the load generating means generates loads at a plurality of locations with respect to the first member or the second member, so that it is not limited to maintaining the state against displacement in one direction. It is also possible to maintain the state of the first member or the second member with respect to posture change. Thereby, even when the first member and the second member are three-dimensionally configured, it is possible to avoid that the displacement of the arrangement is noticeable.

  In the gaming machine F7, the first member or the second member includes a plurality of loaded portions that receive a load from the load generating unit, and the plurality of loaded portions include a first loaded portion and the first loaded portion. And a second loadable portion having a displacement amount with respect to the load generation means larger than a loadable portion, wherein the load generation means applies a load to the first loadable portion earlier than the second loadable portion. A game machine F8 characterized in that it is configured.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F7, the load from the load generating means can be applied stepwise to the first member or the second member. In addition, the roles of loads applied to the first loadable portion and the second loadable portion can be divided. For example, in the role of arrangement of the first loadable portion in a predetermined position, the second loadable portion can be used in role of attitude adjustment.

  In any one of the gaming machines F3 to F8, a portion of the load generating means, which applies a load facing the gravity to the first member or the second member to the first member or the second member, is compared to the other portion. Alternatively, a game machine F9 characterized in that the attacking length of the facing surface facing the second member is formed long.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F3 to F8, it is possible to easily cope with the sagging of the first member or the second member due to its own weight. On the other hand, as for the other part, the opposing surface facing the first member or the second member can be formed short, so the design freedom of the load generating means can be improved, or the opposing surface can be easily concealed.

  In any one of the game machines F3 to F9, the assembling of the first member and the second member is possible in a state where the first member and the second member are separated. .

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F3 to F9, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of cracking or chipping in the first member or the second member due to the load generated in the assembling operation. That is, as compared with the case where the assembling work is performed in the abutting state, it is easy to avoid the occurrence of the load transfer between the first member and the second member, so that the first member and the second member can be assembled without any loss. it can.

  As a result, the first and second members can be provided with contact surfaces as designed. This prevents the possibility of misalignment due to the load generated by the load generation means, for example, when there is a gap. can do.

<Configuration of multiple types of wobbling of displacement means>
A game machine G0 comprising a displacement means and an action means for displacing the displacement means, the action means being configured to suppress a change in posture of the displacement means in a predetermined direction.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with displacement means configured to be capable of displacement constituted by arrangement change and rotation (see, for example, JP-A-2016-116782). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, although the portion for supporting the displacement means disposed at the tip of the arm is formed to have a large diameter, the attitude of the displacement means is necessary due to the necessity of providing a gap for securing displacement. There is a problem that the measures against the change are not sufficient and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of suppressing the change in posture of the displacement means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G0, the change in posture of the displacement means can be suppressed by the configuration of the action means. Thus, even if the space where the displacement of the displacement means is permitted is narrow, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a collision between the wall member forming the space and the displacement means.

  The direction of the posture change of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, tilting may be performed with a straight line along the horizontal direction (horizontal direction etc.) as an axis, or may be horizontal swinging with a straight line along a vertical direction (vertical direction etc.) as an axis.

  In the game machine G0, the action means is configured to be capable of increasing / decreasing an action force for suppressing a change in posture of the displacement means in accordance with an arrangement position of the displacement means.

  According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G0, it is possible to change the degree of suppression of the posture change of the displacing means corresponding to the arrangement of the displacing means. Thereby, the arrangement space of the displacement means can be narrowed while maintaining a high degree of freedom of the effect of the displacement means.

  For example, when the displacing means reciprocates, the posture of the displacing means tends to collapse at the displacing end where the switching of the displacing direction is performed, and when the displacing means is disposed at the displacing end, the acting force generation position By increasing the number, it is possible to suppress the collapse of the attitude of the displacement means.

  Also, for example, even when the displacement means itself is subjected to enlargement / reduction displacement or rotational displacement by the driving force mounted on the displacement means, the posture of the displacement means tends to break, so the driving force generation position It is possible to suppress the collapse of the attitude of the displacing means by increasing the action force generation position in the above.

  In the game machine G0 or G1, the action means is configured to support the displacing means by a plurality of main support means disposed on a horizontal surface passing through the center of gravity of the displacing means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G0 or G1, since the action means supports the displacement means by the plurality of main support means on the horizontal plane of the center of gravity of the displacement means, tilting of the displacement means is prevented. It can be made easy.

  In the game machine G2, the action means includes auxiliary support means for supporting the displacement means at a position different from the horizontal plane on which the main support means is arranged.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, the main supporting means and the auxiliary supporting means support the displacing means at three or more supporting points which are not arranged in a straight line. Attitude change can be suppressed in all directions.

  In the game machine G3, the auxiliary support means also functions as a guide means for guiding the displacement of the displacement means with respect to the action means.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3, the auxiliary supporting means can be added not only as a supporting force generation position but also as a position for guiding a displacement.

  In the gaming machine G1, the displacement means is displaceable in such a manner that the area in a predetermined direction increases or decreases, and the action means is configured such that the action force generation position is maximized at the displacement end position of the displacement means. Game machine G5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G1, it is possible to generate an action force to the displacing means at a plurality of points at the displacement end position where the area increasing effect of the displacing means is most effective. The posture change of the displacement means can be effectively suppressed.

  Furthermore, the displacement resistance of the displacing means can be reduced and the displacement can be made smooth by relatively reducing the acting force generation position during displacing of the displacing means. That is, during the displacement of the displacing means, since it is easy to maintain the posture due to the inertia associated with the displacement, if the acting force generation position is excessively increased, the acting force becomes excessive and the displacement resistance of the displacing means is often increased. The problem of an increase in the size of the drive device is assumed.

  On the other hand, by reducing the action force generation position at a position other than the displacement end position, it is possible to avoid excessive displacement resistance of the displacement means and to avoid enlargement of the drive device.

<Wiring guide of propeller unit>
A displacement means, an electrical wiring connected to the displacement means, and an electrical wiring displacement means configured to be capable of displacing a predetermined part of the electrical wiring, the electrical wiring displacement means comprising The game machine H1 is characterized in that the predetermined part is configured to be displaceable to a side that avoids the displacement means when being displaced to the side approaching.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which the electrical wiring connected to the displacement means is aligned with an elongated member interlocking with the displacement means, and the arrangement of the electrical wiring is limited (for example, JP 2012-157474A) See official gazette). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is difficult to configure the displacement means to continue to be displaced over the electrical wiring for the purpose of avoiding contact between the displacement means and the electrical wiring, and it is more difficult than the displacement end of the displacement means. Since the space for arranging the electric wiring outside is required, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement means becomes low.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the predetermined portion of the electric wiring is displaceable to the side avoiding the displacement means by the electric wire displacement means. Therefore, the contact between the displacement means and the electric wire is made positive The displacement means can be configured to be displaced over the electrical wiring. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement means can be increased.

  In addition, when a displacement means approaches a predetermined part, it is not limited at all. For example, when the predetermined part stops, there is a risk that the displacement means and the predetermined part may come into contact with each other, or the distance between the predetermined part and the displacement means may be closer than the reference length.

  In the gaming machine H1, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in at least a first direction and a second direction, and the predetermined portion is displaceable in a third direction orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction. A game machine H2 characterized in that it is configured.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, it is possible to avoid that the displacement amount of the displacing means on the predetermined plane formed by the first direction and the second direction is restricted to the electrical wiring.

  In the gaming machine H2, a gaming machine H3 characterized in that the first direction and the second direction are parallel to a plane orthogonal to a predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H2, the displacement direction in which the predetermined part is displaced can be made to be the direction along the predetermined direction view, so that the electrical wiring is displaced, and the predetermined direction view is achieved. It is possible to reduce the influence on the appearance.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the electric wiring displacement means comprises a holding means for holding a second predetermined portion of the electric wiring arranged on the opposite side of the displacement means with respect to the predetermined portion, the electric wiring displacement means A game machine H4 characterized in that the second predetermined part is configured to be easily displaced relative to the stopping means.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, it is possible to improve the durability of the second predetermined portion of the electrical wiring disposed in the retaining means.

  The configuration in which the second predetermined portion is easily displaced relative to the retaining means is not limited at all. For example, when the second predetermined portion is disposed in a spiral shape in the retaining means, the second predetermined portion may be pushed along the tangential direction of the outer peripheral portion of the spiral, or the second predetermined portion may be moved to the movable member. When guided, the second predetermined portion or the movable member may be pushed so as to displace the movable member.

  In the gaming machine H4, the holding means is disposed outward of the displacement end of the displacement means in the first direction.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H4, since the stopping means is disposed outward from the displacement end of the displacement means in the first direction, the stopping means is projected to the flat side where the displacement means is displaced. Can be configured. As a result, the storage amount of the electrical wiring of the stopping means can be increased, so that the amount of displacement of the displacing means can be increased by compensating the distance from the stopping means by the second predetermined portion.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the electric wiring displacement means is integrally formed with the displacement means, and includes corresponding change means for changing the arrangement of the electric wiring displacement means corresponding to the arrangement of the displacement means. A game machine H6 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, it is possible to appropriately manage the relative arrangement of the electrical wiring and the displacing means by the response changing means.

<Flow path of the ball that has passed through the electric tube>
A game area and a flow-down means for flowing the game ball discharged from the game area, the flow-down means comprising a section configured to allow visual recognition of the game ball discharged from the game area A game machine I0.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a base plate constituting a gaming area is a veneer (see, for example, JP-A-2017-80178). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the gaming ball discharged from the gaming area flows to the back side of the base plate, the gaming board is hidden by the base plate, and the player can not visually recognize the gaming ball. Therefore, it is easy for the player to lose sight of the game balls, and if he does not pay attention to the discharge timing, the player may receive an impression as if the game balls were suddenly lost from the game area.

  In addition, even if attention is paid to the discharge timing, in recent pachinko machines, there are many cases where the winning opening and the out opening are disposed close to each other. There is a possibility that it may be mistaken for the one that entered the ball. In this case, there is a possibility that you may feel distrust that there is no payout of the winning balls. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in discharging the gaming balls from the gaming area.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I0, since the flow-down means is configured to include a section in which the game balls discharged from the game area can be visually recognized, the player visually checks the game balls flowing down the section Thus, it can be confirmed how the game balls are arranged from the game area. Thereby, the discharge of the game balls from the game area can be improved.

  In addition, discharge of the game ball from the game area means the whole of an aspect in which the game ball is discharged from the game area. For example, it may be discharged through the prize ball mouth, or may be discharged through the out outlet without the prize ball.

  In the gaming machine I0, the gaming ball having flowed down the gaming area is disposed so as to be able to pass, and provided with profit giving means configured to be able to give a predetermined profit to the player based on passage of the gaming ball. The means is disposed on the downstream side of the first component configured to be able to guide the game ball to the side approaching the profit giving means above the profit giving means, and is disposed downstream of the first constituent part, and the profit is A game machine I1 comprising: a second component configured to be able to guide the game ball to the side away from the profit giving means above the giving means.

  According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I0, the player can grasp how the gaming ball has been discharged from the gaming area by visually recognizing the gaming ball flowing down the flow-down means, It is possible to prevent the game ball from approaching the lower profit giving means. As a result, since the game balls already discharged from the game area and the game balls still flowing down the game area can be clearly distinguished in the vicinity of the profit giving means, the player can comfortably play the game. You can plan to do it.

  The predetermined benefits are not limited at all. For example, it may be a payout of a winning ball, a lottery of symbols such as the first symbol or the second symbol, or other benefits.

  The gaming machine I0 or I1 includes an attention means formed inward of the gaming area, and a frame means disposed in a frame shape around the attention means, and the flow-down means is the frame in a front view A gaming machine I2 characterized in that the gaming ball is made to flow down to the inner side of the means.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I0 or I1, it is possible to cause the game balls discharged from the gaming area to enter the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the attention means. Thereby, even in a situation where the player is paying attention to the attention means, it can be grasped that the game ball has been discharged from the game area.

  The means of attention is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a light guide plate (illumination plate) may be used, a liquid crystal display means in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner, a movable part configured to be displaceable by a driving means such as a motor, or a light emitting means such as an LED good.

  In the gaming machine I2, a gaming machine I3 characterized in that the flow-down means comprises deceleration means for decelerating the gaming ball on the inward side of the attention means.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I2, it is possible to prolong the period in which the gaming ball stays in the field of view of the player who is focusing on the attention means.

<Screen design part, devices around light guide plate>
A predetermined substrate provided with light emitting means, and an arrangement means disposed on the front side of at least a part of the predetermined substrate in a predetermined direction view, and the area of the predetermined substrate viewed in the predetermined direction is A game machine J0 characterized by being arranged to be smaller than the area where light emitted from the light emitting means is viewed.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an electric decoration board having light emitting means such as an LED is disposed on the back side of a base board whose playing area is formed on the front, and the board surface of the electric decoration board and the board surface of the base board There are gaming machines arranged substantially parallel (see, for example, JP-A-2006-333887). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the area of the electric decoration substrate to be viewed in front view is large, when irradiating the decorative member disposed on the front side of the electric decoration substrate with the LED light, A decoration board may enter and it may be visually recognized as a decoration member and an electric decoration board have overlapped by back and forth.

  Only the configuration required for the function such as a circuit or a resistor is disposed on the surface of the electric decoration substrate, and usually the design is not high. Therefore, when the decorative member and the electric decoration substrate overlap and are visually recognized in front and back, there is a possibility that the appearance is bad and the interest of the player is reduced. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the rendering effect of the predetermined substrate.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J0, the predetermined substrate is disposed such that the area of the predetermined substrate visually recognized in the predetermined direction is smaller than the area of the light to be irradiated. It is possible to configure a region where only light can be viewed without overlapping with the substrate. Thereby, the rendering effect of the predetermined substrate can be improved.

  The arrangement of the predetermined substrate is not limited at all. For example, by partially concealing, the area to be viewed may be reduced, or the aspect may be such that there is no area to be viewed by shielding the whole.

  In addition, the optical axis of the light irradiated from the light emission means arrange | positioned at a predetermined board | substrate can be set arbitrarily. For example, the optical axis may be oriented in the thickness direction of the predetermined substrate, or the optical axis may be oriented in the direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the predetermined substrate, or the optical axis may be oriented at an angle therebetween It may be

  The light transmittance of the arrangement means is not limited at all. For example, the light transmission may be good, low light transmission, or the degree of light transmission may be changed part by part.

  In the gaming machine J0, the arrangement means includes a plurality of direction changing means arranged on both sides of the predetermined substrate to change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means, and between the plurality of direction changing means And a low transmission means having a light transmittance lower than that of the direction changing means, and at least a part of the predetermined substrate is disposed inside the low transmission means in a predetermined direction. A gaming machine J1.

  According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J0, the predetermined substrate can be hidden by the low transmission means. Thereby, the range in which the predetermined substrate is visually recognized can be narrowed.

  In addition, as a direction change means, it is not limited at all, Various aspects are illustrated. For example, a light guide plate or an illumination plate may be used, a movable part configured to be displaceable by a drive device may be used, a game area or a flow path where a game ball flows down, a case member or a decoration member fixedly arranged But it is good.

  In the gaming machine J1, the low transmission means is at least a part of a shape portion forming a predetermined pattern or a shape of a figure.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J1, the low permeability means can be made to fall into the shape of a predetermined pattern or figure, thereby making it possible to avoid giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  The shape of the predetermined pattern or figure is not limited at all. For example, it may be a frame-shaped bone portion such as a window frame, or a bone portion connecting the axis of a rotating body such as a tire and the rotation outer peripheral portion, or a string of arbitrary characters and patterns. It may be part of a design to be expressed (for example, a title logo).

  In any one of game machines J0 to J2, a game machine J3 characterized in that the predetermined substrate is disposed with the end face of the plate facing in the predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine J3, the area of the predetermined substrate in the predetermined direction can be minimized.

  The gaming machine J3 includes display means for executing display effects visible in a predetermined direction and a game area disposed in front of the display means, wherein the predetermined substrate is a display area of the display means, and A gaming machine J4 characterized in that the gaming machine J4 is disposed at the boundary in a predetermined direction with the gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine J4, different from the case where light is emitted from the back of the game area to the front side and light effect is generally performed by arranging the predetermined board at the boundary, only from the predetermined board to the display area side It is possible to execute the effect of emitting light to the effect and the effect of emitting light to the game area side only.

  In the game machine J4, the predetermined substrate is fixedly arranged on a game board which constitutes the game area on the front side.

  According to the gaming machine J5, since the predetermined substrate is fixedly arranged on the game board, the arrangement of the light emitting means, for example, as compared to the case where the movable specials etc. are fixedly arranged on the inner side of the back case. The degree of freedom can be improved.

  In addition, since the electric wiring for supplying electricity to the light emitting means can be guided to the outside of the back case along the back of the game board, the case of the back case can be viewed through the window of the game board. Also, since it is impossible to look at the back of the game board without looking at the extra wide view, it can help to prevent the player from seeing the electrical wiring.

  Furthermore, when the liquid crystal display device is disposed at the central portion of the rear case, the arrangement space of the predetermined substrate is limited to the outside of the liquid crystal display device, but by the method of arranging the predetermined substrate on the back of the game board If so, the predetermined substrate can be disposed at an arbitrary position without being limited by the size of the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the predetermined substrate can be improved.

<Lock member to prevent position shift of goods at shipment>
A displacement means and a restriction means configured to be capable of restricting the displacement of the displacement means, the restriction means includes a first state capable of acting on the displacement means, and a second state incapable of acting on the displacement means. The game machine K1, which is configured to be changeable in state and configured to suppress movement of the displacement means in a predetermined direction in the first state.

  Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a movable part (displacement means) which is downwardly displaced to the front of a liquid crystal display area from a standby position (see, for example, JP-A-2015-231434). However, the above-described conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of the arrangement and fixing and releasing of the displacement means.

  That is, while the gaming machine is configured to be able to operate normally after being installed, the movable prize is fixed to a situation where a large vibration or external force may be applied to the gaming machine at the time of shipping etc. Not configured to work.

  Therefore, as a measure for fixing the movable part at the time of shipment, the buffer is packed in the range where the movable part is displaced, etc. to suppress the displacement of the movable part, and the buffer is removed after arriving at the game hall. However, in the case of a configuration in which the central opening of the game board is closed, the buffer material can not be easily extracted, and the burden on the game hall may be large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, since the restriction on the displacement of the displacing means can be released by changing the state of the restricting means, the arrangement, fixing and releasing of the displacing means can be made favorable.

  On the other hand, unlike the case where the buffer material is extracted, since the restriction means is not extracted, it is difficult to continue the game if the state change is easily caused by the external force which may occur during the game. On the other hand, when the limiting means is configured to suppress an unintended state change in the first state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of trouble during the game.

  In the gaming machine K1, the gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the restriction means is configured to be changeable in the first state and the second state when no power is supplied.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, a change in the state of the limiting means can be generated when the gaming machine is not energized, so that the occurrence of malfunction of the limiting means can be suppressed. This makes it possible to prevent the worker from having difficulty in the power failure state and the recovery work from the power failure state.

  The gaming machine K1 or K2 further comprises urging means for urging the operation part of the restriction means in a predetermined direction, wherein the restriction means displaces the operation part from the reference position by a predetermined amount in the opposite direction of the predetermined direction. The operation unit is configured to be displaced from the reference position in the predetermined direction by the urging force of the urging means, and in the second state, the operation unit is movable from the reference position to the predetermined direction. A gaming machine K3 characterized in that the gaming machine is disposed at a spaced apart position.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the operation unit is disposed at the separated position away from the reference position in the second state. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a predetermined amount of displacement required for the state change of the limiting means by an external force that can be generated, and it is easy to prevent the state changing from the second state of the limiting means.

  In any one of the game machines K1 to K3, a game machine K4 characterized in that the operation part of the restriction means is disposed outside the area configuration means constituting an area where the displacement means can be displaced.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the operation unit is disposed outside the area configuration means, so even if the displacement means is displaced with the operation of the operation means, It is possible to prevent the displacement means from contacting the worker.

  One of the gaming machines K1 to K4 includes biasing means for biasing the operation part of the restriction means in a predetermined direction, and the restriction means is configured to move the operation part from a reference position to a predetermined amount opposite to the predetermined direction. The restriction means is configured to be changed in state along with the displacement, and the restriction means includes a guiding means for guiding the displacement of the operation unit in the predetermined direction, and the guiding means is the operation in the direction crossing the predetermined direction. A game machine K5 characterized in that it is configured to secure an allowable displacement width (posture change width) of the unit.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the displacement of the operation means is also possible in the direction intersecting the predetermined direction, so the direction to the operation unit When an unknown load is applied, displacement in a predetermined direction can be easily prevented, and displacement of the operation unit by a predetermined amount can be easily prevented. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the state change of the limiting means due to an unintended external force generated by opening and closing of the door or the like.

  In the gaming machine K5, the operation unit includes an engagement unit configured to be engageable with the guide unit, the biasing unit is disposed at the center of the operation unit, and the engagement unit is the operation. A game machine K6 characterized in that it is arranged at a position distant from the center of the unit.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K5, the operating unit is displaced with the engaging portion as a fulcrum even if an external force of unknown direction is given to the limiting means in the first state of the limiting means. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a predetermined amount of displacement required for the state change, while performing (posture change). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the limiting means from changing from the first state to the second state due to an external force such as opening / closing of the door, vibration at the time of shipping, or the like.

  In the gaming machine K6, the restriction means is disposed on the back side of the area forming means configured to be pivotable by the support shafts on the left and right positions, and the engagement portion is disposed on the opposite side of the support shafts. Game machine K7 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K6, the state of the limiting means can be easily changed by pushing the engaging portion of the limiting means, so the store clerk at the game hall opens the front door. Thus, the operation in the case of operating the control means can be facilitated. That is, when the front door is opened, the engaging portion is disposed on the side where the opening width becomes large (the side opposite to the support shaft), so that the operation position of the limiting means can be made closer to the front side.

  In the game machine K7, the restriction means is disposed on the support shaft side of the area forming means.

  According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K7, the limiting means is disposed on the support shaft side, so that an operator who opens the front door to prevent the operator from accidentally touching the limiting means can do.

  In addition, since the load given to the limiting means at the time of opening and closing of the front door can be reduced compared to the case of being disposed on the opposite side of the support shaft, the limiting means is in a state by the impact accompanying opening and closing of the front door. It can be prevented from changing.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K8, in the first state, the displacement means is configured to guide displacement of the restriction means.

  According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K8, the guidance accuracy of the displacement when the limiting device acts on the displacing device in a state where the guidance accuracy of the displacement of the limiting device alone is lowered It can be improved.

  One of the gaming machines K1 to K9 is characterized in that it comprises an anti-notification means for giving notification so as to prevent the continuation of the energized state, when energized in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the prevention notification means can notify that the state of the limiting means is switched from the first state.

  In addition, the aspect of alerting | reporting is not limited at all. For example, notification may be made by displaying an error display on the liquid crystal display device, or notification may be made by outputting a notification sound from a speaker, or a predetermined lighting means is made to glow (or kept in an off state) It may be notified by

<Regarding the concept of the invention taking substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a container for containing an object, the gaming machine comprises an operation means disposed on the object and formed to be operable, and an opening is formed in the container at a position corresponding to the operation means. Game machine L0 characterized by

  There is known a gaming machine provided with a substrate box (housing) for housing a control substrate (target object) (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). The substrate box is sealed to prevent the control substrate from being tampered with.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the control board is provided with the operation means, it is necessary to open the substrate box in order to operate the operation means. Therefore, there is a problem that it takes time and effort.

  According to the gaming machine L0, the operation means is provided on the object and is formed to be operable, and the container is provided with an opening at a position corresponding to the operation means. It can be operated. That is, it is unnecessary to open the container when operating the operation means. Therefore, the effort can be suppressed.

<Regarding the concept of the invention taking substrate boxes A100 and A2100 (covering portions A270 and A2270) as an example
In the gaming machine L0, the operation means includes a first surface facing the opening of the housing, and the housing includes an opposing portion facing the first surface of the operation means. M1.

  According to the gaming machine M1, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L0, the operating means comprises a first surface facing the opening of the housing, and the housing comprises an opposing portion facing the first surface of the operating means Therefore, since the area of the opening can be made smaller by the facing portion, insertion of foreign matter such as a wire from the opening into the inside of the container can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine M1, the operation means is operated by inserting and displacing the operation element, and the opposing portion is at least in a range excluding the displacement trajectory of the operation element on the first surface of the operation means. A game machine M2 characterized in that it is disposed to face a part.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M1, the opposing part is disposed to face at least a part of the range excluding the displacement trajectory of the operating element on the first surface of the operating element. The foreign matter such as the wire from the opening to the inside of the container from the opening can be reduced because the area of the opening can be made smaller by the opposing part while inhibiting the insertion of the operating element into the operation means and the displacement of the inserted operation element being inhibited. It can be suppressed to be inserted.

  In the gaming machine M1 or M2, the facing portion is formed in a plate shape in which a base end is fixed and one end is free.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the opposing part is formed in a plate shape with the base end fixed and one end free, thus simplifying the shape and forming Can be secured. As a result, the yield can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the game machine M3, a protrusion is provided in the opposite portion so as to protrude.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M3, the projections are provided in the facing portion so that the rigidity of the facing portion can be enhanced and the damage thereof can be suppressed.

  In addition, the protrusion may be formed as a ridge extending in a streak shape.

  In the game machine M4, the protrusion is provided so as to protrude from the surface of the opposite portion facing the first surface of the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M4, the projection is provided so as to project from the side of the opposing portion facing the first surface of the operating means, so the opposing portion and the first operating means A clearance between the surface and the surface can be reduced, and insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the interior of the container from the clearance can be suppressed.

  In the game machine M5, the protrusion is in contact with a first surface of the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M5, the projection is in contact with the first surface of the operating means, so in such a contact location, the opposing portion and the first surface of the operating means By eliminating the gap between the two, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the interior of the container.

  In addition, when the protrusion is brought into contact with the first surface of the operation means, even when the opposite portion is pushed by the operation element in the insertion direction when inserting the operation into the operation means, the opposite portion in the insertion direction Can be suppressed from being deformed. Therefore, damage to the base end side of the facing portion can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the opposing part is formed in a plate shape in which the base end is fixed and one end is free, formation and maintenance of the state in which the projection is in contact using elastic deformation of the opposing part That is, the degree of adhesion can be increased to suppress insertion of foreign matter such as a wire).

  In any one of the game machines M3 to M5, the protrusion is formed as a ridge extending in the form of a stripe.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines M3 to M5, the projections are formed as ridges extending in a stripe shape, so that the rigidity of the facing portion can be further enhanced. At the same time, insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the interior of the container can be easily suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the operation means is operated by inserting and displacing the operation element, and the opposite portion is in contact with the edge of the operation element inserted into the operation means. A game machine M8 characterized in that it can be formed.

  Here, when the operating element inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, the operator operates the operating element in the lateral direction carelessly, or opens and closes the member provided with the container carelessly). When the operation element collided with another member is pressed in the lateral direction), the operation means is also tilted, and the load on the root of the operation means (the connecting portion with the object) becomes large. In addition, when the displacement (for example, rotation) of the operating element inserted into the operation means becomes excessive, the operation means is also displaced in the direction of the displacement, and the load on the root of the operation means (the connection portion with the object) is large. Become. In these cases, there is a possibility that the operating means may drop out of the object (for example, the connecting portion connecting the operating means and the object may be broken).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the opposing portion is formed such that the edge can come in contact with the operating element inserted into the operating means. The operator (that is, a position farther from the fulcrum when the operation means tilts) is brought into contact with the edge portion of the opposing portion, so that the operator can be prevented from being inclined or being excessively displaced. As a result, tilting or excessive displacement of the operating means can be suppressed, and the operating means can be suppressed from dropping off the object.

  In any one of the game machines M1 to M8, a game machine M9 characterized in that the housing body has a covering portion that covers one end side of the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines M1 to M8, since the housing body is provided with a covering portion covering one end side of the operation means, the gap between the operation means and the covering portion It can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts. Therefore, it can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted into the inside of a container.

  Here, when the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing the operating element, if the operating element inserted into the operating means is tilted (e.g., the operator does not prepare the operating element) Operation is performed in the horizontal direction, or the member on which the container is disposed is carelessly opened and closed, and when the operation element collided with another member is pushed in the lateral direction), the operation means is also tilted, The load on the root of the means (connected part with the object) is increased. In this case, there is a possibility that the operating means may drop out of the object (for example, the connecting portion connecting the operating means and the object may be broken).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M9, since the covering portion is covered on one end side of the operating means, the operating means can be made to abut on the inner surface of the covering portion to suppress tilting of the operating means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

  In the gaming machine M9, an outer shape on a base end side opposite to the one end side of the operation means is larger than an inner shape of the covering portion.

  According to the gaming machine M10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M9, the outer shape at the base end opposite to the one end of the operating means is larger than the inner shape of the covering portion. It is possible to bend the gap between the and the covering portion. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts. Therefore, it can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted into the inside of a container.

  In the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the covering portion or the operation means includes a bulging portion formed by bulging, and the other of the covering portion or the operating means receives a receiving portion for receiving the bulging portion. A game machine M11 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine M11, in addition to the effects of either the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the covering portion or the operating means is provided with a bulging portion formed by bulging, and the other of the covering portion or the operating means is Since the receiving portion for receiving the bulging portion is provided, the gap between the bulging portion and the receiving portion can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts. Therefore, it can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted into the inside of a container.

  A gaming machine M12 characterized in that, in the gaming machine M11, the bulging portion and the receiving portion are partially formed in a circumferential direction.

  According to the gaming machine M12, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M11, the bulging portion and the receiving portion are partially formed in the circumferential direction, so that the bulging portion and the receiving portion are brought into contact with each other. Excessive displacement (in particular, displacement (rotation) in the circumferential direction) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

  In any one of the game machines M1 to M12, the container is provided with an erected wall which is erected from the inner surface and whose erected tip abuts on the object.

  According to the gaming machine M13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines M1 to M12, the housing body is provided with a standing wall standing from its inner surface and the standing tip abuts against the object. It can function as a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts. Therefore, it can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted into the inside of a container.

  In the gaming machine M13, the standing wall is formed in a form surrounding the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine M14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M13, since the standing wall is formed in a form surrounding the operation means, it is possible to block the path for entering the inside of the container. That is, even if foreign matter such as a wire is inserted from the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted into the inside of a container.

  In the gaming machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control substrate on which an electronic component is mounted, and a surface connecting the electronic component to the circuit of the control substrate by soldering is the side on which the operation means is disposed. Is set on the opposite side of the game machine M15.

  According to the gaming machine M15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which the electronic component is mounted, and the surface connecting the electronic component to the circuit of the control board is the operating means Since it is set on the side opposite to the side where the wall is arranged, it makes it easy to bring the standing end of the standing wall into close contact with the object (control board), and the object (control board) and the standing wall Formation of a gap between them can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reliably function the standing wall as a wall against which the tip of the foreign matter such as the wire inserted from the opening abuts, and to suppress the foreign matter such as the wire from being inserted into the inside of the container.

  In any one of the gaming machines M13 to M15, the standing wall is formed in a plate shape, and the thickness dimension of the standing tip is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine M16, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines M13 to M15, the standing wall is formed in a plate shape, and the thickness dimension of the standing end is reduced. The surface pressure at the front end of the upright can be increased to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire from between the object and the front end of the upright. As a result, insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the interior of the container can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine M16, the thickness dimension of the standing end of the standing wall of the standing wall is reduced by forming a tapered surface on the surface on the operation means side.

  According to the gaming machine M17, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M16, the thickness of the standing end of the standing wall is reduced by forming a tapered surface on the surface on the operation means side Therefore, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the inside of the container while improving the formability. That is, by using a tapered surface, it is possible to make the shape change gentle and secure the flowability of the resin in the mold. On the other hand, when the standing end of the standing wall abuts on the object, the groove can be formed by the tapered surface and the object. Therefore, the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted from the opening can be moved (guided) along the above-mentioned groove. That is, it can be difficult to pass between the standing wall and the object. As a result, insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the interior of the container can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the container has an outer surface formed on one side from a first area and a second area located closer to the object than the first area, The gaming machine M18 characterized in that the covering portion is provided to project from two areas.

  According to the gaming machine M18, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the container is one from the first area and the second area located closer to the object than the first area. Since the outer surface on the side is formed and the covering portion protrudes from the second region, the protruding height of the covering portion can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the area covered by the covering portion on the operation means (an area for suppressing insertion of foreign matter such as a wire and an area for attenuating the operation means and suppressing tilting or displacement of the operation means). As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire into the interior of the container and to suppress the operating means from falling off the object.

  In any one of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the covering portion is provided so as to protrude from the outer surface of the housing, and the opening is formed on the protruding leading end side of the covering portion.

  According to the gaming machine M19, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines M9 to M12, the covering portion is protruded from the outer surface of the container and an opening is formed on the protruding tip side of the covering portion. It can be made difficult for the tip of the foreign matter to reach the opening.

  For example, when the opening is not visible due to a shield or the like, and it is difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire into the opening, the tip of the foreign substance such as a wire is slid on the outer surface of the container to reach the opening The way is done. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M19, when the front end of a foreign object such as a wire is slid on the outer surface of the container, the front end of the foreign object such as a wire is caused to abut the outer surface of the covering portion. Can stop the progress of That is, the outer surface of the covering portion can function as a wall that restricts the sliding of foreign matter such as a wire. As a result, insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the interior of the container can be suppressed.

<Regarding the concept of the invention with substrate box A100 (standing walls A280 and A290) as an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the operation means is operated by inserting and displacing an operating element, and the container is formed so as to be able to abut on the outer surface of the operating means or the operating element. A game machine N1 to be

  Here, when the operating element inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, the operator operates the operating element in the lateral direction carelessly, or opens and closes the member provided with the container carelessly). When the operator collided with another member is pressed in the lateral direction), the operation means is also displaced (tilted with respect to the object). In this case, there is a risk that the displaced (tilted) operating means may be broken (for example, the connecting portion connecting the operating means and the object may be broken or broken).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L0, the housing is formed so as to be able to abut on the outer surface of the operating means or the operating element. It can be received to suppress the displacement of the operating means. As a result, damage to the operation means can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine N1, a gaming machine N2 characterized in that the housing body is provided with an erected wall which is erected from the inner surface and whose erected tip abuts on the object.

  Here, if the container is configured to receive the displaced (tilted) operation means, the container may be deformed and damaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, the housing body is provided with a standing wall standing from its inner surface and the standing tip abuts against the object. Serves as a support and can control the deformation of the container. As a result, damage to the container can be suppressed.

  At the same time, the deformation of the container is suppressed by the support of the standing wall, whereby the tilting of the operation means can be more reliably suppressed. As a result, breakage of the operation means can be easily suppressed.

  In the gaming machine N2, the standing wall is formed in a form surrounding the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N2, the standing wall is formed so as to surround the operation means. As a support, the deformation of the container can be suppressed. Thus, damage to the container can be suppressed.

  In addition, it is possible to block the route for entering the inside of the container by the erected wall. That is, even if foreign matter such as a wire is inserted from the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted into the inside of a container.

  In the gaming machine N3, the standing wall is connected to another inner surface different from the inner surface of the container on which the standing wall is provided.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N3, the standing wall is connected to another inner surface different from the inner surface of the container on which the standing wall is provided, so that the rigidity of the container Can be used to increase the rigidity of the erected wall, and the connection between the inner surfaces can increase the rigidity of the entire container. Therefore, the function as a support part (deformation suppression means) of the standing wall which suppresses a deformation | transformation of the storage body at the time of an operation means being inclined can be heightened. As a result, damage to the container can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the gaming body includes a covering portion which covers one end side of the operating means.

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines N1 to N4, since the housing body is provided with the covering portion covering one end side of the operating means, the operating means is brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion Thus, the tilting of the operating means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

  Further, according to the gaming machine N5, since the covering portion is covered on one end side of the operating means, the gap between the operating means and the covering portion can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts. Therefore, it can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted into the inside of a container.

  In the gaming machine N5, the covering portion is provided so as to protrude from the outer surface of the container, and the container includes a protrusion which is provided in a stripe shape protruding from the outer surface, one end of the protrusion being the one A gaming machine N6 characterized in that it is connected to the covering portion.

  According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N5, the covering portion is provided protruding from the outer surface of the containing body, and the containing body is provided with a protrusion which is provided extending in a stripe shape protruding from the outer surface. Since one end of the ridge is connected to the covering portion, the ridge can function as a rib and the covering portion can be supported by the ridge. Therefore, the operating means can be made to abut on the inner surface of the covering portion, so that tilting of the operating means can be suppressed, and breakage of the covering portion at that time can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operating means from falling off the object.

  Moreover, the covering height of the covering portion can be increased by the covering portion protruding from the outer surface of the container. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the area covered by the covering portion on the operation means (an area for suppressing insertion of foreign matter such as a wire and an area for attenuating the operation means and suppressing tilting or displacement of the operation means). As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire into the interior of the container and to suppress the operating means from falling off the object.

  In the gaming machine N6, the housing body is provided with a display unit formed on the outer surface thereof for displaying predetermined information, and the display unit is adjacent to the other end side of the protrusion.

  According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N6, the storage body is provided with a display unit formed on the outer surface to display predetermined information, and the display unit is adjacent to the other end of the ridge Therefore, the projection can be also used as a pointing line to indicate the position corresponding to the predetermined information displayed by the display unit. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine N6 or N7, the operation means has a first surface facing the opening of the container, and the operation means is operated by inserting and displacing the operation element to the first surface, and the accommodation is performed The body is provided with a facing portion facing the first surface of the operating means, and the facing portion is formed so that an edge portion can come into contact with the operating element inserted into the operating means. Machine N8.

  According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N6 or N7, the operating means has a first surface facing the opening of the housing, and the housing is an opposing portion facing the first surface of the operating means Since the area of the opening can be made smaller by the facing portion, insertion of foreign matter such as a wire from the opening into the inside of the container can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the opposing part is formed so that the edge can come into contact with the operating element inserted into the operating means, the operating element (that is, a position farther from the fulcrum when the operating means is tilted) It can be made to abut on the part to suppress tilting and excessive displacement of the operating element. As a result, tilting or excessive displacement of the operating means can be suppressed, and the operating means can be suppressed from dropping off the object.

  In the gaming machine N8, the opposing portion is disposed facing at least a part of the range excluding the displacement trajectory of the operating element on the first surface of the operating means.

  According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine N8, the opposing portion is disposed at least a part of the range excluding the displacement trajectory of the operating element on the first surface of the operating element. The foreign matter such as the wire is inserted from the opening into the inside of the container by an amount that the area of the opening can be made smaller by the opposing part while suppressing inhibition of insertion into the operation means and displacement of the inserted operator. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the area of the facing portion in contact with the displaced operating element can be increased to easily suppress excessive displacement of the operating element (particularly, displacement (rotation) in the circumferential direction). As a result, it is possible to suppress the excessive displacement of the operating means and to suppress the operating means from falling off the object.

  In the gaming machine N9, the operation means is formed so that the operation element can be displaced to a first position, and the position where one end of the ridge is connected to the covering portion is displaced to the first position A game machine N10 characterized in that the child and the opposing part are in contact with each other.

  In the gaming machine N9 or N10, the operation means is formed displaceably to the second position different from the first position, and the position where one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering portion is the first position. A game machine N11 characterized in that the operating element displaced to two positions and the opposing part are in contact with each other.

  According to the gaming machine N10 or N11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N9 or N10, the operation means is formed so that the operation element can be displaced to the first position and the second position, and one end of the ridge is connected to the covering portion The position at which the operating element displaced to the first position or the second position abuts against the opposing portion, so that the operating element displaced to the first position or the second position contacts the opposing portion. Damage to the facing portion or the covering portion when in contact can be effectively suppressed using the ridges.

<Regarding the concept of the invention in which the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 (the operation wall A210) are an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the container has an outer surface on one side formed of a first area and a second area located closer to the target than the first area, and the opening is opened in the second area. A gaming machine O1 characterized in that

  Here, since the operation means can be operated through the opening, it is unnecessary to unseal the container when operating the operation means. Therefore, the effort can be suppressed. However, there is a possibility that fraud may occur in which foreign matter such as a wire is inserted from the opening.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O1, an outer surface of one side is formed from the first area and the second area located closer to the object than the first area, and the second area is the second area. Since the opening is formed, the opening can be disposed at a position recessed from the outer surface of the container, and a step (connection surface) connecting the first area and the second area can be arranged around the opening. This makes it possible to increase the distance to the opening and to make it difficult to visually recognize the position of the opening. As a result, it can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted into an inside of a container from an opening. That is, it is possible to suppress that the fraud is performed.

  In the gaming machine O1, at least a part of a connection surface connecting the first area and the second area is inclined downward from the first area to the second area. O2.

  Here, the container (substrate box) needs to secure a distance (internal space) between the object (control substrate) and the inner surface in consideration of heat radiation from the object (control substrate). On the other hand, if the opening is too far from the operation means, the operability deteriorates. Therefore, by forming the opening in the second region, the operability of the operation means can be easily ensured, and as described above, the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire from the opening into the inside of the container can be suppressed. . However, when operating the operation means, the hand of the operator (operator) interferes with the step (connection surface) between the first area and the second area, which interferes with the operation. Therefore, the operability when operating the operation means may be deteriorated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O2, at least a part of the connection surface connecting the first area and the second area is inclined downward from the first area to the second area. In addition to the effect exhibited by O1, the space connected to the second region can be enlarged by the amount of the downward slope to improve the operability when operating the operation means.

  In the gaming machine O2, the second area is formed as a rectangular area in a front view and a substantially rectangular shape whose length dimension along one direction is larger than the length dimension along another direction orthogonal to the one direction, and the operation means is operated The game machine O3 is characterized in that the posture of the operation element at the time of being inserted into the operation means and operated and being inserted into the operation means or pulled out from the operation means is taken along the other direction. .

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine O2, the second area is an area of a substantially rectangular front view having a length dimension along one direction larger than a length dimension along the other direction orthogonal to the one direction. The operating means is operated as the operating element is inserted and displaced, and the attitude of the operating element when inserted into the operating means or pulled out from the operating means is the attitude along the other direction. A space can be secured on the side where the gripping surfaces face each other, with the gripping surfaces facing in the longitudinal direction of the second region. Therefore, when inserting the operating element into the operating means or pulling it out from the operating means, interference of the finger holding the operating element with the housing can be suppressed. As a result, the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine O3, the opening is disposed on one side of a longitudinal center of the second area, and the connection surface positioned on the longitudinal side of the second area is the first area to the second area. A game machine O4 characterized by being inclined downward to the area.

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O3, the opening is disposed on one side of the longitudinal center in the second area, and the connection surface located on the longitudinal side in the second area is the first Since it is inclined downward from the first area to the second area, when the operator is grasped and displaced, interference with a finger different from the grasped finger can be suppressed. For example, when the controller is held by the index finger and the thumb, and the controller is displaced (for example, rotated), the space formed by the downward inclination of the connection surface and the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction in the second region A space for moving the little finger side can be secured, and interference between the little finger side and the housing can be suppressed. As a result, the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

  In the game machine O4, the connection surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction in the second area.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O4, since the connection surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction in the second region, the operation is performed by the connection surface (first region) on the other side in the longitudinal direction Means can be protected. For example, damage to the operation means can be suppressed by suppressing interference with other members at the time of manufacture. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the position of the opening, and it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire from the opening into the inside of the container.

  Further, by forming the connection surface on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second region, the area of the first region can be enlarged by that amount, that is, to cope with heat dissipation from the object (control substrate) The volume of the internal space of the container can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines O3 to O5, the connection surface is formed on one side in the short direction in the second area, and the connection surface is not formed on the other side in the short direction in the second area. A game machine O6 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine O6, in any one of the gaming machines O3 to O5, the connection surface is formed on one side in the short direction in the second area, and the connection surface is not formed on the other side in the short direction in the second area. Therefore, the other side in the short direction in the second region can be opened. Therefore, when holding the operating element with fingers and performing an operation (insertion to the operating means, pulling out from the operating means, or displacing the operating element (for example, rotation)), the grasped fingers (for example, thumb and forefinger) The above-mentioned open space can be used as a space for arranging or displacing fingers different from the above. As a result, the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines O3 to O6, the connection surface positioned on one longitudinal side in the second region is inclined downward from the first region to the second region, and the other connection surfaces are the first A game machine O7 that is substantially orthogonal to the area and the second area.

  According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines O3 to O6, the connecting surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second area is inclined downward from the first area to the second area, Is substantially orthogonal to the first region and the second region, the container for supporting heat dissipation from the object (control substrate) while securing the effect of lowering the connection surface while inclining downward The volume of the interior space of can be secured. That is, it is possible to minimize the reduction of the volume of the internal space of the container due to the downward inclination of the connection surface.

  The gaming machine O4 or O5 includes a base body on which the housing body is disposed, and a rotary shaft rotatably supporting the base body, and a longitudinal direction in the second region corresponds to an axial direction of the rotary shaft. The first region is substantially orthogonal and the short direction is substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotation axis, and one side in the longitudinal direction of the second region is disposed farther from the rotation axis than the other side in the longitudinal direction. A game machine O8.

  According to the gaming machine O8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O4 or O5, the gaming machine O8 includes a base body on which the housing body is disposed, and a rotary shaft pivotally supporting the base body rotatably, The direction is substantially orthogonal to the axial direction of the rotation axis and the short direction is substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotation axis, and one longitudinal direction side in the second region is disposed farther from the rotational axis than the other longitudinal direction Therefore, when the operation means is operated in the space formed by rotating the base body around the rotation axis, the space formed by the downward inclination of the connection surface can be effectively utilized. That is, a space for allowing the operator (operator) to access the operation means can be secured for the space formed by the downward inclination of the connection surface. As a result, the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

<Regarding the concept of the invention taking substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as an example>
A gaming machine provided with a container for containing an object, comprising: a display device disposed in a game area; and an operation means disposed in the object and formed to be operable, the operation means being associated with the operation of the operation means A game machine P1 characterized in that information can be displayed on the display device.

  There is known a gaming machine provided with a substrate box (housing) for housing a control substrate (target object) (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the operation means is disposed on the control substrate (target object), there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp the operation state of the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine P1, the display device disposed in the gaming area and the operation means disposed on the object and formed to be operable are capable of displaying information on the operation of the operation means on the display device Therefore, the operation state of the operation means can be easily grasped based on the display of the display device. Further, by arranging the display means in the game area, the display means can be used as a device for displaying information related to the game, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine P1, a gaming machine P2 characterized in that the container is formed displaceably.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the housing is formed displaceably, so the housing is disposed (displaced) at a position where the operating means can be operated while visually recognizing the display device. be able to. As a result, since it can operate, confirming display (information), while being able to improve operativity, an operation mistake can be suppressed. On the other hand, in the state where the operation means is not operated, it can be arranged at a predetermined position (for example, a position which is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside).

  In the gaming machine P2, the gaming machine is characterized in that the housing can be displaced to a position where the surface on which the operation means of the housing is disposed and the display surface of the display device can be simultaneously viewed. P3.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P2, the housing can be displaced to a position where the surface on which the operation means of the housing is disposed and the display surface of the display device can be simultaneously viewed. Therefore, it is easy to perform the operation of operating the operation means while confirming the display of the display device. As a result, improvement in operability and suppression of operation errors can be achieved more reliably.

  In the gaming machine P3, a gaming machine P4 characterized in that the housing is rotatably supported, and the operation means is disposed farther from the pivotally supported position than the center of the housing.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P3, the housing is rotatably supported, and the operation means is disposed on the side farther from the pivotally supported position than the center of the housing. In a state where the housing is displaced (rotated) to a position where the surface on which the operation means of the housing is arranged and the display surface of the display can be viewed simultaneously, the position farther from the outer edge of the gaming machine main body Can be placed on Therefore, interference of fingers operating the operation means with the outer edge of the gaming machine main body can be suppressed. As a result, operability can be improved.

  In the gaming machine P4, the operation means is composed of a plurality, and the second operation means, which has a high operation frequency compared to the first operation means, is farther from the pivotally supported position than the first operation means. Game machine P5 characterized in that it is disposed in

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine P4, the second operating means having a plurality of operating means and having a higher frequency of operation than the first operating means is more than the first operating means. The operation means (first operation means) having a high operation frequency can be arranged at a position farther from the outer edge of the gaming machine main body because the operation means (first operation means) having a high operation frequency can be arranged. Therefore, when operating the operation means (1st operation means) with high operation frequency, it can suppress that a finger interferes with the outer edge of a game machine body. As a result, operability can be improved.

<Regarding the concept of the invention taking substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a container for containing an object, the gaming machine further comprises operation means disposed on the object and configured to be operable, and one or more electrical connection lines are connected to the object; A game machine Q1 characterized in that whether or not the operation means is operated is changed according to the connection state of the electrical connection line with the object.

  There is known a gaming machine provided with a substrate box (housing) for housing a control substrate (target object) (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the operation means is provided on the control substrate (target object), there is room for improvement in the operation of the operation means. That is, if the operation is permitted regardless of the connection state of one or more electrical connection lines to the object, there is a possibility that the operation means may easily be manipulated improperly, while the connection of one or more electrical connection lines If the operation is prohibited regardless of the state, there is a possibility that the operability of the work accompanying the operation of the operation means may be deteriorated.

  According to the gaming machine Q1, the object is provided with the operation means disposed on the object and configured to be operable, the object is connected with one or more electric connection lines, and the electric connection line is connected with the object Since the operability of the operation means is changed according to the state, it is possible to suppress fraud and to improve the operability.

  In the gaming machine Q1, the housing is formed displaceably.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1, the housing is formed displaceably, so that the housing can be arranged (displaced) at a position where the operating means can be easily operated. As a result, operability can be improved. On the other hand, in the state where the operation means is not operated, it can be arranged at a predetermined position (for example, a position which is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside). In this case, when displacing the container, at least one of the electrical connection lines is released (removed) from the object, so the operability of the operation means is changed according to the connection state of the electrical connection lines. This configuration is particularly effective in suppressing fraud and improving the workability.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, in the state where at least a predetermined electric connection line of the electric connection lines is connected to the object, the operation of the operation means is permitted. Q3.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, operation of the operating means is permitted when at least a predetermined one of the electrical connection lines is connected, It is possible to suppress fraud and improve the workability. That is, since the operation of the operation means is prohibited if the predetermined electrical connection line is not connected to the object, it is possible to suppress fraud. On the other hand, when the connection of the predetermined electrical connection line to the object is secured and the fraud can be suppressed, even if the other electrical connection lines are released (removed) from the object, By permitting the operation, it is possible to improve the workability (secure the versatility).

  In particular, in a configuration in which the container is formed displaceably, the other electrical connection line released (removed) from the object for displacing (that is, arranging for easy operation) the container is contained in the container To allow the operation of the operating means after displacement, for example, by inserting an extension between the object and another electrical connection, and releasing (removing) the other electrical connection It is possible to avoid the trouble of reconnecting the object to the object.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, in a state in which at least one of the electrical connection lines is released from the object, the operation of the operation means is prohibited. Q4.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, at least one of the electrical connection lines is released from the object (that is, all the electrical connections are made. Since the operation of the operation means is prohibited if the line is not connected to the object, it is possible to prevent the operation means from being operated illegally.

In the configuration in which the container is formed displaceably, the other electrical connection line released (removed) from the object for displacing (that is, arranging for easy operation) the container is the container Operation, for example, by interposing an extension wire between the object and another electrical connection line and displacing another electrical connection line which has been released (removed) to the object. Since the operation of the means can be permitted, the work by the operation of the operation means is possible. <About the concept of the invention taking the substrate boxes A3100 and A4100 as an example>
A gaming machine having a container for containing an object, comprising: operation means disposed on the object and formed to be operable, wherein the container is formed displaceably and disposed at the time of playing A game machine R1 characterized in that it is displaceable to a position where the operation means can be operated more easily than the position.

  There is known a gaming machine provided with a substrate box (housing) for housing a control substrate (target object) (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the operation means is disposed on the control substrate (object), there is a problem that the operability of the operation means is insufficient.

  According to the gaming machine R1, the object is provided with the operation means disposed on the object and formed so as to be operable, the storage body is formed displaceably, and the operation means is easier to operate than the position disposed during the game Since it can be displaced to the position, the operability of the operation means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine R1, a gaming machine R2 characterized in that the housing is rotatably supported and is rotated by rotation about a portion supported by the rotation.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R1, the housing is rotatably supported and is displaced by the rotation with the pivotally supported portion as the rotation center, thereby displacing the housing The structure can be simplified. As a result, the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine R1 or R2, at the position where the container is disposed at the time of playing the game, another member is faced to the operation means, and the gaming machine R3.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R1 or R2, at the position where the container is disposed at the time of gaming, another member is faced to the operation means, so the operation means is operated illegally Can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine R3, the operation means is operated by inserting and displacing an operating element, and in a state where the operating element is inserted, the operating element is brought into contact with the separate member, A gaming machine R4 characterized in that the housing body can not be displaced to the position where it is disposed at the time of the game.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R3, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing the operating element, and in the state where the operating element is inserted, the operating element corresponds to another member By being in contact, the container can not be displaced to the position where it is disposed at the time of playing a game, so that it is possible to suppress forgetting to remove the operation element. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the operator is used illegally.

  Game machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 to A gaming machine according to any one of M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4 and R1 to R4, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  Game machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 to In any one of M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4 and R1 to R4, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine X2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  Game machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 to In any one of M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4 and R1 to R4, the gaming machine is characterized in that a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine are merged. Machine X3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board (part of area constitution means)
18 hinge (part of support shaft)
19 hinge (part of support shaft)
65a Specific winning combination (part of profit giving means)
81 3rd symbol display device (part of attention means, display means)
86 Center frame (frame means)
150 ball flow down unit (part of flow down means)
152 1st receiving flow path (1st composition part, 2nd composition part)
153 Second Receiving Channel Member (Second Component)
154 Projections (part of the deceleration means)
161 Light guide plate (part of the means of attention)
166 Horizontally mounted substrate unit (predetermined substrate)
170 Decoration means (placed means)
171a horizontal groove (low permeability means)
171b Reflective shape (direction change means)
180 Displacement restriction device (limit means)
181 Contact member (part of guiding means)
181b Tubular holder (part of the guiding means)
183 Operation member (operation unit)
183f engaging part 184 coil spring (biasing means)
221 MPU (preventive notification means)
310 Partition member (part of auxiliary means, guiding means, box-like means)
312 Curved plate (first guide)
314 Lower back section (second guide)
315 Uneven through part (open part)
320 Granular member (part of displacement means, part of arrangement means)
362 Shaft part (Regulation part)
410 Direct acting member (part of displacement means, second member)
413 Trapezoid part (second contact part)
414 Projections (2nd target part)
420 Collision member (part of action means, contact means, first means)
424 Buffer member (second contact portion)
430 Contact member (part of displacement means, first member, restriction means)
432 Protruding part (1st target part)
440 Front transmission member (part of transmission means)
442 Groove formation part (second transmission part, discrimination involved means)
446 Transmission projection (1st transmission part, contact part)
470 Transmission arm member (transmission means)
480 Lid member (part of action means, contact means, advancing / retracting means)
482 overhang (representative tip)
489a first contact surface (contact surface)
489b Second contact surface (contact surface)
489c Third contact surface (contact surface)
510 Back case (part of area configuration means)
630 Lower arm member (part of action means)
633 Support hole (main support means)
634 Arc-shaped hole (auxiliary support means, guide means)
700 production members (displacement means)
730 Rotating plate (load generating means, displacement generating means)
740 Telescopic displacement member (part of first member, part of second member)
743b first guided protrusion (first loaded portion)
744b Second guided projection (second loaded portion)
760 Shielding design member (part of the first member, part of the second member)
820 Vertical slide member (part of displacement means)
840 Horizontal slide member (part of displacement means)
870 Long arm member (electrical wiring displacement means)
882a wall (part of the means for stopping)
886 Guide recess (Corresponding change means)
887 Cylindrical projection (part of retaining means)
DK2 electrical wiring DK2b lower winding part (second predetermined part)
LM1 Intermediate channel (part of the flow-down means, first component)
MT1 drive motor (drive means)
IE1 internal space (range)
SC4 detection sensor (detection means)
SP1 Coil spring (part of load generating means, biasing means)
A10, A3010, A4010 Pachinko machines (game machines)
11 Outer frame 12 Inner frame (base body)
18 hinge (rotation axis)
A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 Substrate box (container)
A110 Main controller (target object)
A119 Printed circuit board (object, control board)
A120 Switch device (operation means)
A122 Operation unit (operator)
A123b Projection (first surface)
A130 Key device (operation means)
A133b protrusion (receiving part)
A133c end (first surface)
A140 key (operator)
A200, A3200 box cover (container)
A203 Lower wall (standing wall)
A210 Operation wall (opposite)
A211 1st projected ridge (projected ridge)
A212 second protrusion (protrusions)
A220 first connection wall (connection surface)
A230 Second connection wall (connection surface, other connection surface)
A240 Third connection wall (connection surface, other connection surface)
A250 opening A260 opening A270, A2270 covering portion A271 peripheral wall portion (coating portion)
A271a base (cover part)
A271b Protrusions (bulges)
A272, A2272 End face wall part (covering part, opposing part)
A272a Ring part (facing part)
A272b Square part (opposite part)
A2273 Projections (protrusions)
A280, A290 Vertical wall A280a, A290a Tapered surface A281, A291 First vertical wall (vertical wall)
A282, A292 second standing wall (standing wall)
A283, A293 3rd standing wall (standing wall)
A284 4th standing wall (standing wall)
A300 Box base (container)
A410, A4410 Rotation axis

Claims (3)

A game machine comprising: driving means; displacement means configured to be displaceable; and transmission means configured to be capable of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement means,
The first means is configured to be changeable in an abutting state in contact with the displacement means and in a non-contacting state with the displacement means, and the load applied from the outside is transmitted to the first means. An object to be selected is configured to be switchable.   2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a load received by said displacement means from said first means and a driving force received by said displacement means via said transmission means face the same side.   The arrangement means is disposed so as to be capable of colliding with the first means, and the collision of the arrangement means is configured to occur in a non-contact state of the transmission means and the displacement means. The gaming machine according to Item 1 or 2.

Images